Traction Elevator Controller Manual

Traction Elevator Controller-
Manual
GAL Manufacturing Corp.

50 East 153rd Street
Bronx, NY 10451
Technical Support: 1-877-425-7778

:
C ONTENTS
Foreword - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1
Important Warnings and Notes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1
Section 1 - Product Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2
Introduction 2
Physical Layout of the Controller 2
Typical Physical Layout 2
Selector System 4
Tape Selector System 4
Tapeless System 5
Secondary Speed Feedback 6
Modes Of Operation 7
Operating Sequence 7
Reset Mode 7
Safety String Open Mode 8
Controller Inspection Mode 8
Car Top Inspection Mode 8
Access Mode 8
Independent Service Mode 9
Load Weighing Bypass Mode 9
Attendant Service Mode 9
Code Blue Hospital Service Mode 9
Fire Service Phase I Mode 10
Fire Service Phase I Alternate Return Mode 10
Fire Service Phase Ii Mode 11
Emergency Power 11
Earthquake Mode 11
Stalled Mode 11
Automatic Mode 12
Section 2 - Product Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 13
General Information 13
Site Selection 13
Environmental Considerations 13
Wiring Guidelines And Instructions 13
The Wiring Prints 13
Ground Wiring 13
Hoistway Wiring 13
Elevator Car Wiring 13
Machine Room Wiring 14
Wiring To Top Of Car Selector 14
Slowdown Limits 14
Normal And Final Limit Switches 14
Selector Installation 16
Tape Selector Installation 16
2
:
Tapeless Selector Installation 24
Section 3 - Adjustment of the GALaxy controller - DSD 412 Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 31
Initial Power-up 31
Check Main Line Voltage 31
SCR Drive Motor Field Current 31
Set Toggle Switches 31
Make Sure The Car Is Safe 31
Check Controller Voltage 31
Verify The Lcd Galaxy Is Blinking 31
Preset Adjustable Variables On Safety Processor Board 32
Place Stop Switch In Run Position 32
Hoist Motor Data 32
SCR Drive Self-Tune 32
Pre-set The Digital Speed Clamps 33
Run The Car On Inspection 33
Ready To Run On Inspection 33
Adjust The Brake Voltage 34
Check The Run Direction 35
Car Runs In The Wrong Direction 35
Drive Trips Immediately 35
Check Inspection Speed 35
Verify Controller Encoder Direction 36
Verify Selector And Slowdown Inputs 36
Verify Car Speed On Safety Processor Board 36
Correct Car Speed When Using A Tape Installed In Hoistway 36
Correct Car Speed When Using An Governor Mounted Encoder 37
Incremental Encoder 1028 Board 37
Absolute Encoder 1066 Board 37
Learn The Hoistway 37
Final Adjustment 38
Automatic Run 38
Fine Tune The Ride Quality 38
Adjust The Stop 39
Adjust The Start 40
Verify Top Speed 40
Adjust Safety Processor Board Speed Clamps 40
Adjust Digital Slowdown Speed Clamps 41
Verify Inspection Velocity Clamp On Safety Processor Board 41
Analog Load Weigher Setup 41
Empty Car Setup 41
Full Car Setup 42
Load Weighing Calibration Sequence 42
Adjust The Motor Pre-torque 42
Verify The Doors Are Safe 42
Section 4 - Adjustment of the GALaxy controller - HPV-600/900 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 44
General Setup 44
Initial Power-up 44
3
:
Verify The Lcd GALaxy Is Blinking 44
Hoist Motor Data 45
Car Runs The Wrong Direction 48
Car Runs Extremely Slow 49
Correct Car Speed When Using A Tape 50
Correct Car Speed When Using An Encoder 51
Incremental Encoder 1028/1066 Board 51
Final Adjustment 52
Automatic Run 52
Drive Adaptive Tune 52
Adjust The Stop 53
Adjust The Start 54
Verify Top Speed 54
Empty Car Setup 56
Full Car Setup 56
Section 5 - Adjustment of the GALaxy Non-Distance Feedback controller - HPV-600/900 - - 58
General Setup 58
Initial Power-up 58
Check Main-line Voltage 58
Verify The Lcd GALaxy Is Blinking 59
Place Stop Swicth In Run Position 59
Hoist Motor Data 59
4
:
HPV 900/600 DRIVE 59
GPD 515 DRIVE 60
Run Car On Inspection 61
Check Run Direction 63
Car Runs Wrong Direction 63
Verify Encoder Connection 63
Check Selector Inputs 64
Verify Slowdown Limits 64
Final Adjustment 65
Automatic Run 65
Adjust The Drive Speed Profile 65
Drive Adaptive Tune (HPV 900 /600 Only) 66
Adjust The Stop 66
Adjust The Start 66
Empty Car Setup 68
Full Car Setup 68
Check The Doors 69
Fine Tune Ride And Stops 69
Section 6 - Adjustment of the GALaxy controller - DC Quattro Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - 70
Initial Power-up 70
Verify The Lcd Galaxy Is Blinking 70
Hoist Motor Data 71
Quattro Drive Self-Tune 71
Car Runs In The Wrong Direction 74
5
:
Correct Car Speed When Using A Tape Installed In Hoistway 75
Correct Car Speed When Using An Governor Mounted Encoder 76
Incremental Encoder 1028 Board 76
Final Adjustment 77
Automatic Run 77
Adjust The Stop 78
Adjust The Start 79
Verify Top Speed 79
Empty Car Setup 80
Full Car Setup 81
Section 7 - Adjustment of the GALaxy - Combivert F5 AC Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83
General Setup 83
Initial Power-up 83
Verify The LCD GALaxy Is Blinking 83
Hoist Motor Data 84
Start-Up Procedure 86
Motor Learn Procedure 86
Encoder Learn Procedure, v1.62 (unroped machine). 86
Encoder Learn Procedure, v1.72 (unroped or roped machine). 87
Run The Car On Inspection with the ropes on the sheave of the motor. 88
Final Adjustment 90
Automatic Run 90
6
:
Adjust The Stop 91
Adjust The Start 91
Empty Car Setup 94
Full Car Setup 94
Section 8 - Adjustment of the GALaxy - HPV-900 Permanent Magnet AC Gearless Motor - - 96
General Setup 96
Initial Power-up 96
Verify The LCD GALaxy Is Blinking 96
Hoist Motor Data 97
PM Start-Up Procedure(no ropes on the sheave of the motor) 98
Encoder Learn Procedure 98
Run The Car On Inspection with the ropes on the sheave of the motor. 100
Final Adjustment 103
Automatic Run 103
Adjust The Stop 103
Adjust The Start 104
Verify Top Speed 104
Empty Car Setup 106
Full Car Setup 107
7
:
Section 9 - Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 109
Microprocessor CPU 109
Input/Output Boards 109
Run Sequence 110
The Safety Processor Board 111
System Faults 113
Main CPU Faults 114
DETAILED FAULT DATA 189
SAFETY PROCESSOR FAULTS 201
Section 10 - LCD Display Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 204
Operating the LCD Interface 204
The LCD Menu Structure 205
Set Date and Time 206
Adjustable Variables 207
Car Motion 208
Car Brake 213
Car Timers 215
Car Options 219
Service Options 224
Fire Options 228
Group Dispatch 230
Group Options 234
Job Statistics 240
Job Statistics 240
Inputs and Outputs 243
Car Inputs and Outputs 244
Group Inputs and Outputs 245
Set Calls and Lockouts 246
Setup Car Calls 247
Setup Down Hall Calls 248
Setup Up Hall Calls 249
Lockout Front Car Calls 250
Lockout Rear Car Calls 251
Elevator Status 252
Fault Log 255
View Fault Log 256
Clear Fault Log 257
Elevator Setup 258
Set Speed Clamps 259
Automatic Learn Hoistway 260
Inspection Learn Hoistway 262
Overspeed Test 263
Car and Counterweight Buffer Test 264
Inspection Open/Close Door 265
Load Weigher Setup 265
Setup Load Weigher 266
8
:
View/Modify LW Setup 267
View/Modify Load Limits 268
Load Weigher Calibration 269
Reset Gripper Fault 270
Lift Brake On Inspection 271
Display Hoistway Tables 272
Select Video Display 273
Software Version 274
Diagnostics 275
View System Status Log 276
Clear System Status Log 277
Group Comm Status 278
Clear Group Comm Status 279
Car Comm Status 280
Clear Car Comm Status 281
Drive Comm Status 282
Clear Drive Comm Status 283
Section 11 - Safety Processor LCD Display Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 285
Operating the LCD Interface 285
The Safety Processor Board LCD Menu Structure 286
Elevator Service 287
Car Speed 289
Car Comm (SPB to CPU) 289
Encoder Communication (Tapeless Selector) 290
Encoder Status (Tapeless Selector) 290
Safety Processor Pulse Count 291
Safety Processor Adjustable Variables 292
Safety Processor Inputs and Outputs 297
Limit Velocity 300
Safety Processor Faults 301
Clear Faults 304
Reset Safety Processor Fault Latch 305
Safety Processor Board Temperature 305
External Temperature 306
Appendix A - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 307
Description of I/O Mnemonics 307
Appendix B - Inspection Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 315
Overspeed Test on a DSD-412 Drive 315
Buffer Test 315
Normal Terminal Slowdown Test 316
Emergency Terminal Limit Test 316
Reset Gripper Fault or Emergency Brake Fault 317
9
Foreword
G.A.L. has developed this manual with usabil-
ity and safety in mind. General and specific
safety notices and precautions are defined in
the manual. However, G.A.L. cannot be
responsible for any injury to persons or dam-
age to propery (including the elevator equip-
ment) resulting from negligence, misuse of the
equipment, misinterpretation of instructions
included in this manual, or due to any other
cause beyond the control of G.A.L.
All drawings, illustrations and information

herein are the propriety property of G.A.L. and
must not be made public or reproduced by any
individual or entity other than the purchaser
hereof without the express written permission
of G.A.L.
Rev. 1.1, (February 2010)

Important Warnings and Notes WARNING: This equipment is an O.E.M.
product designed and built to comply with
The label WARNING denotes operating pro- ASME A17.5 and national electrical code and
cedures and practices that may result in per- must be installed by a qualified contractor. It
sonal injury and/or equipment damage if not is the responsibility of the contractor to make
correctly followed. sure that the final installation complies with
any local codes and is installed safely.
The label NOTE denotes procedures, practices
or information which is intended to be imme- WARNING: Proper grounding is vitally
diately helpful and informative. important to the safe and successful operation
of this system. Bring a separate ground wire
WARNING: Installation and wiring must be for each controller from the building ground to
in accordance with the national electrical code, the ground lug on the controller. You must
all local codes, and elevator codes and regula- choose the proper conductor size and minimize
tions. The 3-phase AC power supply to the the resistance to ground by using shortest pos-
equipment must come from a properly fused sible routing. See national electrical code arti-
disconnect or circuit breaker (not capable of cle 250-95, or related local applicable code.
delivering more than 10,000 rms symmetrical
amperes). Improper motor branch circuit pro- WARNING: Use only the correct rated fusing
tection will void warranty and may create a for controller protection. Use of over rated
hazardous condition. fusing will void the warranty.
WARNING: Wiring to the controller termi- NOTE: Every precaution, whether specifi-
nals must be done in a careful, neat manner. cally stated here or not, should be taken when
Stranded wire conductors must not have installing, adjusting or servicing any elevator.
strands left out of the terminals. Leaving Common sense safety precautions should be
strands of wire out of the terminals creates followed to make sure life and limb of the ser-
potential shorts. All terminals and cable con- vice person and public is not endangered.
nectors must be seated properly. Flat cable
connectors pin #1 (arrow symbol on connec- NOTE: Keep the machine room clean. Do
tor) must match the red stripe on the cable. not install the controller in a dusty area. Do
not install the controller in a carpeted area.
WARNING: Elevator control products must Keep room temperature between 32° F and
be installed by experienced field personnel. 110° F. Avoid condensation on the equipment.
This manual does not address code require- Do not install the controller in a hazardous
ments. The field personnel must know all the location and where excessive amounts of
rules and regulations pertaining to the safe vapors or chemical fumes may be present.
installation and running of elevators, and local Make sure power line fluctuations are within
codes. +/- 10 percent.
1
Section 1 - Product Description • Remote Diagnostics
• Emergency Power
1.1 Introduction
The GALaxy traction elevator controller is a 1.2 Physical Layout of the Controller
computer-based system that offers superior
performance, flexibility and reliability. It has 1.2.1 Typical Physical Layout
been designed to save time in installation and Figure 1.1 shows a typical layout of the GALaxy
troubleshooting, but it is still very important controller in a standard G.A.L. cabinet. Below, is
that the field personal familiarize themselves
a brief description of each block:
with this manual before attempting to install
the equipment. 1. 1038 or 1064 Main Control Board: The
main control board contains input and out-
Specifications: put devices, controller switches, fuses and
field wiring terminal connections.
Environment:
2. Safety Processor Board: The Safety Pro-
• 32° F to 110° F ambient cessor board uses a microprocessor and a
• 12,000 feet altitude PAL device to implement the independent
• 95% humidity speed and redundancy checks required for
A17.1-2000 compliance. This board has
Standard Features: its own LCD display and parameters.
• CSA B44.1-96 ASME A17.1-1996, 3. Main CPU: The computer board is a single
ASME A17.1-2007 certified board IBM compatible computer. It exe-
• Inspection Operation (car top and control- cutes the program and turns on and off the
ler) Inputs and Outputs.
• Access Operation
• Independent Service 4. LCD Display: The LCD display board
• Fire Service Phase 1 provides a user interface to all controller
• Fire Service Phase 1 Alternate Return adjustment and setup parameters. It also
• Fire Service Phase II shows diagnostic information.
• Emergency Power
• Earthquake Service 5. Power Supply: The power supply provides
• On Board Diagnostics LED’s power to the computer and its peripheral
• On Board LCD Display Interface boards. It is a 5 volt DC regulated power
• Two Motor Protection Timers supply rated at 3 amps with over voltage,
• Door Motor Protection Timer and short circuit protection.
• Field Adjustable Parameters
• Elevator Duty Rated NEMA Motor 6. Dynamic Braking Resistors: Additional
space for dynamic braking resistors and
Optional Features: brake resistors.
• Selective Rear Doors 7. Options: This section of the controller is

• Attendant Service provided to mount options such as the Hall
• Code Blue Hospital Service Call I/O board, job specific I/O expansion
• Security and a digital PI display driver.
2
Figure 1.0: Typical Physical Layout
3
8. Transformer: The system transformer is
located in the lower part of the cabinet. It
is usually a 500VA building power to 120
VAC transfer. It is used to convert the
building power to a lower voltage for the
signals and valve power.
9. Contactors: These are various contactors

used for the brake, brake cooling, and run
control.
10. Drive: Magnetek DSD-412 DC SCR

Drive, Magnetek DC Quattro, HPV-600/
900/900 PM or KEB Combivert F5.
11. Motor Contactors: DC or AC rated motor

contactor sized for each specific job.
12. Ground Terminal: The ground terminal

block is where the earth ground is attached.
1.3 Selector System
The selector system for the GALaxy controller

can be either a tape system or tapeless one.
1.3.1 Tape Selector System
The tape system uses a perforated steel tape

that is hung the length of the hoistway. A set
of magnets are placed on the tape at each floor
having one 8” magnet as the door zone magnet
and one to five smaller 2” magnets as binary
position preset magnets. The selector is
mounted on the car and is guided along the
tape by nylon guides to keep the tape and
magnets the proper distance from the selector
sensors. The controller uses the door zone
magnet to determine the elevator’s level
position to the floor. At the dead level
position, the binary preset inputs are read in to
verify that the car is at the correct floor. A
block diagram of the tape system is shown in
Figure 1.1.
4
Figure 1.1: Tape Selector
1.3.2 Tapeless System anytime the car would need to recover to a
floor, such as being moved on inspection. The
The tapeless system uses an absolute encoder encoder is coupled to a rotating shaft on the
mounted on the governor and a four sensor governor. If the governor on the job does not
selector on the car top to read the door zone have a rotating shaft, it must be replaced with
magnet for each floor. The door zone magnets one that does.
are placed in the corner of the rail.
The door zone sensors are used for exact floor
The encoder is used for secondary speed position on stop and re-leveling the car. A
feedback and the absolute position of the car. block diagram of the tapeless selector system
The car position is read on power-up or is shown in Figure 1.2.
5
Figure 1.2: Tapeless Selector
car doors are open and when running on

1.3.3. Secondary Speed Feedback inspection. There are two type of inputs used to
verify the car speed at the terminal landing. The
With a tape system, the tape is perforated with 3/ “UT & DT” slowdown limits are always used to
8 inch holes every 3/8 of an inch. A sensor is verify the velocity of the car at the terminal
mounted on the selector to provide a secondary landings. The emergency slowdown limits “UTS
speed feedback to the Safety Processor Board. & DTS” are used on traction cars greater than
On the tapeless system, the Safety Processor 200 fpm, traction cars with reduced stroke
receives position information every 50 buffers and all hydro cars. Traction cars less than
milliseconds from the absolute encoder and uses 200 fpm read the “UTS & DTS” velocity values
the change in position to calculate velocity. In but will not shut the car down from the velocity
either case, the Safety Processor uses this check. For all control systems, the “UT & DT”
velocity to verity that the car is traveling at a safe limits are used to verify the operation of “UTS &
speed when slowdown limits are hit, when the DTS” and vice versa.
6
1.4 Modes Of Operation respond the fastest takes the call. Real time
based dispatching permits the controllers to
1.4.1 Operating Sequence quickly respond to actual demand for elevator
service. Some of the criteria used to estimate the
Normal elevator operation, Automatic Mode, is time of arrival are listed below.
selective-collective. When the elevator is
traveling upwards to answer calls, all up hall calls • Actual elevator floor to floor run times.
at floors above the car are answered in the order • Actual run time to the floor whether it is a
multi-floor run or a one floor run.
reached by the car, regardless of the order in
• Whether the elevator is in or out of service.
which the calls were registered. Upon reaching
• Whether the elevator is in load weigh
each landing with a car call or hall call registered, bypass mode.
the car and hall doors at that floor are • The direction and position of each elevator
automatically opened. in the group.
• The average door cycle time at each stop.
The doors stay opened for a dwell time that is • Status of each elevator, accelerating, full
field adjustable. There are three different dwell speed, decelerating, actual time in motion.
times depending on whether it is a lobby call, car • Number of stops required due to car calls.
call, or hall call. The door will close before the • Number of stops required due to previ-
set dwell time has elapsed if a passenger presses ously assigned hall calls.
the door close button. The door will reopen • System demand.
before it is fully closed if the door open button is
pressed, if a passenger pushes on the safety edge, The above performance criteria is continuously
if the photo-eye light beam is interrupted, or if a measured and stored for improved accuracy in
call for that floor in the direction of travel is the dispatching algorithm. All of the above data
pushed. The door will close when the door is continuously scanned and the hall calls are
opening condition is eliminated. When the door reassigned if the conditions change and another
has fully closed, the calls are answered. car can respond faster. The ability to measure
actual hall waiting time virtually eliminates long
When all up hall calls and car calls above the car waiting and improves the average hall call
have been answered, the elevator reverses waiting intervals throughout the building.
direction and travels downward to answer car
calls and down hall calls placed below the car. 1.4.2 Reset Mode
The calls are answered as previously described
for up calls. When all calls below a down car are Reset mode is initiated when the elevator power
answered, the car reverses direction to repeat the is first turned on, or when the system is reset.
cycle. In short, an elevator traveling up will When the reset mode is initiated, the controller
bypass down hall calls, and an elevator traveling program is automatically loaded, and internal
down will bypass up hall calls. tests are run to ensure that both the car and
controller are electrically operational before
In buildings with more than one elevator grouped putting the car into service. The car will not
together, the actual time of arrival, “real time”, is move until reset mode is completed. Some of the
used to estimate how long each elevator will take tests are: is the safety string made, is the elevator
to answer a hall call. The elevator that can on inspection operation, is the door close limit
7
open, are the interlocks made up, and whether the 1.4.5 Car Top Inspection Mode
controller knows where the elevator car is within
the hoistway. If all the safeties are made up, and This inspection mode is initiated by placing the
the elevator is on automatic operation, and it is inspection switch on top of the car in the
floor level, the elevator will go into automatic inspection position. Inspection mode permits
mode. If the elevator is not at floor level, it will operation of the car from the car top inspection
run slow speed down to the nearest floor, level station. This mode performs the following
into the floor, and reset the floor position count. operations:
1.4.3 Safety String Open Mode • Disables access top and access bottom hall
switches. Disables the controller inspec-
tion up and down push buttons. Enables
Safety string open mode is initiated when a safety
the car top inspection station up and down
is open. Some of the safeties are listed below. push buttons
• The reverse phase relay. • Door locks are active and must be closed to
• The top final move the car.
• The bottom final • Pressing the inspection station up and safe
• The pit switch push buttons causes the elevator to move at
• The car top stop switch inspection speed in the up direction.
• The governor overspeed switch • Pressing the inspection station down and
• The safety operated switch safe push buttons causes the elevator to
• The Drive Ready relay move at inspection speed in the down
direction.
When the safety string is made back up, the
elevator will go back to reset mode. 1.4.6 Access Mode
1.4.4 Controller Inspection Mode
The access mode is initiated by placing the key
operated access switch located in the car
The controller inspection mode is initiated by
operating panel to the on position. Access mode
placing the “INS” switch on the 1038 or 1064
allows entrance into the hoistway by qualified
board in the inspection position (down).
and authorized elevator maintenance personnel
Controller inspection mode permits operation of
for equipment inspection and service. Access to
the car from the machine room. This mode
the top of the car is possible from the top landing,
performs the following operations:
or to the pit from the bottom landing. Enabling
• Enables the controller inspection “UP” and this mode permits the following operation.
“DOWN” push buttons
• Door locks are active and must be closed to • Enables the access key switches at the top
move the car. and bottom landing in the entrance door
• Pressing the controller “UP” push-button jambs.
causes elevator to move at inspection • Bypasses the gate switch to allow car
speed in the up direction. movement with the car door open.
• Pressing the controller “DOWN” push-but- • Bypasses the top or bottom landing hall
ton causes the elevator to move at inspec- door lock, depending on which terminal
tion speed in the down direction. access switch is being keyed.
8
• Turning the access key switch to the up 1.4.9 Attendant Service Mode
position causes the elevator to move at
inspection speed in the up direction. The attendant service mode is initiated by placing
• Turning the access key switch to the down the key operated attendant switch located in the
position causes the elevator to move at car operating panel to the on position. Attendant
inspection speed in the down direction.
mode permits operation of the car with an
1.4.7 Independent Service Mode attendant. This mode performs the following
operations.
The independent service mode is initiated by • The doors open automatically and stay
placing the key operated independent switch open until closed by the attendant.
located in the car operating panel to the on • Closing the doors requires a momentary
position, or by placing the controller toggle pressure on the door close button, or the up
switch “IND” to the down position. Independent or down buttons located in the car operat-
mode permits operation of the car with an ing panel.
operator. This mode performs the following • Hall initiated calls are answered unless
operations: there is constant pressure on the bypass
button.
• Hall initiated calls are ignored. • Hall lanterns and gongs are enabled.
• Hall lanterns and gongs are disabled. • The direction of preference can be speci-
• The doors open automatically and stay fied by momentary pressure on the up or
open until closed by the operator. down buttons located in the car operating
• Closing the doors requires constant pres- panel.
sure on the door close button.
• When the car door is closed, the car 1.4.10 Code Blue Hospital Service Mode
answers the nearest car initiated call in the
direction of travel. Code blue hospital service mode is initiated by
turning one of the code blue switches, located at
1.4.8 Load Weighing Bypass Mode each floor where medical emergency service is
required, to the on position. A car is selected to
The load weighing bypass mode is initiated when respond to the code blue call. That car will
the car is loaded to a predetermined percentage of perform the following:
full capacity, by closing a connection between
terminals “LC” and “LW”. Load weigh bypass • Cancel all car calls
mode allows the car to answer car calls and • Any hall calls previously assigned will be
lighten the load before answering any more hall transferred to another car.
• If traveling toward the code blue call, it
calls. This mode performs the following
will proceed nonstop to the code blue call
operations: floor.
• Hall initiated calls are ignored. • If traveling away from the code blue call, it
• All other elevator functions as if on full will slow down and stop at the nearest
automatic service. floor, maintain doors closed, reverse direc-
tion and proceed nonstop to the code blue
call floor.
9
• If at a floor other than the code blue call If the car is traveling away from the pri-
floor, the elevator will close the doors and mary return floor, the car will stop at the
proceed nonstop to the code blue call floor. next landing, then go immediately to the
• Once at the code blue call floor, the doors primary return floor.
will open and remain open. • Turning the fire service key switch to the
• The code blue in car switch located in the bypass position will restore the elevator to
car operating panel must then be turned to normal service.
the on position. If the code blue in car • The elevator will perform per ASME
switch is not turned to the on position A17.1 section 211.3 unless otherwise spec-
within 60 seconds from the time the doors ified.
reach full open on the code blue call floor,
the car will revert back to normal opera- 1.4.12 Fire Service Phase I Alternate
tion. Return Mode
• Upon activation of the key switch, it will
allow the car to accept a car call for any Fire service phase I alternate return is initiated
floor, close the doors, and proceed nonstop when the smoke sensor in front of the elevator at
to the floor desired. the primary return floor is activated. When fire
• The return of the code blue in car key
service phase I alternate return is enabled:
switch to the normal position will restore
the car to normal service. • The fire emergency return light illuminates
and the fire buzzer sounds.
1.4.11 Fire Service Phase I Mode • The emergency stop switch is disabled
when the door closes.
Fire service phase I is initiated when the primary • The car travels to the alternate return floor
smoke sensor is activated or the fire key switch without answering any calls, then parks
located in the hall station on the primary return with the door open. The fire buzzer turns
floor is turned to the on position. The primary off, but the fire emergency return light
return floor is usually the lobby floor, but could stays illuminated.
be another landing if it better serves the needs of • If the car is at a landing with the doors
open, the doors will close, and the car will
emergency personnel when fighting a fire or
return non stop to the alternate return floor.
performing rescues. When fire service phase I is If the car is traveling away from the alter-
enabled: nate return floor, the car will stop at the
next landing, then go immediately to the
• The fire emergency return light illuminates
alternate return floor.
and the fire buzzer sounds.
• Turning the fire service key switch the
• The emergency stop switch is disabled
bypass position will restore the elevator to
when the door closes.
normal service.
• The car travels to the primary return floor
• The elevator will perform per ASME
without answering any calls, then parks
A17.1 section 211.3 unless otherwise spec-
with the door open. The fire buzzer turns
ified.
off, but the fire emergency return light
stays illuminated.
• If the car is at a landing with the doors
open, the doors will close, and the car will
return non-stop to the primary return floor.
10
1.4.13 Fire Service Phase Ii Mode • Removing the connection between termi-
nals “HC” and “EMP” will remove the cars
To initiate fire service phase II, the car must first from emergency power operation.
have been placed in fire service phase I, and, as a
result, be parked at the designated level with the
1.4.15 Earthquake Mode
door fully open. Following that, the key operated
fire service phase II switch, located in the car
Earthquake mode is initiated upon activation of a
operating panel must be placed in the on position.
seismic switch or counterweight derailment
Fire service phase II permits operation of the car
switch. This mode performs the following
by a fire fighter. This mode performs operations
operations:
in accordance with ASME A17.1 as follows:
• If in motion, and the seismic switch is acti-
• The doors close only with constant pres-
vated, the car will decelerate into slow
sure on the door close button, after they
speed, proceed to the nearest available
have been fully opened.
floor, open the doors and shut down.
• The doors open only with constant pres-
• If in motion, and the counterweight derail-
sure on the door open button, after they
ment switch is activated, and the car is
have been fully closed.
moving away from the counterweight, then
• Hall lanterns and gongs are disabled.
the car will decelerate into slow speed, and
• Safety edge and electric eye are disabled
proceed to the nearest available floor, open
• All registered car calls can be canceled
the doors and shut down.
with momentary pressure on the call cancel
• If in motion, and the counterweight derail-
button located in the car operating panel.
ment switch is activated, and the car is
• All hall calls are disabled.
moving toward the counterweight, then the
• To remove the car from fire service phase
car will perform an emergency stop, then
II the car must be at the fire return landing
move at slow speed away from the coun-
with the doors in the full open position and
terweight to the nearest available floor.
the phase II switch turned to the off posi-
After stopping at the nearest floor, the
tion.
doors will open and the car will shut down.
• See ASME A17.1 for specific operation of
fire service phase II.
1.4.16 Stalled Mode
1.4.14 Emergency Power
Stalled mode is initiated when the elevator has
been in run mode longer than the field adjustable
Emergency power is initiated when a connection
anti-stall timer. This mode performs the
is made between terminals “HC” and “EMP”.
following operations:
This mode performs the following operations:
• Shuts down the elevator.
• All cars are returned to the bottom floor
• Does not allow the elevator to restart until
one at a time, and remain there with their
elevator is put on inspection or main line
doors open.
switch is cycled.
• If a car is selected to run it will go back
• The door open button remains active.
into normal operation.
11
1.4.17 Automatic Mode
Since this is the normal operating mode, the

controller automatically enters this mode if none
of the previously described modes are activated,
and if no fault is detected. The following
operations are performed in automatic mode:
• The car operates in selective-collective

control sequence when answering calls.
• Hall calls and car calls are functional.
• Hall lanterns and gongs are operational.
• Simplex cars park at the last call answered
unless simplex lobby parking has been
enabled in the program. In a multi-car
group, a car is always parked at the lobby
if no other demand exists.
• The doors remain closed when the car is
parked.
12
Section 2 - Product Description The control system is designed to have a high
immunity to electrical noise, radio frequency
2.1 General Information
radiation, and magnetic interference. However,
high levels of these items could cause
This section provides basic guidelines and interference with certain parts of the control
recommendations for the proper installation of system.
the controller equipment. These guidelines
should be used as general instructions. They are The power supply feeding the controller should
not intended to usurp local codes and regulations. have a fluctuation of no greater than + or - 10%.
2.2 Site Selection 2.4 Wiring Guidelines And Instructions
When choosing the installation site of the 2.4.1 The Wiring Prints
controller, several factors should be considered.
If at all possible, the controller should be installed Each set of wiring schematics is job specific.
in a location where the mechanic has a good view The job name and number will be listed in the
of the machine when he is standing in front of the bottom right corner of each page of the print. A
controller. There should be no obstructions separate binder will be provided for each job
around the controller that would prevent proper containing a complete set of wiring schematics.
routing of necessary conduits entering the
controller. The controller doors should have 2.4.2 Ground Wiring
enough room to fully open and close. All
clearances, working space, lighting, and guarding Proper grounding of the power supply, controller,
should comply with governing codes. elevator car, and hoistway is required. Separate
conductors should be run for “EG” (earth
2.3 Environmental Considerations ground) and “GND” terminals. These terminals
and conductors are detailed on the wiring
The standard controller package is provided with schematics.
a NEMA 1 enclosure. This type of controller
should be installed in a clean and dry 2.4.3 Hoistway Wiring
environment. Ideally, the equipment room
should be temperature controlled between 70 and All hoistway wiring is detailed on the wiring
90 degrees F. However, control equipment will schematics. The number of hoistway conductors
function properly within an ambient temperature is calculated and listed per job on the wiring
range of 35 to 110 degrees F. If temperatures schematics. A job specific “pull sheet” is also
remain at the upper and lower extremes of this provided with the wiring schematics.
range for an extended period of time, the life 2.4.4 Elevator Car Wiring
expectancy of the control equipment may be
shortened. If wet, dusty, or corrosive All elevator car wiring is detailed on the wiring
environments are expected, then optional non- schematics. The number of traveling cable
standard enclosures can be provided. For conductors is calculated and listed per job on the
example NEMA 4, NEMA 12, or NEMA 4X. wiring schematics. A job specific “pull sheet” is
also provided with the wiring schematics.
13
2.4.5 Machine Room Wiring limit would hit the limit at high speed when
recovering from being lost, the extra pulse counts
All machine room wiring is detailed on the from the limit allows the car to slowdown before
wiring schematics. All wire sizes are listed for the trip point is reached.
main power supply, motor wiring, brake wiring
(traction only), and field wiring. The Safety Processor board uses the “UT & DT”
limits to verify the operation of the “UTS &
2.4.6 Wiring To Top Of Car Selector DTS” limits. The pulse input is also verified
while running on automatic.
The car top selector is wired according to the
schematics for the job. However, special The distance that the limits are placed from the
attention should be given to wiring the pulse terminal landing depends on the speed of the car.
sensor on the selector since the output on this Below, Table 1 shows the slowdown limit
device uses +15VDC. Terminal PPS on the locations with respect to contract speed. All
selector is wired to PPS on the controller and distances are show in inches.
selector terminal PP/US is wired to PP on the
controller. 2.6 Normal And Final Limit Switches
2.5 Slowdown Limits

The up and down directional limit switches “UN
& DN” should be set to open one inch past the
There are two sets of slowdown switches used,
terminal floor levels. The top and bottom final
the “UT/DT” switches (including UT1, UT2,
limit switches should be set to open four inches
UT3, DT1, DT2, DT3) and the “UTS/DTS”
past the terminal floor levels.
switches. “UT, UT1, UT2, UT3 & DT, DT1,
DT2, DT3” are used to clamp the speed
command to the drive at the terminal landings
independent of the control of the CPU.
“UTS & DTS” are emergency slowdown limit

switches used on cars with a top speed greater
than 200 fpm or having reduced stroke buffers.
These switches are used as the slowdown speed
verification points by the Safety Processor board.
If the car hits the limit at a speed greater than the
preset speed parameter, power is immediately
removed from the motor and brake for an
emergency stop independent of the main CPU.
The “UT & DT” limit switches are also used as

speed verification points by the Safety Processor
board. When the limit is first hit, the Safety
Processor counts an adjustable number of pulse
counts from that point to determine the velocity
trip point. Since cars with only one slowdown
14
Table 1: Slowdown Distances from Terminal landing
UTS/
UT/ UT1/ UT2/ UT3/ UT4/ UT5/ UT6/ UT7/ UTS/ DTS
FPM (Reduce
DT DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DTS
Stroke
buffer)
50 10” Not 8”
Used
100 21” Not 17”
Used
150 31” Not 28”
Used
200 41” Not 39”
Used
250 52” 36” 36”
300 31” 62” 40” 40”
350 40” 80” 52” 52”
400 50” 99” 66” 66”
450 60” 120” 81” 81”
500 71” 143” 98” 98”
600 65” 130” 195” 137” 137”
700 85” 170” 255” 181” 181”
800 80” 160” 240” 320” 232” 232”
900 98” 196” 293” 391” 289” 289”
1000 93” 187” 280” 374” 467” 353” 353”
1100 110” 219” 329” 439” 548” 380” 380”
1200 106” 211” 317” 422” 528” 633” 448” 448”
1300 103” 206” 310” 413” 516” 619” 723” 521” 521”
1400 102” 204” 306” 408” 510” 612” 714” 816” 600” 600”
15
2.7 Selector Installation
2.7.1 Tape Selector Installation

The tape is installed by first attaching it at the
top of the hoistway approximately 12 inches
from the rail, see Figure 2.0. The tape is then
unreeled from the top of the car while running
down on inspection. At the bottom of the
hoistway it is attached with a spring to keep it
taut. The selector is then mounted on the top
of the car and is connected to the tape by the
nylon guides. Figure 2.1 shows a typical
mounting of the selector to the crosshead.
Figure 2.2a shows the original selector board
(A1011) and 2.2b shows the new selector
board (PCB-1011BN).
To install the floor magnets, the car is placed

dead level to the desired floor. The tape is
then marked at the top left of the selector
through a factory cut guide hole. The car is
moved below the floor so the tape can be
accessed where the selector was sitting at floor
level. A door zone template, provided by
G.A.L., is placed at the mark and the door zone
and binary preset magnets are placed in the
appropriate locations in the template. The
template is then removed from the tape. The
location of each magnet is shown in Figure
2.3.
Table 2, listed below, shows which binary

preset magnets are used for each floor. A “1”
in the table indicates that a magnet is used and
a “0” indicates no magnet.
16
Table 2: Binary Preset Magnets
Floor BP32 BP16 BP8 BP4 BP2 BP1
1 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 0 0 0 1 0 0
5 0 0 0 1 0 1
6 0 0 0 1 1 0
7 0 0 0 1 1 1
8 0 0 1 0 0 0
9 0 0 1 0 0 1
10 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 0 0 1 0 1 1
12 0 0 1 1 0 0
13 0 0 1 1 0 1
14 0 0 1 1 1 0
15 0 0 1 1 1 1
16 0 1 0 0 0 0
17 0 1 0 0 0 1
18 0 1 0 0 1 0
19 0 1 0 0 1 1
20 0 1 0 1 0 0
21 0 1 0 1 0 1
22 0 1 0 1 1 0
23 0 1 0 1 1 1
24 0 1 1 0 0 0
25 0 1 1 0 0 1
26 0 1 1 0 1 0
17
27 0 1 1 0 1 1
28 0 1 1 1 0 0
29 0 1 1 1 0 0
30 0 1 1 1 1 0
31 0 1 1 1 1 1
32 1 0 0 0 0 0
33 1 0 0 0 0 1
34 1 0 0 0 1 0
35 1 0 0 0 1 1
36 1 0 0 1 0 0
37 1 0 0 1 0 1
38 1 0 0 1 1 0
39 1 0 0 1 1 1
40 1 0 1 0 0 0
41 1 0 1 0 0 1
42 1 0 1 0 1 0
43 1 0 1 0 1 1
44 1 0 1 1 0 0
45 1 0 1 1 0 1
46 1 0 1 1 1 0
47 1 0 1 1 1 1
48 1 1 0 0 0 0
49 1 1 0 0 0 1
50 1 1 0 0 1 0
51 1 1 0 0 1 1
52 1 1 0 1 0 0
53 1 1 0 1 0 1
18
54 1 1 0 1 1 0
55 1 1 0 1 1 1
56 1 1 1 0 0 0
57 1 1 1 0 0 1
58 1 1 1 0 1 0
59 1 1 1 0 1 1
60 1 1 1 1 0 0
61 1 1 1 1 0 1
62 1 1 1 1 1 0
63 1 1 1 1 1 1
19
Figure 2.0: Typical Tape Mounting
20
Figure 2.1: Typical Mounting of Selector
21
Figure 2.2a - Selector Board A1011 Figure 2.2b - Selector Board 1011BN
22
Figure 2.3: Selector Tape Layout
Figure 2.4: Magnets
23
2.7.2 Tapeless Selector Installation Mount the selector box on top the car with the
provided brackets, see figures 2.4. The magnets
Installation of the tapeless selector begins with will be placed in the corner of the rail. The door
replacing the existing governor if it does not zone sensors will face the magnet and make a 45
have a rotating shaft to one that does. Mount degree angle with the face of the rail.
the encoder on the governor and connect the Use the template to position the selector head
encoder cable to the Safety Processor Board as the correct distance from the rail, see figure 2.5.
per the job prints. The mounting screws on the selector box and
on the brackets are slotted to make the necessary
alignments.
Figure 2.4: Tapeless Selector Mounted on Crosshead
24
Figure 2.5: Door zone template used to set selector distance
The selector head can be mounted with a left or order listed above always starting with the top
right vertical orientation. Each of the sensor sensor as UL, see figure 2.7. Since the PC board
wires are individually plugged into the selector mounting holes are symmetrical, the board can
board according to the orientation of how the be rotated to the right side up position. With
box is mounted. The sensors are wired with UL the selector and car top box mounted on the car
at the top then DZU, DZD and finally DL at top, wire the selector board to the car top board.
the bottom, see Figure 2.6. If the box has to be
mounted upside down (having the PC board
upside down) simply re-wire the sensors in the
25
Figure 2.6: Sensor Orientation and Wiring
26
Figure 2.7: Sensor Orientation Upside Down
After the selector installation is complete and the

car is running on inspection, door zone magnets
can be placed at each floor. With the car dead
level at the floor, place the template in the corner
of the rail with the tab lined up with top of the
selector door zone sensor bracket see figure 2.8
Make a mark across the flat edge of the template.
Move the car down then place the template on
the rail and align the position mark. Place the
magnet in the slot and remove the template.
27
Figure 2.8: Door zone template
28
29
30
Section 3 - Adjustment of the hoist motor. Compare the name plate field
GALaxy controller - DSD 412 Drive current with the setting of the “S1” dip switch
on the SCR drive unit, and verify that the
3.1 General Information setting is correct.
Before adjustment begins the following items 3.2.3 Set Toggle Switches
must be completed.
Flip all toggle switches on the 1038 or 1064
1 All field wiring and safety circuits board down except for the gate and lock
installed bypass switches. The gate and lock bypass
switches should be place in the up position.
2 Temporary jumpers from terminal “HC”
to terminals “MES & ALT”
3.2.4 Make Sure The Car Is Safe
3 All hoistway limit switches installed
Verify that all elevator doors are closed and
4 All car and hoistway doors and interlocks that all safety circuits are functional.
installed and pre-adjusted
3.2.5 Check Controller Voltage
5 Selector installed and magnets pre-
adjusted Turn the main-line disconnect to the on
position. Check the voltage at L1, L2, and L3
6 Familiarize yourself with all wiring on the SCR drive. Verify that all three phases
schematics are present. Check the voltage at fuses L1, L2,
and L3 (if present) on controller. If correct,
7 Familiarize yourself with the DSD-412
check the voltage at terminal “LIN” with
SCR drive, drive manual, parameter
adjustment, etc. respect to “GND”. The voltage should read
120VAC. If correct, check the voltage at
3.2 Initial Power-up terminals “S10, LC, & HC” with respect to
“GND”. All should read 120VAC. If not,
3.2.1 Check Main Line Voltage check wiring diagram to determine problem
before continuing.
With main-line disconnect in the off position, 3.2.6 Verify The Lcd Galaxy Is Blinking
check the line-side voltage with a volt meter to
insure the voltage matches the controller name
Check to make sure that the “axy” of GALaxy
tag “Input Power” voltage. Check to insure all
on the LCD display is blinking. If the “axy” is
three phases are present. If voltage is not
blinking, continue to the next step. If not,
correct or all three phases are not present, do
check voltage at terminals 5V to 0V on the
not proceed until corrected.
1038 or 1064 board to insure 5VDC. If 5VDC
3.2.2 SCR Drive Motor Field Current is present and the “axy” on the LCD display is
not blinking, then contact factory.
Verify that the rated motor field current is set
properly on the SCR drive unit by first
checking the name plate field current on the
31
3.2.7 Preset Adjustable Variables On Safety 3.2.9 Hoist Motor Data
Processor Board At this time the hoist motor data must be
entered into the SCR drive. The following
The safety processor (1028N/1066) board is functions must be entered or verified using the
normally preset prior to leaving the factory, drive display unit. Follow the instructions in
however, it is prudent to check the setup the SCR drive manual to enter the following
values for the proper settings. Refer to section data for each function:
6 of this manual for the operation of the safety
processor board LCD display interface. The Function #3 - RATED ARM AMP
following adjustment variables must be set Function #7 - RATED ARM V
Function #10 - ENCODER P/R
properly:
Function #11 - MOTOR RPM
• Top Spd (contract speed) Function #17 - RATED FT/MIN
• Enc RPM (if Fdbk Typ=1) Function #21 - ACC RATE FT/SEC2
• Enc PPR (if Fdbk Typ=1) (~ 4.2)
• Fdbk Typ (0=tape, 1=enc) Function #40 - RESPONSE (~ 6.0)
• Ctrl Typ (1=Tr NDF, 2=Tract DF) Function #41 - SYSTEM INERTIA
• 2 Stop (0=Mult, 1=2 stop) (~ 2.5)
• RearDoor (0=Front only, 1=Rear) Function #49 - WEAK FIELD AMP
• UTS Vel (Set to top speed) Function #50 - FULL FIELD AMP
• DTS Vel (Set to top speed) Function #52 - RATED FIELD VDC
• INS Vel (Set to 140) Function #53 - STANDING FIELD
• LEV Vel (Set to 140) AMP
• UT Vel (Set to 500) Function #56 - FIELD STRENGTH
• DT Vel (Set to 500) SPEED (~ 75)
• UL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) Function #57 - FIELD WEAKEN
• DL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) SPEED (~ 75)
• Dmd Mult (Set to 1.000) Function #994 - to save data just
• SoftStop (Set to 1) entered
Note that the velocity variables will be setup After Function #994 has been
once the car is running on automatic. performed successfully, then proceed
to the next step.
3.2.8 Place Stop Switch In Run Position
3.2.10 SCR Drive Self-Tune
Flip the “STOP” toggle switch on the 1038 or
To have the SCR drive unit learn the
1064 board to the up position. Verify that
parameters of the hoist motor the drive self-
input LED’s for “LC, HC, DN, UN, SS, GTS,
tune must be performed. Remove the drive
RDY and CS” are all on. If not, then correct reset “RST” wire from TB1 pin 49 of the
field wiring. drive. Turn on the main disconnect. Perform a
FUNCTION #997(see SCR drive manual) to
self-tune the hoist motor. During this test, the
“MC” contactor will energize for short period
of time. After the self-tune is performed
32
correctly, “PASS” will appear on the drive unit Set the speed for Ins/Leveling for 140 fpm and
display. If a fault appears on the drive unit all the remaining slowdown limit speeds to the
display, the problem must be corrected and the contract speed of the car. Please note that the
self-tune performed again. If the self-tune is displayed value of “Clamp Speed” is the value
successful, then the following FUNCTIONS the clamp should be set to. The slowdown
must be viewed and recorded. limit “Clamp Speed:” will show 0000 until the
car is run into the limits and the speed is
Function #613
recorded. Please refer to the LCD Display
Function #614
Interface section for the Elevator Setup Menu.
Function #615
3.3 Run The Car On Inspection
The value of Function #613 should be
manually entered into Function #4 -
3.3.1 Ready To Run On Inspection
ARM OHMS.
The value of Function #614 should be The car should be ready to run on inspection if
manually entered into Function #6 - all is wired correctly. Select the “Elevator
ARM L. Status” on the main CPU board LCD display.
The display should show “Out of Service” on
The value of Function #615 should be the first line and “Inspection Mode” on the
manually entered into Function #51 - second. The LCD display on the Safety
FIELD L/R. Processor Board will display one of the
following types of inspection:
After these values are entered successfully,
• “MR INS” (Motor Room)
perform a Function #994 to save all data. Turn
• “CT INS” (Car Top)
off the main disconnect and reconnect the
• “ACCESS” (Access)
drive reset wire “RST” to TB1 pin 49 of the
• “IC INS” (In Car)
drive.
• “AUTO” (Not on Inspection)
3.2.11 Pre-set The Digital Speed Clamps
To run the car from the motor room, “MR
Pre-set the software digital speed clamps from INS” should be displayed.
the LCD interface under the “Elevator Setup
The “inspection string” consists of contacts
Menu”. The submenus for the clamp speeds
from the inspection switches and the gate and
are as follows:
lock bypass switches in series. One and only
one of the five inspection inputs should be on
Set Ins/Leveling Clamp for the car to run. Starting from the car top
Set DT/UT Slowdown Clamp inspection input, the five inspection inputs are,
Set DT1/UT1 Slowdown Clamp “INS” for car top, “ACC” for access, “ICI” for
Set DT2/UT2 Slowdown Clamp in-car, “MRI” for motor room, and “AUTO”
Set DT3/UT3 Slowdown Clamp for automatic (no inspection). The inspection
Set DTS/UTS Slowdown Clamp string circuit is shown in Figure 3.1.
33
Figure 3.1: Inspection String
Note that any one of the following conditions If the controller is not on motor room
will cause an inspection error: inspection at this point, then verify all switch
positions and wiring before proceeding.
• More than one inspection input is on
• No inspection input is on 3.3.2 Adjust The Brake Voltage
• Gate or Lock bypass switch is open and the
car is not on car top inspection Momentarily push the inspection “UP” or
“DOWN” push button on the 1038 or 1064
board while checking the DC brake voltage
with a meter. If the voltage is not correct,
adjust the voltage by turning power off from
the main-line disconnect and then moving the
resistor tap on the brake resistor. Re-apply
34
power and then test the brake voltage again. controlled and in correct direction. If so
Make sure that the brake is lifting and setting proceed to “Check Inspection Speed”. If not
properly before proceeding. contact the factory.
3.3.3 Check The Run Direction 3.3.5 Drive Trips Immediately
Momentarily push the inspection “UP” or If the elevator tries to run, but immediately
“DOWN” push button on the 1038 or 1064 trips on a drive fault #99, then turn off the
board. One of the following should take place: main disconnect, and swap the encoder
direction by swapping the wires or if an
The elevator will run controlled, in the correct encoder isolation board (1022N) is used, move
direction (up for “UP” button, down for J5 and J6 on the encoder board. Refer to the
“DOWN” button) with no drive faults. If so jumper diagram on the board.
proceed to “Check Inspection Speed”.
To change the encoder direction at the drive,
The elevator will run controlled, but in the
swap the following wires:
wrong direction (down for “UP” button, up of
“DOWN” button) with no drive faults. If so
A+ (TB3-2) with B+ (TB3-4)
proceed to section “Car Runs In The Wrong
A- (TB3-3) with B- (TB3-5)
Direction”.
Turn on the main disconnect and run the
The elevator will try to run, but immediately
elevator on inspection again. If the elevator
trip on a drive fault #99. If so proceed to
runs controlled and in the correct direction,
section “Drive Trips Immediately”.
proceed to next section.
3.3.4 Car Runs In The Wrong Direction
If the elevator runs controlled but in the wrong
direction, the go back and follow the directions
in the “Car Runs The Wrong Direction”
direction, with no drive faults, then turn off the
section.
main disconnect, swap the hoist motor field
If the car still trips immediately on an a drive
wires.
fault #99, then contact the factory.
.
Also swap the encoder direction by 3.3.6 Check Inspection Speed
swapping the wires or if an encoder
isolation board (1022N) is used, move J5
With a hand held tachometer, check the speed
and J6 on the encoder board. Refer to the
of the elevator while running on inspection.
jumper diagram on the board.
The elevator should be running at 25 f.p.m.
Also run the elevator while monitoring
To change the encoder direction at the drive,
Function #600 on the SCR drive display. This
swap the following wires:
parameter should also read 25 f.p.m.
A+ (TB3-2) with B+ (TB3-4).
From the LCD interface select the “Display
A- (TB3-3) with B- (TB3-5)
Hoistway Tables” menu. While running on
Turn the main disconnect on, run the elevator
inspection, monitor the controller demand
on inspection again, and it should run
speed. If the velocity on the LCD display is
35
incorrect, check the Encoder RPM and PPR 3.3.8 Verify Selector And Slowdown Inputs
parameters from the “Adjustable
Variables” menu. These variables should Run the elevator up on inspection until it stops
be set the same as Function #10 on the up normal limit. The up and down
(ENCODER P/R) and Function #11 normal limits should be set one inch above and
(MOTOR RPM) on the drive, respectively. below the terminal floors respectively. Verify
the selector inputs are being set properly on the
If the speed on all three of these devices read controller by running the elevator down until it
approximately 25 fpm (within +/-2 fpm) stops on the down normal limit.
continue to the next step. If not, contact the
factory. As the car approaches dead level to the floor
going down, “DL” turns on first, then “DZ”
3.3.7 Verify Controller Encoder Direction and then finally “UL” At floor level, “UL, DL,
and DZ” inputs should all be on at the same
With the LCD interface displaying “Elevator time. Leaving the floor going down “DL” will
Status”, hit the “Up” or “Down” menu button turn off first, then “DZ” and last “UL”.
to change the screen to a motion screen.
Monitor the direction of the car from “DIR” on Also verify that the up and down terminal
the display or from the direction the pulse slowdown limits inputs “UT, UTS, DT &
counts are counting. DIR will show “Up” for DTS” are breaking at the proper distances as
up and “Dn” for down. The pulse counts shown in the slowdown table 2.0. “UT, UTS,
should increment going up and decrement DT & DTS” turn off when active.
going down.
3.3.9 Verify Car Speed On Safety Processor
If the direction is wrong or the pulse counts Board
change in the wrong direction, then the
encoder direction to the controller must be Run the car in either direction and check the
changed. If an encoder isolation board car speed on the safety processor LCD display.
(1022N) is used, move J1 and J2 on the The speed shown should match the car’s speed
encoder board. Refer to the jumper actual speed. If the speed does not match and
diagram on the board. the secondary feedback comes from pulses
from the tape go to “Correct Car Speed When
If no encoder isolation board is used, the A+ Using A Tape”. If the secondary feedback
and A- encoder wires from the drive must be comes from an encoder go to “Correct Car
swapped. Note that the motor encoder wires Speed When Using An Encoder”. If the
are daisy chained from the encoder to the drive correct speed is shown proceed to the “Learn
and then from the drive to the controller the Hoistway” section.
encoder board. Only the A+ and A- wires
from the drive to the controller board must be 3.3.10 Correct Car Speed When Using A
swapped. The wires from the encoder to the Tape Installed In Hoistway
drive must remain on the same terminal The tape has holes every 3/8” that are 3/8” in
locations on the drive. diameter. On the selector unit adjust the PP
sensor closer to the tape until the orange LED
If the encoder is counting properly continue to at the end of the sensor turns on. Then turn the
the next step. If not, contact the factory. sensor inwards another 1/8” and lock in the
36
sensor. While running on top of car inspection number such as 1024 or 2048. Check the
verify that the orange LED at the end of the PP encoder part number and enter the encoder
sensor turns on and off as it passes by the holes PPR. Run the car on inspection and verify the
on the tape. The safety processor measures the velocity on the “CAR SPD” display. Compare
time between each pulse to calculate the the velocity with a hand held tachometer on
velocity. If the velocity is not displayed the vertical part of the governor cable. If the
correctly first make sure that the feedback type correct velocity is not obtained, contact the
in the safety processor board adjustable factory. If the correct speed is shown proceed
variable is set to 0 for a tape application. Next, to the “Learn Hoistway” step.
while the car is running, make sure that the
PULSE LED on this board is pulsing. As the 3.3.13 Absolute Encoder 1066 Board
car increases in speed the LED will glow solid
on. If the LED does not pulse, try swapping The Safety Processor 1066 Board uses a serial
the wires at the PPS and PP terminals. If the interface to a Turck absolute encoder, part #
LED still does not work, contact the factory. If T8.5882.3FB8.3001. With this system, the
the correct speed is shown proceed to “Learn encoder PPR is 8192 and this value should set
the Hoistway”. in the SPB. The RPM is calculated as above.
3.3.11 Correct Car Speed When Using An Verify communications between the encoder
Governor Mounted Encoder and the Safety Processor Board on the LCD
Interface Display “ENC COM”. Run the car
When using an encoder for the secondary speed and verify that the “PLS CNT” on the SPB is
feedback, make sure that the adjustable variables incrementing when running up or
on the safety processor board are set properly. decrementing when running down. The “PLS
Set the feedback type to 1 for encoder and set the CNT” value can be considerably out of range
encoder RPM and PPR appropriately for how the but will automatically correct during the Learn
encoder is driven. To calculate the RPM, divide Hoistway procedure. To reverse the direction
the contract speed of the car by the distance travel of counting, change the adjustable variable
“ENC DIR” on the SPB LCD Display
in one revolution with the governor as shown
Interface from “CW” to “CCW” or vise versa.
below:
Run the car at a know inspection speed and
verify the velocity on the “CAR SPD” display.
RPM = Speed fpm/(diameter GOV * pi ft/rev)
If the correct velocity is not obtained, contact
For a 1 ft. diameter governor: the factory. If the correct speed is shown
proceed to the “Learn Hoistway” step.
RPM = 350/(1*pi) = 350/3.1415 = 111.4
3.4 Learn The Hoistway
For a 16 in diameter governor (16/12 = 1.33ft)
The elevator should now be stopped on the
RPM = 350/(1.33* 3.1415) = 350/4.188 = 83.5 down normal limit with the inspection speed
set to 25 f.p.m. Verify that the “DN and DL”
3.3.12 Incremental Encoder 1028 Board input LED’s are both off. From the LCD
interface choose to “Learn Hoistway”. Follow
On a standard incremental encoder, the pulses the instructions on the screen.
per revolution are usually part of the part
37
In general, the car is run from the bottom of was successful the elevator should be ready to
the hoistway, the down normal limit, to the top make an automatic run.
of the hoistway, the top normal limit.
The default parameter settings for the ride
NOTE!!! The car must run the entire quality should be adequate for an initial run.
hoistway without stopping. From the LCD interface select the “Set Car
Call” menu and using the up and down arrow
As the elevator moves up the hoistway, go to keys, setup a call. The elevator should run to
the “Display Hoistway Tables” menu on the answer the call. When the elevator levels in
LCD display and verify again that the “DPP” and stops at the floor, the doors will remain
pulse count on the screen are incrementing. closed.
Also as the elevator passes each floor, the
pulse count and distance for that floor should The acceleration and deceleration of the car
change and be stored. Verify that the floor should be smooth and stepless regardless of
distances are valid. The pulse count for the the distance of the run. If the elevator does not
terminal slowdowns will also be stored. The function as described above, then problem
elevator will stop when it reaches the up should be analyzed before proceeding.
normal limit.
3.5.2 Fine Tune The Ride Quality
After the elevator stops, move the elevator on
inspection until the “DZ and DL” LED’s are In order to fine tune the ride quality, refer to
on. Flip the “INS” toggle switch on the 1038 Figure 3.2 which describes what part of the S-
or 1064 board to the up position, and the curve that the different parameters effect. In
elevator should level down to floor level at the general, higher numbers in the given
top floor. If so, proceed to final adjustment. parameters, cause quicker and more abrupt
changes from one mode to the next during a
If the car levels down but does not run, then run. All of the S-curve parameters have a
check “Elevator Status” and “View Fault minimum and maximum value. The control
Log” on the LCD interface for a binary preset will not allow you to enter values that are not
error. If the car oscillates at the floor, then valid. After adjusting the S-curve parameters,
check the distance of the “UL” and “DL” proceed to the next step.
sensors. If he sensors are too close together,
spread both sensors apart slightly. After
problem is corrected, proceed to final
adjustment.
3.5 Final Adjustment
3.5.1 Automatic Run
The elevator should now be sitting idle at the

top floor. The “AD” and “IND” toggle
switches on the 1038 or 1064 board should still
be in the down position. If the learn procedure
38
Figure 3.2: S-Curve Parameters
3.5.3 Adjust The Stop If the car stops hard on the brake, then increase
the brake drop delay until the motor stops
When at floor level the “UL, DL, & DZ” input turning completely before the brake sets. The
LED’s should be on. If the elevator soft stop time MUST be set to at least 0.5
continually tries to seek floor level by leveling seconds LONGER than the brake drop delay.
up and down, check the motor field voltage to
be at the nameplate voltage while leveling. If Important: If you increase the soft stop time
the motor field voltage is fine but the car on the controller you need to also increase the
seems sluggish then increase the response of soft stop parameter on the safety processor
the drive. If the car still re-levels at the floor, board. Make sure that the soft stop parameter
try the following steps to correct the problem: on the safety processor board is larger than the
soft stop parameter on the controller.
1 Reduce the leveling and re-leveling veloc-
ity parameters in the car and retest. If the car spots when approaching the floor, the
2 If the car still oscillated, adjust the “dead cause is usually from the car not tracking (the
zone” on the selector. The “dead zone” is drive response is set too low) or the speed
increased by moving the selector sensor profile into the floor is too sharp. First try to
boards closer together. increase the response of the drive.
39
If the car still spots, increase the floor targeting 3.5.6 Adjust Safety Processor Board Speed
distance and retest the ride. The default value Clamps
for the floor targeting distance is 12 inches.
Increase it by steps of 2 or 3 and continue Make a one floor run to the top floor. After the
retesting until the parameter is adjusted to 18. car stops, record the velocity the car hit the
If no change is notices, start again from 12 and “UT, DT, UTS & DTS” slowdown limits.
decrease the value. “UTS & DTS” are used on car with reduced
stroke buffers or with a top speed greater than
The deceleration rate can also be reduced a 200 fpm. The velocity value is shown from the
little to help remove the spotting. Once the LIM VEL menu on the safety processor board
proper stop is achieved, proceed to “Adjust LCD display.
The Start”.
The velocity value shown on the display for
3.5.4 Adjust The Start the “UT or DT” limit is the value after the car
hits the limit then counts the adjustable
To provide a proper start, adjust the brake pick number of counts set from “UT Count” or “DT
delay, pattern delay, and soft start jerk rate. Count”. When using a tape feedback, there are
Initially, set the brake pick delay to 0 and 16 pulse counts per foot or 1.333 pulses per
increase the pattern delay by 0.1 seconds until inch. If the limit is set to 40” from the
the controller picks the brake completely terminal, to set the checkpoint at 20” use a
before the motor starts to move. If roll back count value of (20 * 1.333) = 26.6. Round up
occurs, then reduce the pattern delay until the and set the UT and DT count to 27. If the UT
roll back is gone. Sometimes, the timing works or DT Counts are modified, the limit velocity
out better if the brake pick delay is set to 0.1 has to be rechecked.
second.
Run the car again to the top repeatedly from 2
Adjust the soft start to for the quickness in floors, then 3 floors, etc, until top speed is
reaching constant acceleration. Keep in mind reached. Record the limit velocities each time
that the larger the soft start number, the the car stops at the top floor.
quicker the start. The ride should now be
acceptable. Make the same runs to the bottom floor
starting from 1 floor, then 2 floors, then 3
3.5.5 Verify Top Speed floors, etc, until top speed is reached. Record
the limit velocities each time the car stops at
To fine tune high speed, make high speed runs the bottom floor.
while monitoring Function #600 on the SCR
drive display. The speed should be slightly Take the highest speed value for the up or
under contract speed. down terminal slowdown limit, add 20 fpm
and then set the new value in the
If the speed is slightly under contract speed corresponding variable from the ADJ VAR
then verify that Function #10 Encoder PPR menu.
and Function #11 Rated Motor RPM are set as
per motor data. When the SCR display reads
contract speed, proceed to the next step.
40
3.5.7 Adjust Digital Slowdown Speed
Clamps 3.5.9 Analog Load Weigher Setup
Having just made several runs into the top and If the job uses an analog load weigher
bottom landings, the main CPU has also purchased from G.A.L., complete the follow
recorded the car’s velocity when the slowdown procedure. It is recommend to use two people,
limits were hit. If the car has been powered one moving the weights and one in the
down prior to this step, several runs have to be machine room to set up the load weigher.
made to the limits to allow the main CPU to
Mount the load weigher as described by the
record the limit velocity values. manufacturer. The load weigher control box
will also contain a board supplied by G.A.L.
From the main CPU LCD interface, choose that connects to the controller serial CAN bus
“Elevator Setup” and hit enter. Next choose and reads in the analog output from the load
“DT/UT Slowdown Clamp” and again hit weighing device. Wire the load weigher and
enter. G.A.L. board according to the controller
The display will show the Speed the car hit the schematics.
clamp on the previous run as “Clamp Speed”
and “UT/DT Limit” with a value to be Calibrate the load weighing device hardware
modified. Set the UT/DT Limit with the value according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
shown as Clamp Speed. If the Clamp Speed The controller setup for the load weigher is in
shows 0000 either the limit is not being used or two parts, empty car for each floor and full
load for each floor. It is possible to manually
the limit was not hit.
setup the load weigher from the LCD interface
using the and the View/Modify Load Limits
Adjust speed clamps for each slowdown limits menu.
used as determined by the elevator’s contract
speed. 3.5.9.1 Empty Car Setup
3.5.8 Verify Inspection Velocity Clamp On With an empty car placed on independent
Safety Processor Board operation and turn the auto-door switch to off.
From the LCD interface, select Elevator Setup,
With the car on inspection, set the inspection then select Load Weigher Setup and the select
speed on the safety processor board to 25 fpm Setup Load Weigher.
(Refer to Safety Processor Adjustable
Variables in section 11). Set the inspection The LCD interface will show setup
speed on the main CPU to 50 fpm (Refer to instructions as you go through the procedure.
Adjustable Variables in section 10). Run the It is okay to exit the setup screen to place a call
car in either direction on inspection. The car and then return to it while the setup is being
will shutdown when the speed goes above 25 performed. The actual load value read from the
fpm. analog to digital converter and the percent load
can be viewed from the View/Modify LW
Reset the inspection speed on main CPU to the Setup menu. The percent load value will not be
desired inspection speed and set the inspection displayed correctly until the setup is complete
speed on the Safety Processor to 140 fpm or and the door has been cycled.
lower. Make sure the car will run on inspection
without shutting down.
41
Run the car to the bottom floor and press Enter this calibration sequence, the load weigher and
on the LCD interface when prompted to do so the pre-torque feature (if used) is disabled.
to start the automatic setup sequence.
If the car is at the bottom floor and the doors A load weighing calibration sequence can be
are not closed (the doors will not close manually activated from the LCD interface by
automatically from turning off the auto-door
selecting Load Weigher Calibration under the
switch) then place a car call to run the car up
one floor then back again. The doors will Load Weigher Setup menu and following the on
close when the call is placed. screen instructions.
When the automatic sequence is activated, the 3.5.10 Adjust The Motor Pre-torque
car will run to each floor and measure the The motor pre-torque uses the load value
empty load value. The LCD display will obtained from the analog load weigher and
indicate when the sequence if finished. will work only if the load weigher is
installed and successfully setup.
3.5.9.2 Full Car Setup
The empty car setup must be successfully To enable pre-torquing on the drive, set
completed to run the full load setup. parameter number 114 on the DSD-412 drive
to “ON”. Remember to go to parameter 994 to
Once the empty setup is complete, run to the save any changed parameters. Run the empty
loading floor and turn the auto-door switch on car to a middle floor. From the LCD interface
to allow weights to be loaded on the car. With set the adjustable variable for percent balanced
the car fully loaded, turn off the auto-door load to the balanced load value (typically
switch and run the car to the bottom floor. 40%). Set the torque amount to 10.00%, set the
Again if the doors are not closed, make a one pattern delay to2.15 seconds and the brake
floor run to force the doors to close. pick delay to 0.1 seconds. The long patter
delay will cause an exaggerated amount of roll
With the car at the bottom floor, follow the back or roll forward. Make a one floor run and
LCD interface instructions to press enter to note the amount of roll. Increase the torque
start the full load setup sequence. The car will amount until the drive can hold the car without
automatically run to each floor and measure any motion for the entire pattern delay time.
the full load value. When the full load Reduce the pattern delay so that the car takes
measurement is complete, the car can be run to of just after the brake lifts.
the loading floor and the weights removed. Note that the pattern delay must be at least
0.15 seconds (150 milliseconds). Setting the
From the LCD user interface, set the percent torque amount to 0.00 will disable the pre-
values for load bypass (60%), load anti- torque feature. Also if the load weighing
nuisance (10%), load dispatch (40%) and load calibration sequence detects a load weighing
overload (110%). Setting the adjustable error, the pre-torque feature is also
variable to 0% will disable that particular automatically disabled.
option. To disable load bypass, set the percent
value for load bypass to 0. 3.5.11 Verify The Doors Are Safe
3.5.9.3 Load Weighing Calibration The elevator should now be adjusted. Verify
Sequence that all door locks, gate switches, and safety
circuits are operational. Flip the “INS” and
The load weigher is automatically calibrated “AD” toggle switches to the up position. The
once each week. If an error is detected during elevator should level into the floor and open
42
the doors. If the doors do not open, correct the
door wiring. If the doors do open, the elevator
is now on independent service.
Ride the elevator and evaluate the ride quality.

Fine tune ride quality with the field adjustable
parameters. Keep in mind that if acceleration
or deceleration values are changed, the speed
clamps for the safety processor board and the
S-curve board may need to be re-adjusted.
Fine-tune the floor level magnets. After the

magnets are set exactly floor level and glued,
learn the hoistway again. Check all signal
devices for proper operation and remove all
temporary jumpers. The adjustment should
now be complete.
43
Section 4 - Adjustment of the correct or all three phases are not present, do
GALaxy controller - HPV-600/900 not proceed until corrected.
4.1 General Setup 4.2.2 Set Toggle Switches
Before adjustment begins the following items Flip all toggle switches on the 1038 or 1064
must be completed. board down except for the gate and lock
bypass switches. The gate and lock bypass
1. All field wiring and safety circuits switches should be place in the up position.
installed
2. Temporary jumpers from terminal “HC”
to terminals “MES & ALT” Verify that all elevator doors are closed and
that all safety circuits are functional.
3. All hoistway limit switches installed
4. All car and hoistway doors and interlocks
Turn the main-line disconnect to the on
5. Selector installed and magnets pre- position. Check the voltage at R, S, and T on
adjusted the AC drive. Verify that all three phases are
present. Check the voltage at fuses L1 and L2
6. Familiarize yourself with all wiring on controller. If correct, check the voltage at
schematics terminal “LIN” with respect to “GND”. The
voltage should read 120VAC. If correct,
7. Familiarize yourself with the Magnetek check the voltage at terminals “S10, LC, &
HPV 900/600 AC Vector Elevator Drive HC” with respect to “GND”. All should read
Technical Manual. 120VAC. If not, check wiring diagram to
determine problem before continuing.
8. Verify that the AC motor is properly
wired. 4.2.5 Verify The Lcd GALaxy Is Blinking
9. Verify that the tachometer is connected
properly.
4.2 Initial Power-up blinking, continue to the next step. If not,
4.2.1 Check Main Line Voltage 1038 or 1064 board to insure 5VDC. If 5VDC
is present and the “axy” on the LCD display is
With main-line disconnect in the off position, not blinking, then contact factory.
44
Processor Board
At this time the hoist motor data must be
The safety processor (1028N/1066) board is entered into the AC drive. The following
normally preset prior to leaving the factory, functions must be entered or verified using the
however, it is prudent to check the setup drive display unit. Follow the instructions in
values for the proper settings. Refer to section the HPV 900 or HPV 600 drive manual to
6 of this manual for the operation of the safety enter the following data:
processor board LCD display interface. The
following adjustment variables must be set DRIVE A1 Sub Menu
properly: CONTRACT CAR SPD
CONTRACT MTR SPD
Top Spd (contract speed) (motor nameplate RPM)
Enc RPM (if Fdbk Typ=1) ENCODER PULSERS
Enc PPR (if Fdbk Typ=1) (PPR from encoder on motor)
Fdbk Typ (0=tape, 1=enc)
Ctrl Typ (1=Tr NDF, 2=Tract DF) MOTOR A5 Sub Menu
2 Stop (0=Mult, 1=2 stop) RATED MTR PWR
RearDoor (0=Front only, 1=Rear) (motor nameplate)
UTS Vel (Set to top speed) RATED MTR VOLTS
DTS Vel (Set to top speed) (motor nameplate)
INS Vel (Set to 140) RATED MOTOR CURR
LEV Vel (Set to 140) (motor nameplate)
UT Vel (Set to 500) MOTOR POLES
DT Vel (Set to 500) · for 1800rpm motor enter MOTOR
UL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) POLES to 4.
DL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) · for 1200rpm motor enter MOTOR
Dmd Mult (Set to 1.000) POLES to 6.
SoftStop (Set to 1) · for 900rpm motor enter MOTOR
POLES to 8.
Note that the velocity variables will be setup RATED MTR SPEED
once the car is running on automatic. (motor RPM on nameplate)
4.2.7 Place Stop Switch In Run Position Most of the drive parameters have been preset
to values required for your specific job. Other
Flip the “STOP” toggle switch on the 1038 parameters not listed here may need to be
board to the up position. Verify that input adjusted in the field. Please refer to the
LED’s for “LC, HC, DN, UN, SS, GTS, RDY Magnetek HPV Technical manual for more
and CS” are all on. If not, then correct field parameter information and trouble shooting
wiring. guidelines.
From the digital operator for the drive, reset

any active faults and clear the fault history log.
45
4.2.9 Pre-set The Digital Speed Clamps Processor Board will display one of the
Pre-set the software digital speed clamps from
the LCD interface under the “Elevator Setup “MR INS” (Motor Room)
Menu”. The submenus for the clamp speeds “CT INS” (Car Top)
are as follows: “ACCESS” (Access)
“IC INS” (In Car)”
Set Ins/Leveling Clamp “AUTO” (Not on Inspection)
Set DT/UT Slowdown Clamp
Set DT1/UT1 Slowdown Clamp
INS” should be displayed.
Set DT3/UT3 Slowdown Clamp The “inspection string” consists of contacts
Set DTS/UTS Slowdown Clamp from the inspection switches and the gate and
Set the speed for Ins/Leveling for 140 fpm and one of the five inspection inputs should be on
all the remaining slowdown limit speeds to the for the car to run. Starting from the car top
contract speed of the car. Please note that the inspection input, the five inspection inputs are,
displayed value of “Clamp Speed” is the value “INS” for car top, “ACC” for access, “ICI” for
the clamp should be set to. The slowdown in-car, “MRI” for motor room, and “AUTO”
limit “Clamp Speed:” will show 0000 until the for automatic (no inspection). The inspection
car is run into the limits and the speed is string circuit is shown in Figure 4.1.
4.3 Run The Car On Inspection
From the LCD interface, select the

“Adjustable Variables” menu, and set the
inspection speed to 10% of contract speed.
Before moving the car on inspection, verify
again that all door locks, gate switches, safety
circuits, and limit switches are functioning
properly.
The car should be ready to run on inspection if

all is wired correctly. Select the “Elevator
Status” on the main CPU board LCD display.
the first line and “Inspection Mode” on the
second. The LCD display on the Safety
46
Figure 4.1: Inspection String Circuit
Note that any one of the following conditions 4.3.2 Adjust The Brake Voltage
will cause an inspection error: Momentarily push the inspection “UP” or
“DOWN” push button on the 1038 or 1064
• More than one inspection input is on board while checking the DC brake voltage
• No inspection input is on with a meter. If the voltage is not correct,
• Gate or Lock bypass switch is open and the adjust the voltage by turning power off from
car is not on car top inspection the main-line disconnect and then moving the
resistor tap on the brake resistor. Re-apply
If the controller is not on motor room power and then test the brake voltage again.
inspection at this point, then verify all switch Make sure that the brake is lifting and setting
positions and wiring before proceeding. properly before proceeding.
47
4.3.3 Check The Run Direction HPV 900
A+ (TB1-21) with A- (TB1-
Again momentarily push the inspection “UP” 20)
or “DOWN” push button on the 1038 or 1064 HPV 600
board. One of the following should take place: A+ (63) with A- (62)
• The elevator will run controlled, in the cor- If an encoder isolation board
rect direction (up for “UP” button, down (1022N) is used, move J5 and J6 on
for “DOWN” button) with no drive faults. the encoder board instead of moving
If so, proceed to “Check Inspection the encoder wires at the drive. Refer
Speed”. to the jumper diagram on the board.
• The elevator will run controlled, but in the
wrong direction with no drive faults. If so, Turn the main disconnect on and run the
proceed to the next step. elevator on inspection again.
• The elevator will try to run, but immedi-
ately trips on a drive ENCODER FLT. If so The car should run controlled and in correct
proceed to “Drive Trips Immediately”. direction. If so proceed to “Check Inspection
• The elevator runs much slower than the Speed”. If not contact the factory.
inspection speed demand. If so, follow the
steps in the “Car Runs Extremely Slow” 4.3.5 Drive Trips Immediately
section.
If the elevator tries to run, but immediately
4.3.4 Car Runs The Wrong Direction
trips on a drive ENCODER FLT, recheck the
drive motor parameters. This fault is most
likely caused by improper parameter settings.
direction with no drive faults, then change the
Carefully review the drive MOTOR A5
run direction of the motor by one of the
parameters to match the motor data. Correct
following two ways.
any invalid parameters and re-test the car.
• Change the motor rotation on the drive
from forward to reverse. If the parameters are correct, then measure the
voltage of the encoder at the drive terminals as
shown below:
USER SWITCHES C1
MOTOR ROTATION
• Voltage between A+ and A- should read
greater than1.5 VDC. For the HPV 900
Run the elevator on inspection again.
drive, check terminals A (TB1-21) and A-
• Swap the motor leads. Turn off the main (TB1-20). For the HPV 600 drive, check
disconnect. If an encoder isolation board is terminals A+ (63) and A- (62).
not used then swap the encoder direction
by swapping the wires at the drive as • Voltage between B+ and B- should read
shown below: greater than1.5 VDC. For the HPV 900
drive check terminals B+ (TB1-23) and B-
(TB1-22). For the HPV 600 drive, check
terminals B+ (65) and B- (64).
48
• Voltage between +5 and 0V should read 4.3.6 Car Runs Extremely Slow
roughly 5 VDC. For the HPV 900 drive
check terminals +5 (TB1-25) and 0V If the car runs much slower than the inspection
(TB1-19). For the HPV 600 drive, check speed demand, then change the encoder
terminals +5 (67) and 0V (61). direction.
If the voltage is incorrect then verify the Turn off the main disconnect. If an encoder
encoder cable connections. Refer to the job isolation board is not used then swap the
schematics to correct any wiring error. If no encoder direction by swapping the wires at the
error is found then contact the factory. drive as shown below:
If the voltage is correct then change the HPV 900

encoder direction. A+ (TB1-21) with A- (TB1-20)
HPV 600
Turn off the main disconnect. If an encoder A+ (63) with A- (62)
isolation board is not used then swap the
encoder direction by swapping the wires at the If an encoder isolation board (1022N) is
drive as shown below: used, move J5 and J6 on the encoder board
instead of moving the encoder wires at the
HPV 900 drive. Refer to the jumper diagram on the
A+ (TB1-21) with A- (TB1-20) board.
HPV 600
A+ (63) with A- (62) Turn on the main disconnect and run the
elevator on inspection again. If the elevator
If an encoder isolation board (1022N) is runs controlled and in the correct direction,
used, move J5 and J6 on the encoder board proceed to the next step. Otherwise contact
instead of moving the encoder wires at the the factory.
drive. Refer to the jumper diagram on the
board. 4.3.7 Check Inspection Speed
Turn on the main disconnect and run the With a hand held tachometer, check the speed
elevator on inspection again. If the elevator of the elevator while running on inspection.
runs controlled and in the correct direction, The elevator should be running at 10%
proceed to the next step. If the elevator runs contract speed or 25 fpm for a 250 fpm car.
controlled but in the wrong direction, the go Also run the elevator while monitoring SPEED
back and follow the directions in the “Car FEEDBACK on the HPV 900 drive display.
Runs The Wrong Direction” section.
The display should show 10% of contract
speed.
If the car still trips immediately on an
ENCODER FLT, then contact the factory.
From the LCD interface, select the “Display
inspection, monitor the controller velocity. If
the velocity on the LCD display is incorrect,
check the Encoder RPM and PPR
49
parameters from the “Adjustable 4.3.9 Verify Selector And Slowdown Inputs
Variables” menu. These variables should
be set the same as the “Contract Mtr Run the elevator up on inspection until it stops
Speed” and “Encoder Pulses” parameters on the up normal limit. The up and down
on the drive, respectively. normal limits should be set one inch above and
below the terminal floors respectively. Verify
With the speed on all three of these devices the selector inputs are being set properly on the
controller by running the elevator down until it
reading approximately 10% of contract speed
stops on the down normal limit.
(within +/-2 fpm) continue to the next step. If
not, contact the factory. As the car approaches dead level to the floor
going down, “DL” turns on first, then “DZ”
4.3.8 Verify Controller Encoder Direction
and then finally “UL” At floor level, “UL, DL,
and DZ” inputs should all be on at the same
With the LCD interface displaying “Elevator time. Leaving the floor going down “DL” will
Status”, hit the “Up” or “Down” menu button turn off first, then “DZ” and last “UL”.
Monitor the direction of the car from “DIR” on Also verify that the up and down terminal
the display or from the direction the pulse slowdown limits inputs “UT, UTS, DT &
counts are counting. DIR will show “Up” for DTS” are breaking at the proper distances as
up and “Dn” for down. The pulse counts shown in the slowdown table 2.0. “UT, UTS,
should increment going up and decrement DT & DTS” turn off when active.
going down.
4.3.10 Verify Car Speed On Safety Proces-
If the direction is wrong or the pulse counts sor Board
encoder direction to the controller must be Run the car in either direction and check the
changed. car speed on the safety processor LCD display.
If an encoder isolation board (1022N) is The speed shown should match the car’s actual
used, move J1 and J2 on the encoder board. speed. If the speed does not match and the
Refer to the jumper diagram on the board. secondary feedback comes from pulses from
the tape go to “Correct Car Speed When Using
If no encoder isolation board is used, the A+ A Tape”. If the secondary feedback comes
and A- encoder wires from the drive must be from an encoder go to “Correct Car Speed
swapped. Note that the motor encoder wires When Using An Encoder”. If the correct
are daisy chained from the encoder to the drive speed is shown proceed to the “Learn the
and then from the drive to the controller Hoistway” section.
encoder board. Only the A+ and A- wires
from the drive to the controller board must be 4.3.10.1 Correct Car Speed When Using A
swapped. The wires from the encoder to the Tape
drive must remain on the same terminal
locations on the drive. The tape has holes every 3/8” that are 3/8” in
diameter. On the selector unit adjust the PP
If the encoder is counting properly continue to sensor closer to the tape until the orange LED
the next step. If not, contact the factory. at the end of the sensor turns on. Then turn the
50
sensor inwards another 1/8” and lock in the 4.3.10.3 Incremental Encoder 1028/1066
sensor. While running on top of car inspection Board
verify that the orange LED at the end of the PP
sensor turns on and off as it passes by the holes On a standard incremental encoder, the pulses
on the tape. The safety processor board on the per revolution are usually part of the part
controller measures the time between each number such as 1024 or 2048. Check the
pulse to calculate the velocity. If the velocity encoder part number and enter the encoder
is not displayed correctly first make sure that PPR. Run the car on inspection and verify the
the feedback type in the safety processor board velocity on the “CAR SPD” display. Compare
adjustable variable is set to 0 for a tape the velocity with a hand held tachometer on
application. Next, while the car is running, the vertical part of the governor cable. If the
make sure that the XP LED on this board is correct velocity is not obtained, contact the
pulsing. As the car increases in speed the LED factory. If the correct speed is shown proceed
will glow solid on. If the LED does not pulse, to the “Learn Hoistway” step.
try swapping the wires at the PPS and PP
terminals. If the LED still does not work, 4.3.10.4 Absolute Encoder 1066 Board
contact the factory. If the correct speed is
shown proceed to “Learn the Hoistway”. The Safety Processor 1066 Board uses a serial
interface to a Turck absolute encoder, part #
4.3.10.2 Correct Car Speed When Using An T8.5882.3FB8.3001. With this system, the
Encoder encoder PPR is 8192 and this value should set
in the SPB. The RPM is calculated as above.
When using an encoder for the secondary speed
feedback, make sure that the adjustable variables Verify communications between the encoder
on the safety processor board are set properly. and the Safety Processor Board on the LCD
Set the feedback type to 1 for encoder and set the Interface Display “ENC COM”. Run the car
encoder RPM and PPR appropriately for how the and verify that the “PLS CNT” on the SPB is
encoder is driven. To calculate the RPM, divide incrementing when running up or decrement i
ng when running down. The “PLS CNT”
the contract speed of the car by the distance travel
value can be considerably out of range but will
automatically correct during the Learn
below: Hoistway procedure. To reverse the direction
of counting, change the adjustable variable
For a 1 ft. diameter governor:
RPM = 350/(1*pi) = 350/3.1415 = 111.4 verify the velocity on the “CAR SPD” display.
For a 16 in diameter governor (16/12 = 1.33ft) the factory. If the correct speed is shown
RPM = 350/(1.33* 3.1415) = 350/4.188 = 83.5

down normal limit with the inspection speed
51
set to 10% of contract speed. Verify that the sensors are too close together, spread both
“DN and DL” input LED’s are both off. From sensors apart slightly. After problem is
the LCD interface choose to “Learn corrected, proceed to final adjustment.
Hoistway”. Follow the instructions on the
screen.
In general, the car is run from the bottom of 4.5 Final Adjustment
the hoistway, the down normal limit, to the top
of the hoistway, the top normal limit. 4.5.1 Automatic Run
NOTE!!! The car must run the entire The elevator should now be sitting idle at the
hoistway without stopping. top floor. The “AD” and “IND” toggle
As the elevator moves up the hoistway, go to be in the down position. If the learn procedure
the “Display Hoistway Tables” menu on the was successful the elevator should be ready to
LCD display and verify again that the “DPP” make an automatic run.
pulse count on the screen are incrementing.
Also as the elevator passes each floor, the The default parameter settings for the ride
pulse count and distance for that floor should quality should be adequate for an initial run.
change and be stored. Verify that the floor From the LCD interface select the “Set Car
distances are valid. The pulse count for the Call” menu and using the up and down arrow
terminal slowdowns will also be stored. The keys, setup a call. The elevator should run to
elevator will stop when it reaches the up answer the call. When the elevator levels in
normal limit. and stops at the floor, the doors will remain
closed.
If this car uses a tapeless selector with an
absolute encoder, verify that the “PLS CNT” The acceleration and deceleration of the car
on the Safety Processor Board was reset close should be smooth and stepless regardless of
to a count of 5000 when the car first starts the distance of the run. If the elevator does not
moving to learn the hoistway. If the number is function as described above, then problem
extremely large or is decrement i ng, stop the should be analyzed before proceeding.
learn hoistway procedure, correct the direction
on the SPB and then restart the learn process. 4.5.2 Drive Adaptive Tune
After the elevator stops, move the elevator on To finish the setup of the drive, an adaptive
inspection until the “DZ and DL” LED’s are tune is required. It is necessary that the car run
on. Flip the “INS” toggle switch on the 1038 70% of contract speed when running this test
or 1064 board to the up position, and the so that the drive does not go into flux
elevator should level down to floor level at the weakening. In the DRIVE A1 Sub Menu, set
top floor. If so, proceed to final adjustment. the CONTRACT MTR SPD parameter to 70%
of the rated motor RPM. If this value was
If the car levels down but does not run, then adjusted to correct the top speed of the car, use
check “Elevator Status” and “View Fault Log” 70% of the adjusted value. To calculate 70%,
on the LCD interface for a binary preset error. multiply the value by 0.7. For example, if the
If the car oscillates at the floor, then check the motor RPM is 1050 then 70% of the motor
distance of the “UL” and “DL” sensors. If he RPM is (1050 x 0.7 = 735).
52
This procedure will also require balanced load minimum and maximum value. The control
in the car. Follow the adaptive tune procedure will not allow you to enter values that are not
set in the Magnetek HPV 900 or HPV 600 valid. After adjusting the S-curve parameters
Technical Manual. After completing the for the desired ride, proceed to the next step.
adaptive tune, reset the CONTRACT MTR
SPD parameter and then proceed to the next 4.5.4 Adjust The Stop
step.
When at floor level the “UL, DL, & DZ” input
LED’s should be on. If the elevator
continually tries to seek floor level by leveling
In order to fine tune the ride quality, refer to up and down, try the following steps to correct
Figure 4.2 which describes what part of the S- the problem:
curve that the different parameters effect. In Increase the response of the drive and retest
general, higher numbers in the given the car.
parameters, cause quicker and more abrupt Reduce the leveling and re-leveling velocity
changes from one mode to the next during a parameters in the car and retest.
run. All of the S-curve parameters have a If the car still oscillates, adjust the “dead zone”
Figure 4.2: S-Curve Parameters
53
on the selector. The “dead zone” is increased out better if the brake pick delay is set to 0.1
by moving the selector sensor boards closer second.
together.
If the car stops hard on the brake, then increase Adjust the soft start to for the quickness in
the brake drop delay until the motor stops reaching constant acceleration. Keep in mind
turning completely before the brake sets. that the larger the soft start number, the
The soft stop time MUST be set to at least 0.5 quicker the start. The ride should now be
seconds LONGER than the brake drop delay. acceptable.
Important: If you increase the soft stop time 4.5.6 Verify Top Speed
on the controller you need to also increase the
soft stop parameter on the safety processor To fine tune high speed, make high speed runs
board. Make sure that the soft stop parameter while monitoring the SPEED FEEDBACK on
on the safety processor board is larger than the the HPV drive display. The speed should be
soft stop parameter on the controller. slightly under contract speed. If the speed is
not correct increase or decrease drive
If the car spots when approaching the floor, the parameter A1 CONTARCT MTR SPD until
cause is usually from the car not tracking (the the AC drive display reads contract speed,
drive response is set too low) or the speed proceed to the next step.
profile into the floor is too sharp. First try to
increase the response of the drive. 4.5.7 Adjust Safety Processor Board Speed
Clamps
If the car still spots increase the floor targeting
distance and retest the ride. The default value Make a one floor run to the top floor.
for the floor targeting distance is 12 inches. After the car stops, record the velocity the car
Increase it by steps of 2 or 3 and continue hit the “UT, DT, UTS & DTS” slowdown
retesting until the parameter is adjusted to 18. limits. “UTS & DTS” are used on car with
If no change is notices, start again from 12 and reduced stroke buffers or with a top speed
decrease the value. greater than 200 fpm. The velocity value is
shown from the LIM VEL menu on the safety
The deceleration rate can also be reduced a processor board LCD display.
little to help remove the spotting. Proceed with
adjusting the start once the proper stop is The velocity value shown on the display for
achieved. the “UT or DT” limit is the value after the car
4.5.5 Adjust The Start number of counts set from “UT Count” or “DT
Count”. When using a tape feedback, there are
To provide a proper start, adjust the brake pick 16 pulse counts per foot or 1.333 pulses per
delay, pattern delay, and soft start jerk rate. inch. If the limit is set to 40” from the
Initially, set the brake pick delay to 0 and terminal, to set the checkpoint at 20” use a
increase the pattern delay by 0.1 seconds until count value of (20 * 1.333) = 26.6. Round up
the controller picks the brake completely and set the UT and DT count to 27. If the UT
before the motor starts to move. If roll back or DT Counts are modified, the limit velocity
occurs, then reduce the pattern delay until the has to be rechecked.
roll back is gone. Sometimes, the timing works
54
Run the car again to the top repeatedly from 2
floors, then 3 floors, etc, until top speed is CAR NUMBER OF CLAMP LIMIT
reached. Record the limit velocities each time SPEED SLOWDOWN NUMBER USED
the car stops at the top floor. LIMITS
<= 250 1 2 UT,

Make the same runs to the bottom floor fpm DT
floors, etc, until top speed is reached. Record 300-500 2 3 UT1,
the limit velocities each time the car stops at fpm DT1
the bottom floor. 600-700 3 4 UT2,
fpm DT2
800 + 4 5 UT3,
Take the highest speed value for the up or fpm DT3
down terminal slowdown limit, add 20 fpm
and then set the new value in the Table 4.1: Slowdown Clamps
corresponding variable from the ADJ VAR
menu. Adjust speed clamps for each slowdown limits
used as determined by the elevator’s contract
4.5.8 Adjust Digital Slowdown Speed speed.
Clamps
4.5.9 Verify Inspection Velocity Clamp On
Safety Processor Board
Having just made several runs into the top and
bottom landings, the main CPU has also
recorded the car’s velocity when the slowdown With the car on inspection, set the inspection
limits were hit. If the car has been powered speed on the safety processor board to 25 fpm
down prior to this step, several runs have to be (Refer to Safety Processor Adjustable
made to the limits to allow the main CPU to Variables in section 11). Set the inspection
record the limit velocity values. speed on the main CPU to 50 fpm (Refer to
Adjustable Variables in section 10). Run the
From the main CPU LCD interface, choose car in either direction on inspection. The car
“Elevator Setup” and hit enter. Next choose will shutdown when the speed goes above 25
“DT/UT Slowdown Clamp” and again hit fpm.
enter.
The display will show the Speed the car hit the Reset the inspection speed on main CPU to the
clamp on the previous run as “Clamp Speed” desired inspection speed and set the inspection
and “UT/DT Limit” with a value to be speed on the Safety Processor to 140 fpm or
modified. Set the UT/DT Limit with the value lower. Make sure the car will run on inspection
shown as Clamp Speed. If the Clamp Speed without shutting down.
shows 0000 either the limit is not being used or
4.5.10 Analog Load Weigher Setup
the limit was not hit.
The number of slowdown limits depends on If the job uses an analog load weigher
the speed of the car as show in the table below: purchased from G.A.L., complete the follow
procedure. It is recommend to use two people,
one moving the weights and one in the
machine room to set up the load weigher.
55
one floor then back again. The doors will
Mount the load weigher as described by the close when the call is placed.
manufacturer. The load weigher control box
will also contain a board supplied by G.A.L. When the automatic sequence is activated, the
that connects to the controller serial CAN bus car will run to each floor and measure the
and reads in the analog output from the load empty load value. The LCD display will
weighing device. Wire the load weigher and indicate when the sequence if finished.
G.A.L. board according to the controller
schematics. 4.5.10.2 Full Car Setup
The empty car setup must be successfully
Calibrate the load weighing device hardware completed to run the full load setup.
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
The controller setup for the load weigher is in Once the empty setup is complete, run to the
two parts, empty car for each floor and full loading floor and turn the auto-door switch on
load for each floor. It is possible to manually to allow weights to be loaded on the car. With
setup the load weigher from the LCD interface the car fully loaded, turn off the auto-door
using the and the View/Modify Load Limits switch and run the car to the bottom floor.
menu. Again if the doors are not closed, make a one
floor run to force the doors to close.
4.5.10.1 Empty Car Setup
With an empty car placed on independent With the car at the bottom floor, follow the
operation and turn the auto-door switch to off. LCD interface instructions to press enter to
From the LCD interface, select Elevator Setup, start the full load setup sequence. The car will
then select Load Weigher Setup and the select automatically run to each floor and measure
Setup Load Weigher. the full load value. When the full load
measurement is complete, the car can be run to
The LCD interface will show setup the loading floor and the weights removed.
instructions as you go through the procedure.
It is okay to exit the setup screen to place a call From the LCD user interface, set the percent
and then return to it while the setup is being values for load bypass (60%), load anti-
performed. The actual load value read from the nuisance (10%), load dispatch (40%) and load
analog to digital converter and the percent load overload (110%). Setting the adjustable
can be viewed from the View/Modify LW variable to 0% will disable that particular
Setup menu. The percent load value will not be option. To disable load bypass, set the percent
displayed correctly until the setup is complete value for load bypass to 0.
and the door has been cycled.
4.5.10.3 Load Weighing Calibration
Run the car to the bottom floor and press Enter Sequence
on the LCD interface when prompted to do so
to start the automatic setup sequence. The load weigher is automatically calibrated
once each week. If an error is detected during
If the car is at the bottom floor and the doors this calibration sequence, the load weigher and
are not closed (the doors will not close the pre-torque feature (if used) is disabled.
switch) then place a car call to run the car up
56
A load weighing calibration sequence can be door wiring. If the doors do open, the elevator
manually activated from the LCD interface by is now on independent service.
Load Weigher Setup menu and following the on 4.5.13 Fine Tune The Ride Quality
screen instructions.
4.5.11 Adjust The Motor Pre-torque Fine tune ride quality with the field adjustable
The motor pre-torque uses the load value parameters. Keep in mind that if acceleration
obtained from the analog load weigher and or deceleration values are changed, the speed
will work only if the load weigher is clamps for the safety processor board and the
installed and successfully setup. S-curve board may need to be re-adjusted.
On the HPV-600 or HPV-900 drive under User Fine-tune the floor level magnets. After the
Switches C1 parameter, set Pre-Torque source magnets are set exactly floor level and glued,
to serial. Run the empty car to a middle floor. learn the hoistway again.
From the LCD interface set the adjustable
variable for percent balanced load to the Check all signal devices for proper operation
balanced load value (typically 40%). Set the and remove all temporary jumpers. The
torque amount to 10.00%, set the pattern delay adjustment should now be complete.
to 2.15 seconds and the brake pick delay to 0.1
seconds. The long patter delay will cause an
exaggerated amount of roll back or roll
forward. Make a one floor run and note the
amount of roll. Increase the torque amount
until the drive can hold the car without any
motion for the entire pattern delay time.
Reduce the pattern delay so that the car takes
of just after the brake lifts.
Note that the pattern delay must be at least
torque amount to 0.00 will disable the pre-
torque feature. Also if the load weighing
calibration sequence detects a load weighing
error, the pre-torque feature is also
automatically disabled.
4.5.12 Verify The Doors Are Safe
The elevator should now be adjusted. Verify

that all door locks, gate switches, and safety
“AD” toggle switches to the up position. The
elevator should level into the floor and open
57
Section 5 - Adjustment of the
GALaxy Non-Distance Feedback 5.2 Initial Power-up
controller - HPV-600/900
5.2.1 Check Main-line Voltage
5.1 General Setup With main-line disconnect in the off position,

Before adjustment begins the following items insure the voltage matches the controller name
must be completed. tag “Input Power” voltage. Check to insure all
1. All field wiring and safety circuits correct or all three phases are not present, do
installed not proceed until corrected.
2. Temporary jumpers from terminal “HC” 5.2.2 Set Toggle Switches

board down except for the car gate bypass and
4. All car and hoistway doors and interlocks the door lock bypass switches. Flip those two
installed and pre-adjusted switches up.
5. Selector installed and magnets pre- 5.2.3 Make Sure The Car Is Safe
adjusted
Verify that all elevator doors are closed and
6. Familiarize yourself with all wiring that all safety circuits are functional.
schematics
7. Familiarize yourself with the appropriate
Magnetek HPV 900 or HPV 600 AC Turn the main-line disconnect to the on
Vector Elevator Drive Technical Manual. position. Check the voltage at R, S, and T on
the AC drive. Verify that all three phases are
8. Verify that the AC motor is properly present. Check the voltage at fuses L1 and L2
wired. on the controller. If correct, check the voltage
at terminal “LIN” with respect to “GND”. The
9. Verify that the tachometer is connected
properly.
check the voltage at terminals “S10, LC, &
10. Familiarize yourself with sections 5 HC” with respect to “GND”. All should read
(LCD Display Interface) and section 6 120VAC. If not, check wiring diagram to
(Safety Processor LCD Display determine problem before continuing.
Interface) of this manual. It is necessary
to use these interfaces to setup and debug
the controller.
58
Note that the velocity variables will be setup
5.2.5 Verify The Lcd GALaxy Is Blinking once the car is running on automatic.
Check to make sure that the “axy” of GALaxy 5.2.7 Place Stop Swicth In Run Position
blinking, continue to the next step. If not, Flip the “STOP” toggle switch on the 1038
check voltage at terminals 5V to 0V on the board to the up position. Verify that input
1038 or 1064 board to insure 5VDC. If 5VDC LED’s for “LC, HC, DN, UN, SS, GTS, RDY
is present and the “axy” on the LCD display is and CS” are all on. If not, then correct field
not blinking, then contact factory. wiring.

Processor Board
The safety processor (1028N) board is entered into the AC drive. The following
normally preset prior to leaving the factory, functions listed in the appropriate drive section
however, it is prudent to check the setup must be entered or verified using the drive
values for the proper settings. Refer to section display unit. Proceed to the HPV 900/600 or
6 of this manual for the operation of the safety GPD 515 drive section below.
following adjustment variables must be set 5.2.9 HPV 900/600 DRIVE
properly: Follow the instructions in the HPV 900 or
HPV 600 drive manual to enter the following
Top Spd (contract speed) data:
Enc RPM (if Fdbk Typ=1)
Enc PPR (if Fdbk Typ=1) DRIVE A1 Sub Menu
Fdbk Typ (0=tape, 1=enc) CONTRACT CAR SPD
Ctrl Typ (1=Tr NDF, 2=Tract DF) CONTRACT MTR SPD
2 Stop (0=Mult, 1=2 stop) ENCODER PULSES
RearDoor (0=Front only, 1=Rear)
UTS Vel (Set to top speed) MOTOR A5 Sub Menu
DTS Vel (Set to top speed) RATED MTR PWR
INS Vel (Set to 140) RATED MTR VOLTS
LEV Vel (Set to 140) RATED EXCIT FREQ
UT Vel (Set to 500) RATED MOTOR CURR
DT Vel (Set to 500) MOTOR POLES
UL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) RATED MTR SPEED
DL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) % NO LOAD CURR
Dmd Mult (Set to 1.000)
SoftStop (Set to 1)
59
HPV 900 or HPV 600
S-CURVES A2 Sub Menu 5.2.9.1 GPD 515 DRIVE
ACCEL RATE 0 = 2.5 Follow the instructions in the GPD 515 drive
DECEL RATE 0 = 2.5 manual to enter the follow data:
ACCEL JERK IN 0 = 3.0
ACCEL JERK OUT 0 = 3.0 C1-10 Acc/Dec Time Setting = 0
DECEL JERK IN 0 = 3.0 C1-01 Accel Time 1 = Top Speed/150
DECEL JERK OUT 0 = 3.0 C1-02 Decel Time 1 = Top Speed/150
Note: This will set the accel and decel
MULTISTEP A3 Sub Menu rates to 150 fpm/s or 2.5 f/s^2. (0.66
SPEED CMD 0 = 0 for 100 fpm)
SPEED CMD 1 = Lev Speed C2-01 S-curve Accel Start = 0.2
SPEED CMD 2 = Ins Speed C2-02 S-curve Accel End = 0.2
SPEED CMD 3 = High Speed C2-03 S-curve Decel Start = 0.2
SPEED CMD 4 = 0 C2-04 S-curve Decel End = 0.2
SPEED CMD 5 = 0 D1-01 Frequency Ref = 0
SPEED CMD 6 = 0 D1-02 Frequency Ref = Lev Speed
SPEED CMD 7 = 0 D1-03 Frequency Ref = Ins Speed
SPEED CMD 8 = 0 D1-04 Frequency Ref = High Speed
SPEED CMD 9 = 0 D1-05 through D1-09 = 0
E1-01 Input Voltage = Line Voltage
HPV 900 or HPV 600 E1-03 V/F Pattern = 1
CONFIGURE C0 Sub Menu E1-04 Max Frequency = 60
LOGIC INPUT 1 = Drive Enable E2-01 Motor Current = Nameplate Motor
LOGIC INPUT 2 = Run Up Amps
LOGIC INPUT 3 = Fault Reset E2-03 No-Load Amps = Nameplate Motor
LOGIC INPUT 4 = Run Down No-Load Amps
LOGIC INPUT 5 = Contact Confirm E2-04 Num of Poles = 4 (~1800 rpm)
LOGIC INPUT 6 = Step Ref B0 6 (~1200 rpm)
LOGIC INPUT 7 = Step Ref B1 8 (~900 rpm)
LOGIC INPUT 8 = no function H1-01 Multi-function = 24
H1-02 Multi-function = 14
Most of the drive parameters have been preset H1-03 Multi-function = F
to values required for your specific job. Other H1-04 Multi-function = 3
parameters not listed here may need to be H1-05 Multi-function = 4
adjusted in the field. Please refer to the H1-06 Multi-function = F
Magnetek HPV 900 or HPV 600 Technical H3-05 Multi-function = 1F
manual for more parameter information and
trouble shooting guidelines. With Encoder
F1-01 Encoder Const = Encoder PPR
From the digital operator for the drive, reset F1-05 PG Rotation = 0 CCW, 1 CW
any active faults and clear the fault history log.
60
The following data is set from the To run the car from the motor room, “MR
factory and is shown here for reference: INS” should be displayed.
A1-02 Control Method =0 (V/F if no The “inspection string” (Figure 5.1) consist of
encoder used) contacts from the inspection switches and the
A1-02 Control Method =3 (Flux Vector if gate and lock bypass switches in series. One
encoder used) and only one of the five inspection inputs
A1-03 Initialize Parameters = 2220 should be on for the car to run. Starting from
B1-01 Reference Selection = 1 the car top inspection input, the five inspection
B1-02 Operation Method = 1 inputs are, “INS” for car top, “ACC” for
B1-03 Stopping Method = 1 access, “ICI” for in-car, “MRI” for motor
B5-01 PID Control = 0 room, and “AUTO” for automatic (no
H2-01 Operation Ready = 6 inspection).
Most of the drive parameters have been preset

parameters not listed here may need to be
adjusted in the field. Please refer to the
Magnetek GPD 515 Technical manual for
more parameter information and trouble
shooting guidelines.
5.3 Run Car On Inspection
The car should be ready to run on inspection if

all is wired correctly. Select the “Elevator
the first line and “Inspection Mode” on the
Processor Board will display one of the
“MR INS” (Motor Room)

“CT INS” (Car Top)
“ACCESS” (Access)
“IC INS” (In Car)
“AUTO” (Not on Inspection)
61

Note that if more than one inspection input is 5.3.2 Adjust The Brake Voltage
on, if no inspection input is on or if a gate or
lock bypass switch is open and the car is not on Momentarily push the inspection “UP” or
car top inspection, an inspection error will be “DOWN” push button on the 1038 board while
displayed on the Safety Processor LCD checking the DC brake voltage with a meter.
Display. If the controller is not on motor room If the voltage is not correct, adjust the voltage
inspection at this point, then verify all switch by turning power off from the main-line
positions and wiring before proceeding. disconnect and then moving the resistor tap on
the brake resistor. Re-apply power and then
test the brake voltage again. Make sure that
62
the brake is lifting and setting properly before
proceeding. With GPD 515
Turn off the power and switch any two
5.3.3 Check Run Direction motor leads. If an encoder is used then
swap the A+ and A- wires as follows:
Momentarily push the inspection “UP” or
“DOWN” push button on the 1038 board. One A+ (TA1-4) with A- (TA1-5)
of the following should take place:
The motor should run controlled in the correct
The elevator will run controlled, in the correct direction. If not then contact the factory,
direction (up for “UP” button, down for otherwise, proceed to “Run Inspection Speed”.
“DOWN” button) with no drive faults. If so
proceed to “Check Inspection Speed”. 5.3.5 Verify Encoder Connection
The elevator will run controlled, but in the If the elevator tries to run, but immediately
wrong direction (down for “UP” button, up of trips on a drive ENCODER FLT of if the car
“DOWN” button) with no drive faults. If so runs very slow, then the drive encoder
proceed to the next step. direction needs to be changed.
The elevator will try to run, but immediately If the controller has an encoder isolation board
trips on a drive fault. Re-check the drive (1022N), change the encoder direction for the
parameters. If an encoder is used and the drive drive by moving jumper J5 from “POS 1” to
records an ENCODER FLT proceed to “Verify “POS 2”. This will swap the A and A- signals.
Encoder Connection”. If no encoder is used Refer to the jumper diagram on the 1022
then contact the factory. board.
The elevator will run controlled but very slow, If the controller does not have an encoder
proceed to “Verify Encoder Connection”. isolation board, then turn off the main
disconnect, and swap the encoder wires at the
5.3.4 Car Runs Wrong Direction drive as follows:
If the elevator runs controlled but in the wrong With HPV 900
direction, with no drive faults, then change A+ (TB1-21) with A- (TB1-20)
rotation of the motor. For an HPV 900 or 600
drive the motor rotation can be changed from With HPV 600
the drive command. For a GPD 515 drive the A+ (Encoder Card Terminal
motor leads will need to be swapped. 63) with A- (Encoder Card
Terminal 62)
With HPV 900 or HPV 600 With GPD 515

USER SWITCHES C1 A+ (TA1-4) with A- (TA1-5)
MOTOR ROTATION
63
Turn on the main disconnect, run the elevator Ins. Speed (Hz) =(25/200) * 60=7.5 Hz
on inspection again.
5.3.7 Check Selector Inputs
If the elevator runs controlled, in the correct Run the elevator up on inspection until it stops
direction, proceed to the next step. If the on the up normal limit. The up and down
elevator runs controlled but in the wrong normal limits should be set one inch above and
direction, with no drive faults, then turn off the below the terminal floors respectively. Verify
main disconnect, and swap the hoist motor the selector inputs are being set properly on the
field wires. Also swap the encoder wires or controller by running the elevator down until it
the encoder isolation board jumpers back as stops on the down normal limit. As the car
they were to begin with. Turn the main approaches dead level to the floor going down,
disconnect on. The car should now run “DL” turns on first, then “DZ” and then finally
controlled in the correct direction. If not, “UL”. At floor level, “UL, DL, and DZ”
contact the factory. inputs should all be on at the same time.
Leaving the floor going down “DL” will turn
5.3.6 Check Inspection Speed off first, then “DZ” and last “UL”.
With a hand held tachometer, check the speed 5.3.8 Verify Slowdown Limits
of the elevator while running on inspection.
The inspection speed is usually set from 25 to As the car is running down verify that the up
50 fpm for low speed cars and up 100 fpm for and down slowdown sensors for each floor,
high-speed cars. Also run the elevator while “US and DS”, activate prior to reaching the
monitoring speed feedback on the HPV 900, landing. Also verify that the up and down
HPV 600 or GPD 515 drive display. The terminal slowdown limits inputs “UT, UTS,
display should show the inspection speed DT & DTS” are breaking at the proper
value in feet per minute or in hertz. If the distances as shown in the slowdown table 2.0.
speed on both of these devices reads within +/- “US and DS” turn on when active but “UT,
2 fpm of the programmed speed then continue UTS, DT & DTS” turn off when active.
to the next step. If not, contact the factory.
“UT & DT” should turn off one inch closer to
If using a GPD 515 drive, the speed display the terminal floor levels than when the “US &
will be in hertz. Top speed will usually be 60 DS” inputs turn on.
Hz. The following formula is used to calculate
the speed in Hz. 5.3.9 Verify Car Speed On Safety Processor
Board
Speed(Hz) = (Speed(fpm)/ Top Speed(fpm)) *
60 Run the car in either direction and check the
car speed on the safety processor LCD display.
Example: The speed shown should match the car’s speed
Top Speed = 200 fpm actual speed. If the speed does not match and
Inspection Speed = 25 fpm the secondary feedback comes from pulses
Maximum Drive Frequency = 60 Hz from the tape go to “Correct Car Speed When
64
Using A Tape”. If the secondary feedback “IND” toggle switches on the 1038 or 1064
comes from an encoder go to “Correct Car board should still be in the down position.
Speed When Using An Encoder”. If the Turn the “INS” switch to the automatic
correct speed is shown proceed to the “Final position. The car should level into the floor.
Adjustment” section. From the LCD interface select the “Set Car
5.3.9.1 Correct Car Speed When Using A keys, setup a call. The elevator should run to
Tape answer the call. When the elevator levels in
The tape has holes every 3/8” that are 3/8” in and stops at the floor, the doors will remain
diameter. The safety processor measures the closed.
time between each pulse to calculate the
velocity. If the velocity is not displayed 5.4.2 Adjust The Drive Speed Profile
correctly first make sure that the feedback type
in the safety processor board adjustable The S-Curve parameters in the drive adjust the
variable is set to 0 for a tape application. Next, ride and performance of the car. Since the
while the car is running, make sure that the XP slowdown distances for each floor is a fixed
LED on this board is pulsing. As the car distance, these parameters must be adjusted to
increases in speed the LED will glow solid on. bring the car into the floor without over
If the LED does not pulse, try swapping the shooting or spotting at the floor. The
wires at the PPS and PP terminals. If the LED following parameters adjust the speed profile.
still does not work, contact the factory. If the
correct speed is shown proceed to “Final With HPV 900 or HPV 600
Adjustment”. S-CURVE A2
Accel Rate 0
5.3.9.2 Correct Car Speed When Using An Decel Rate 0
Encoder Accel Jerk In 0
When using an encoder for the secondary Accel Jerk Out 0
speed feedback, make sure that the adjustable Decel Jerk In 0
variables on the safety processor board are set Decel Jerk Out 0
properly. Set the feedback type to 1 for
encoder and set the encoder RPM and PPR MULTISTEP REF A3
appropriately for how the encoder is driven. If Speed Command 1
the correct velocity is not obtained, contact the Speed Command 2
factory. If the correct speed is shown proceed Speed Command 3
to the next step. Speed Command 4

With GPD 515
C1-01 Accel Time 1
5.4.1 Automatic Run
C1-02 Decel Time 1
C2-01 S-curve Accel Start
With the car on inspection, bring it to a normal
C2-02 S-curve Accel End
limit at a terminal landing. Make sure the
C2-03 S-curve Decel Start
normal limit input is off. The “AD” and
65
C2-04 S-curve Decel End 5.4.4 Adjust The Stop
D1-03 Freq Ref = Lev Speed
D1-04 Freq Ref = High Speed When at floor level the “UL, DL, & DZ” input
D1-09 Freq Ref = Ins Speed LED’s should be on. If the elevator
Do a preliminary adjustment of the speed up and down, try the following steps to correct
profile from the drive so that several the problem:
successful runs from floor to floor can be
made. 1. Increase the response of the drive and
retest the car.
If using an HPV 900 or HPV 600, run the
adaptive tune procedure next, otherwise, if 2. Reduce the leveling and re-leveling
using a GPD 515 proceed to adjust the stop. velocity parameters in the car and
Keep in mind that the response of the drive retest.
may need to be adjusted.
3. Make sure the brake is dropping
5.4.3 Drive Adaptive Tune (HPV 900 /600 quick enough.
Only)
4. If the car still oscillated, adjust the
“dead zone” on the selector. The
To finish the setup of the drive, an adaptive
“dead zone” is increased by moving
tune is required. It is necessary that the car run
the selector sensor boards closer
70% of contract speed when running this test
together.
so that the drive does not go into flux
weakening. In the DRIVE A1 Sub Menu, set If the car spots when approaching the floor, the
the CONTRACT MTR SPD parameter to 70% cause is usually from the car not tracking. Try
of the rated motor RPM. If this value was increasing the response of the drive again. The
adjusted to correct the top speed of the car, use deceleration rate can also be reduced a little to
70% of the adjusted value. To calculate 70%, help remove the spotting. Once the proper stop
multiply the value by 0.7. For example, if the is achieved, proceed to the next step.
motor RPM is 1050 then 70% of the motor
RPM is (1050 x 0.7 = 735). This procedure 5.4.5 Adjust The Start
will also require balanced load in the car.
Follow the adaptive tune procedure set in the To provide a proper start, adjust the brake pick
Magnetek HPV 900 or HPV 600 Technical delay and pattern delay in the controller and
Manual. After completing the adaptive tune the start jerk rate in the drive.
reset the CONTRACT MTR SPD parameter
and then proceed to the next step. Initially, set the brake pick delay to 0 and
increase the pattern delay by 0.1 seconds until
the controller picks the brake completely
before the motor starts to move. If roll back
occurs, then reduce the pattern delay until the
66
out better if the brake pick delay is set to 0.1 count value of (20 * 1.333) = 26.6. Round up
second. and set the UT and DT count to 27. If the UT
or DT Counts are modified, the limit velocity
Adjust the drive start jerk rate to smooth out has to be rechecked.
the start.
Make a one floor run to the bottom floor and
With the HPV 900 or HPV 600 record the limit velocity when the car stops.
Adjust Jerk Rate 1
Take the speed value for the up or down
With the GPD 515 terminal slowdown limit, add 20 fpm and then
Adjust C2-01 S-curve Accel Start set the new value in the corresponding variable
from the ADJ VAR menu.
Refer to the GPD 515 manual for
instructions to adjust the following 5.4.7 Verify Inspection Velocity Clamp On
parameters: Safety Processor Board
B6-01, B6-02, B6-03 and B6-
04 With the car on inspection, set the inspection
speed on the safety processor board to 25 fpm
Once the ride is acceptable, proceed to the next (Refer to Safety Processor Adjustable
step. Variables in section 11). Set the inspection
speed on the main CPU to 50 fpm (Refer to
5.4.6 Adjust Safety Processor Board Speed Adjustable Variables in section 10). Run the
Clamps car in either direction on inspection. The car
will shutdown when the speed goes above 25
Make a one floor run to the top floor. The car fpm.
must reach top speed on a one floor run. After
the car stops, record the velocity the car hit the Reset the inspection speed on main CPU to the
“UT, DT, UTS & DTS” slowdown limits. desired inspection speed and set the inspection
“UTS & DTS” are used on car with reduced speed on the Safety Processor to 140 fpm or
stroke buffers or with a top speed greater than lower. Make sure the car will run on inspection
200 fpm. The velocity value is shown from the without shutting down.
LIM VEL menu on the safety processor board
LCD display. 5.4.8 Analog Load Weigher Setup
The velocity value shown on the display for If the job uses an analog load weigher
the “UT or DT” limit is the value after the car purchased from G.A.L., complete the follow
hits the limit then counts the adjustable procedure. It is recommend to use two people,
number of counts set from “UT Count” or “DT one moving the weights and one in the
Count”. When using a tape feedback, there are machine room to set up the load weigher.
16 pulse counts per foot or 1.333 pulses per
inch. If the limit is set to 40” from the Mount the load weigher as described by the
terminal, to set the checkpoint at 20” use a manufacturer. The load weigher control box
67
will also contain a board supplied by G.A.L. switch) then place a car call to run the car up
that connects to the controller serial CAN bus one floor then back again. The doors will
and reads in the analog output from the load close when the call is placed.
weighing device. Wire the load weigher and
G.A.L. board according to the controller When the automatic sequence is activated, the
schematics. car will run to each floor and measure the
empty load value. The LCD display will
Calibrate the load weighing device hardware indicate when the sequence if finished.
The controller setup for the load weigher is in 5.4.8.2 Full Car Setup
two parts, empty car for each floor and full The empty car setup must be successfully
load for each floor. It is possible to manually completed to run the full load setup.
using the and the View/Modify Load Limits Once the empty setup is complete, run to the
menu. loading floor and turn the auto-door switch on
to allow weights to be loaded on the car. With
5.4.8.1 Empty Car Setup the car fully loaded, turn off the auto-door
switch and run the car to the bottom floor.
With an empty car placed on independent Again if the doors are not closed, make a one
operation and turn the auto-door switch to off. floor run to force the doors to close.
then select Load Weigher Setup and the select With the car at the bottom floor, follow the
Setup Load Weigher. LCD interface instructions to press enter to
start the full load setup sequence. The car will
The LCD interface will show setup automatically run to each floor and measure
instructions as you go through the procedure. the full load value. When the full load
It is okay to exit the setup screen to place a call measurement is complete, the car can be run to
and then return to it while the setup is being the loading floor and the weights removed.
performed. The actual load value read from the
analog to digital converter and the percent load From the LCD user interface, set the percent
can be viewed from the View/Modify LW values for load bypass (60%), load anti-
Setup menu. The percent load value will not be nuisance (10%), load dispatch (40%) and load
displayed correctly until the setup is complete overload (110%). Setting the adjustable
and the door has been cycled. variable to 0% will disable that particular
option. To disable load bypass, set the percent
Run the car to the bottom floor and press Enter value for load bypass to 0.
to start the automatic setup sequence. 5.4.8.3 Load Weighing Calibration
Sequence
If the car is at the bottom floor and the doors The load weigher is automatically calibrated
are not closed (the doors will not close once each week. If an error is detected during
68
this calibration sequence, the load weigher and
the pre-torque feature (if used) is disabled.
A load weighing calibration sequence can be

manually activated from the LCD interface by
Load Weigher Setup menu and following the on
screen instructions.
5.4.9 Check The Doors

circuits are operational. Flip the “IND and
elevator should open the doors. If the doors do
not open, correct the door wiring. If the doors
do open, the elevator is now on independent
service.
5.4.10 Fine Tune Ride And Stops
Ride the elevator and evaluate the ride

quality. Fine-tune the ride quality with the
drive S-Curve parameters. Fine-tune the
floor level magnets. Check all signal
devices for proper operation and remove
any temporary jumpers. The adjustment
should now be complete.
69
Section 6 - Adjustment of the 6.2.2 Set Toggle Switches
GALaxy controller - DC Quattro
Drive
board down except for the gate and lock
6.1 General Information bypass switches. The gate and lock bypass
Before adjustment begins the following items
must be completed. 6.2.3 Make Sure The Car Is Safe
1 All field wiring and safety circuits Verify that all elevator doors are closed and
installed that all safety circuits are functional.
2 Temporary jumpers from terminal “HC” 6.2.4 Check Controller Voltage
3 All hoistway limit switches installed
position. Check the voltage at L1, L2, and L3
4 All car and hoistway doors and interlocks on the SCR drive. Verify that all three phases
installed and pre-adjusted are present. Check the voltage at fuses L1, L2,
and L3 (if present) on controller. If correct,
5 Selector installed and magnets pre- check the voltage at terminal “LIN” with
adjusted respect to “GND”. The voltage should read
120VAC. If correct, check the voltage at
6 Familiarize yourself with all wiring terminals “S10, LC, & HC” with respect to
schematics “GND”. All should read 120VAC. If not,
check wiring diagram to determine problem
7 Familiarize yourself with the Quattro before continuing.
drive, drive manual, parameter
adjustment, etc. 6.2.5 Verify The Lcd Galaxy Is Blinking
6.2 Initial Power-up
6.2.1 Check Main Line Voltage
blinking, continue to the next step. If not,
With main-line disconnect in the off position, 1038 or 1064 board to insure 5VDC. If 5VDC
check the line-side voltage with a volt meter to is present and the “axy” on the LCD display is
insure the voltage matches the controller name not blinking, then contact factory.
correct or all three phases are not present, do 6.2.6 Preset Adjustable Variables On Safety
not proceed until corrected. Processor Board
The safety processor (1028N/1066) board is

normally preset prior to leaving the factory,
however, it is prudent to check the setup
values for the proper settings. Refer to section
70
6 of this manual for the operation of the safety CONTRACT MTR SPD
processor board LCD display interface. The ENCODER PULSES
following adjustment variables must be set
properly: Line Side Power Convert A5
INPUT L-L VOLTS
• Top Spd (contract speed)
• Enc RPM (if Fdbk Typ=1) Motor A6
• Enc PPR (if Fdbk Typ=1)
RATED MTR CURRENT
• Fdbk Typ (0=tape, 1=enc)
ARMATURE VOLTAGE
• Ctrl Typ (1=Tr NDF, 2=Tract DF)
• 2 Stop (0=Mult, 1=2 stop) FULL FLD CURRENT
• RearDoor (0=Front only, 1=Rear) WEAK FIELD CURRENT
• UTS Vel (Set to top speed) STANDBY FIELD
• DTS Vel (Set to top speed)
• INS Vel (Set to 140) 6.2.9 Quattro Drive Self-Tune
• LEV Vel (Set to 140)
• UT Vel (Set to 500) To have the Quattro drive unit learn the
• DT Vel (Set to 500) parameters of the hoist motor the drive self-
• UL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) tune must be performed. Place a temporary
• DL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) jumper from S10 to terminal MC on the
• Dmd Mult (Set to 1.000) GALX-1064AN board. This will energize the
• SoftStop (Set to 1) MC contactor coil to enable the drive to do a
motor self-tune. Turn on the main disconnect.
Note that the velocity variables will be setup Go to Auto Tune option under MS Pwr
once the car is running on automatic. Convert A4 on the hand held drive keypad.
The drive keypad will display “Start Tune?”.
6.2.7 Place Stop Switch In Run Position Press the enter key on the drive keypad to start
the auto tune process During this test, the
Flip the “STOP” toggle switch on the 1038 or “ME” contactor in the Quattro drive will
1064 board to the up position. Verify that energize for short period of time. After the
self-tune is performed correctly, “Auto Tune
input LED’s for “LC, HC, DN, UN, SS, GTS,
Finish” will appear on the drive unit display.
RDY and CS” are all on. If not, then correct
If a fault appears on the drive unit display, the
field wiring. problem must be corrected and the self-tune
performed again. If the self-tune is successful,
6.2.8 Hoist Motor Data
then the following functions must be viewed
At this time the hoist motor data must be and recorded under MS Power Data D2.
entered into the Quattro drive. The following
functions must be entered or verified using the Auto Meas Arm L
drive display unit. Follow the instructions in Auto Meas IRDrop
the Quattro drive manual to enter the following Auto Meas Arm R
data for each function: Auto Field Res
Auto Field TC
Drive A1
CONTRACT CAR SPD
71
The value of MS Power Data D2 Auto recorded. Please refer to the LCD Display
Meas Arm L should be manually Interface section for the Elevator Setup Menu.
entered into Function MS Pwr Convert
A4, Arm Inductance. 6.3 Run The Car On Inspection
The value of MS Power Data D2 Auto 6.3.1 Ready To Run On Inspection

Meas Arm R should be manually
entered into Function MS Pwr Convert The car should be ready to run on inspection if
A4, Arm Resistance. all is wired correctly. Select the “Elevator
The value of MS Power Data D2 Auto The display should show “Out of Service” on
Field Res should be manually entered the first line and “Inspection Mode” on the
into Function MS Pwr Convert A4, second. The LCD display on the Safety
Motor Field Res. Processor Board will display one of the
The value of MS Power Data D2 Auto
Field TC should be manually entered • “MR INS” (Motor Room)
into Function MS Pwr Convert A4, • “CT INS” (Car Top)
Motor Field TC. • “ACCESS” (Access)
• “IC INS” (In Car)
After these values are entered successfully, • “AUTO” (Not on Inspection)
make sure under parameter MS Pwr Convert
A4, Gain Selection is set to “Use Self Tune”. To run the car from the motor room, “MR
6.2.10 Pre-set The Digital Speed Clamps
Pre-set the software digital speed clamps from from the inspection switches and the gate and
the LCD interface under the “Elevator Setup lock bypass switches in series. One and only
Menu”. The submenus for the clamp speeds one of the five inspection inputs should be on
are as follows: for the car to run. Starting from the car top
inspection input, the five inspection inputs are,
Set Ins/Leveling Clamp “INS” for car top, “ACC” for access, “ICI” for
Set DT/UT Slowdown Clamp in-car, “MRI” for motor room, and “AUTO”
Set DTS/UTS Slowdown Clamp
Set the speed for Ins/Leveling for 140 fpm and
all the remaining slowdown limit speeds to the
contract speed of the car. Please note that the
displayed value of “Clamp Speed” is the value
the clamp should be set to. The slowdown
limit “Clamp Speed:” will show 0000 until the
car is run into the limits and the speed is
72

for automatic (no inspection). The inspection adjust the brake voltage using the controller
string circuit is shown in Figure 6.1. LCD, GALX-1021N. Scroll up or down on
Note that any one of the following conditions the 1021 board until the option “Adjustable
will cause an inspection error: Variables” is displayed. Hit the enter button
and use the up and down buttons again until
• More than one inspection input is on the option “Car Brake” is displayed. Hit the
• No inspection input is on enter button to access the brake adjustment
• Gate or Lock bypass switch is open and the parameters. Enter the proper Brake Pick Volt,
car is not on car top inspection Brake Hold Volt and BRK AC L-L Volt. Test
If the controller is not on motor room the brake voltages again. Make sure that the
inspection at this point, then verify all switch brake is lifting and setting properly before
positions and wiring before proceeding. proceeding.
6.3.2 Adjust The Brake Voltage 6.3.3 Check The Run Direction
Momentarily push the inspection “UP” or Momentarily push the inspection “UP” or
“DOWN” push button on the 1038 or 1064 “DOWN” push button on the 1038 or 1064
board while checking the DC brake voltage board. One of the following should take place:
with a meter. If the voltage is not correct,
73
The elevator will run controlled, in the correct an encoder isolation board (1022N) is used,
direction (up for “UP” button, down for move J5 and J6 on the encoder board. Refer to
“DOWN” button) with no drive faults. If so the jumper diagram on the board.
proceed to “Check Inspection Speed”.
Turn on the main disconnect and run the
The elevator will run controlled, but in the elevator on inspection again. If the elevator
wrong direction (down for “UP” button, up of runs controlled and in the correct direction,
“DOWN” button) with no drive faults. If so proceed to next section.
proceed to section “Car Runs In The Wrong
Direction”. If the elevator runs controlled but in the wrong
direction, the go back and follow the directions
The elevator will try to run, but immediately in the “Car Runs The Wrong Direction”
trip on a drive fault “Encoder Fault”. If so section. If the car still trips immediately on an
proceed to section “Drive Trips Immediately”. a drive fault, then contact the factory.
.
6.3.4 Car Runs In The Wrong Direction 6.3.6 Check Inspection Speed
If the elevator runs controlled but in the wrong With a hand held tachometer, check the speed
direction, with no drive faults, then turn off the of the elevator while running on inspection.
main disconnect, swap the hoist motor field The elevator should be running at 25 f.p.m.
wires. Also run the elevator while monitoring
Function Speed Feedback on the Quattro drive
Also swap the encoder direction by under Display D0, Elevator Data D1, Speed
swapping the wires or if an encoder Feedback. This function should also read 25
isolation board (1022N) is used, move J5 f.p.m.
and J6 on the encoder board. Refer to the
jumper diagram on the board. From the LCD interface select the “Display
To change the encoder direction at the drive, inspection, monitor the controller demand
swap the following wires: speed. If the velocity on the LCD display is
incorrect, check the Encoder RPM and PPR
A+ (TB3-2) with B+ (TB3-4). parameters from the “Adjustable
A- (TB3-3) with B- (TB3-5) Variables” menu. These variables should
Turn the main disconnect on, run the elevator be set the same as Drive A1, Contract MTR
on inspection again, and it should run Speed and Encoder Pulses on the Quattro
controlled and in correct direction. If so drive, respectively.
proceed to “Check Inspection Speed”. If not
contact the factory. If the speed on all three of these devices read
approximately 25 fpm (within +/-2 fpm)
6.3.5 Drive Trips Immediately
continue to the next step. If not, contact the
factory.
If the elevator tries to run, but immediately
trips on a drive fault “Encoder Fault”, then
turn off the main disconnect, and swap the
encoder direction by swapping the wires or if
74
6.3.7 Verify Controller Encoder Direction and then finally “UL” At floor level, “UL, DL,
With the LCD interface displaying “Elevator and DZ” inputs should all be on at the same
Status”, hit the “Up” or “Down” menu button time. Leaving the floor going down “DL” will
to change the screen to a motion screen. turn off first, then “DZ” and last “UL”.
Monitor the direction of the car from “DIR” on
the display or from the direction the pulse Also verify that the up and down terminal
counts are counting. DIR will show “Up” for slowdown limits inputs “UT, UTS, DT &
up and “Dn” for down. The pulse counts DTS” are breaking at the proper distances as
should increment going up and decrement shown in the slowdown table 2.0. “UT, UTS,
going down. DT & DTS” turn off when active.
If the direction is wrong or the pulse counts 6.3.9 Verify Car Speed On Safety Processor
change in the wrong direction, then the Board
encoder direction to the controller must be
changed. If an encoder isolation board Run the car in either direction and check the
(1022N) is used, move J1 and J2 on the car speed on the safety processor LCD display.
encoder board. Refer to the jumper The speed shown should match the car’s speed
diagram on the board. actual speed. If the speed does not match and
the secondary feedback comes from pulses
If no encoder isolation board is used, the A+ from the tape go to “Correct Car Speed When
and A- encoder wires from the drive must be Using A Tape”. If the secondary feedback
swapped. Note that the motor encoder wires comes from an encoder go to “Correct Car
are daisy chained from the encoder to the drive Speed When Using An Encoder”. If the
and then from the drive to the controller correct speed is shown proceed to the “Learn
encoder board. Only the A+ and A- wires the Hoistway” section.
from the drive to the controller board must be
swapped. The wires from the encoder to the 6.3.10 Correct Car Speed When Using A
drive must remain on the same terminal Tape Installed In Hoistway
locations on the drive. The tape has holes every 3/8” that are 3/8” in
If the encoder is counting properly continue to sensor closer to the tape until the orange LED
the next step. If not, contact the factory. at the end of the sensor turns on. Then turn the
sensor inwards another 1/8” and lock in the
6.3.8 Verify Selector And Slowdown Inputs sensor. While running on top of car inspection
verify that the orange LED at the end of the PP
Run the elevator up on inspection until it stops sensor turns on and off as it passes by the holes
on the up normal limit. The up and down on the tape. The safety processor measures the
normal limits should be set one inch above and time between each pulse to calculate the
below the terminal floors respectively. Verify velocity. If the velocity is not displayed
the selector inputs are being set properly on the correctly first make sure that the feedback type
controller by running the elevator down until it in the safety processor board adjustable
stops on the down normal limit. variable is set to 0 for a tape application. Next,
while the car is running, make sure that the
As the car approaches dead level to the floor PULSE LED on this board is pulsing. As the
going down, “DL” turns on first, then “DZ” car increases in speed the LED will glow solid
75
on. If the LED does not pulse, try swapping The Safety Processor 1066 Board uses a serial
the wires at the PPS and PP terminals. If the interface to a Turck absolute encoder, part #
LED still does not work, contact the factory. If T8.5882.3FB8.3001. With this system, the
the correct speed is shown proceed to “Learn encoder PPR is 8192 and this value should set
the Hoistway”. in the SPB. The RPM is calculated as above.
6.3.11 Correct Car Speed When Using An Verify communications between the encoder
Governor Mounted Encoder and the Safety Processor Board on the LCD
Interface Display “ENC COM”. Run the car
When using an encoder for the secondary speed and verify that the “PLS CNT” on the SPB is
feedback, make sure that the adjustable variables incrementing when running up or
on the safety processor board are set properly. decrementing when running down. The “PLS
Set the feedback type to 1 for encoder and set the CNT” value can be considerably out of range
encoder RPM and PPR appropriately for how the but will automatically correct during the Learn
encoder is driven. To calculate the RPM, divide Hoistway procedure. To reverse the direction
the contract speed of the car by the distance travel of counting, change the adjustable variable
below:
RPM = Speed fpm/(diameter GOV * pi ft/rev) verify the velocity on the “CAR SPD” display.
For a 1 ft. diameter governor: the factory. If the correct speed is shown
RPM = 350/(1*pi) = 350/3.1415 = 111.4
RPM = 350/(1.33* 3.1415) = 350/4.188 = 83.5 down normal limit with the inspection speed
set to 25 f.p.m. Verify that the “DN and DL”
6.3.12 Incremental Encoder 1028 Board input LED’s are both off. From the LCD
interface choose to “Learn Hoistway”. Follow
On a standard incremental encoder, the pulses the instructions on the screen.
per revolution are usually part of the part
number such as 1024 or 2048. Check the In general, the car is run from the bottom of
encoder part number and enter the encoder the hoistway, the down normal limit, to the top
PPR. Run the car on inspection and verify the of the hoistway, the top normal limit.
velocity on the “CAR SPD” display. Compare
the velocity with a hand held tachometer on NOTE!!! The car must run the entire
the vertical part of the governor cable. If the hoistway without stopping.
correct velocity is not obtained, contact the
factory. If the correct speed is shown proceed As the elevator moves up the hoistway, go to
to the “Learn Hoistway” step. the “Display Hoistway Tables” menu on the
LCD display and verify again that the “DPP”
6.3.13 Absolute Encoder 1066 Board pulse count on the screen are incrementing.
76
pulse count and distance for that floor should The acceleration and deceleration of the car
change and be stored. Verify that the floor should be smooth and stepless regardless of
distances are valid. The pulse count for the the distance of the run. If the elevator does not
terminal slowdowns will also be stored. The function as described above, then problem
elevator will stop when it reaches the up should be analyzed before proceeding.
normal limit.
After the elevator stops, move the elevator on
inspection until the “DZ and DL” LED’s are In order to fine tune the ride quality, refer to
on. Flip the “INS” toggle switch on the 1038 Figure 6.2 which describes what part of the S-
or 1064 board to the up position, and the curve that the different parameters effect. In
elevator should level down to floor level at the general, higher numbers in the given
top floor. If so, proceed to final adjustment. parameters, cause quicker and more abrupt
changes from one mode to the next during a
If the car levels down but does not run, then run. All of the S-curve parameters have a
check “Elevator Status” and “View Fault minimum and maximum value. The control
Log” on the LCD interface for a binary preset will not allow you to enter values that are not
error. If the car oscillates at the floor, then valid. After adjusting the S-curve parameters,
check the distance of the “UL” and “DL” proceed to the next step.
sensors. If he sensors are too close together,
spread both sensors apart slightly. After
problem is corrected, proceed to final
adjustment.
6.5.1 Automatic Run
The elevator should now be sitting idle at the

top floor. The “AD” and “IND” toggle
be in the down position. If the learn procedure
was successful the elevator should be ready to
make an automatic run.
The default parameter settings for the ride

quality should be adequate for an initial run.
From the LCD interface select the “Set Car
keys, setup a call. The elevator should run to
answer the call. When the elevator levels in
and stops at the floor, the doors will remain
closed.
77
Figure 6.2: S - Curve Parameters
6.5.3 Adjust The Stop If the car stops hard on the brake, then increase
the brake drop delay until the motor stops
When at floor level the “UL, DL, & DZ” input turning completely before the brake sets. The
LED’s should be on. If the elevator soft stop time MUST be set to at least 0.5
continually tries to seek floor level by leveling seconds LONGER than the brake drop delay.
up and down, check the motor field voltage to
be at the nameplate voltage while leveling. If Important: If you increase the soft stop time
the motor field voltage is fine but the car on the controller you need to also increase the
seems sluggish then increase the response of soft stop parameter on the safety processor
the drive. If the car still re-levels at the floor, board. Make sure that the soft stop parameter
try the following steps to correct the problem: on the safety processor board is larger than the
soft stop parameter on the controller.
1 Reduce the leveling and re-leveling veloc-
ity parameters in the car and retest. If the car spots when approaching the floor, the
2 If the car still oscillated, adjust the “dead cause is usually from the car not tracking (the
zone” on the selector. The “dead zone” is drive response is set too low) or the speed
increased by moving the selector sensor profile into the floor is too sharp. First try to
boards closer together. increase the response of the drive.
If the car still spots, increase the floor targeting
distance and retest the ride. The default value
for the floor targeting distance is 12 inches.
Increase it by steps of 2 or 3 and continue
retesting until the parameter is adjusted to 18.
78
If no change is notices, start again from 12 and Make a one floor run to the top floor. After the
decrease the value. car stops, record the velocity the car hit the
“UT, DT, UTS & DTS” slowdown limits.
The deceleration rate can also be reduced a “UTS & DTS” are used on car with reduced
little to help remove the spotting. Once the stroke buffers or with a top speed greater than
proper stop is achieved, proceed to “Adjust 200 fpm. The velocity value is shown from the
The Start”. LIM VEL menu on the safety processor board
LCD display.
6.5.4 Adjust The Start
The velocity value shown on the display for
To provide a proper start, adjust the brake pick the “UT or DT” limit is the value after the car
delay, pattern delay, and soft start jerk rate. hits the limit then counts the adjustable
Initially, set the brake pick delay to 0 and number of counts set from “UT Count” or “DT
increase the pattern delay by 0.1 seconds until Count”. When using a tape feedback, there are
the controller picks the brake completely 16 pulse counts per foot or 1.333 pulses per
before the motor starts to move. If roll back inch. If the limit is set to 40” from the
occurs, then reduce the pattern delay until the terminal, to set the checkpoint at 20” use a
roll back is gone. Sometimes, the timing works count value of (20 * 1.333) = 26.6. Round up
out better if the brake pick delay is set to 0.1 and set the UT and DT count to 27. If the UT
second. or DT Counts are modified, the limit velocity
has to be rechecked.
Adjust the soft start to for the quickness in
reaching constant acceleration. Keep in mind Run the car again to the top repeatedly from 2
that the larger the soft start number, the floors, then 3 floors, etc, until top speed is
quicker the start. The ride should now be reached. Record the limit velocities each time
acceptable. the car stops at the top floor.
6.5.5 Verify Top Speed Make the same runs to the bottom floor
To fine tune high speed, make high speed runs floors, etc, until top speed is reached. Record
while monitoring Elevator Data Submenu D1, the limit velocities each time the car stops at
Speed Feedback on the Quattro drive display. the bottom floor.
The speed should be slightly under contract
speed. Take the highest speed value for the up or
down terminal slowdown limit, add 20 fpm
If the speed is slightly under contract speed and then set the new value in the
then verify that Drive A1 Submenu, Contract corresponding variable from the ADJ VAR
MTR SPD is set as per motor data. When the menu.
Quattro display reads contract speed, proceed
to the next step.
6.5.6 Adjust Safety Processor Board Speed Clamps
Clamps
Having just made several runs into the top and
bottom landings, the main CPU has also
79
recorded the car’s velocity when the slowdown one moving the weights and one in the
limits were hit. If the car has been powered machine room to set up the load weigher.
down prior to this step, several runs have to be
made to the limits to allow the main CPU to Mount the load weigher as described by the
record the limit velocity values. manufacturer. The load weigher control box
will also contain a board supplied by G.A.L.
that connects to the controller serial CAN bus
From the main CPU LCD interface, choose
and reads in the analog output from the load
“Elevator Setup” and hit enter. Next choose
“DT/UT Slowdown Clamp” and again hit G.A.L. board according to the controller
enter. The display will show the Speed the car schematics.
hit the clamp on the previous run as “Clamp
Speed” and “UT/DT Limit” with a value to be Calibrate the load weighing device hardware
modified. Set the UT/DT Limit with the value according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
shown as Clamp Speed. If the Clamp Speed The controller setup for the load weigher is in
shows 0000 either the limit is not being used or two parts, empty car for each floor and full
the limit was not hit. load for each floor. It is possible to manually
Adjust speed clamps for each slowdown limits using the and the View/Modify Load Limits
used as determined by the elevator’s contract menu.
speed. 6.5.9.1 Empty Car Setup
6.5.8 Verify Inspection Velocity Clamp On
Safety Processor Board With an empty car placed on independent
operation and turn the auto-door switch to off.
With the car on inspection, set the inspection then select Load Weigher Setup and the select
speed on the safety processor board to 25 fpm Setup Load Weigher.
(Refer to Safety Processor Adjustable
Variables in section 11). Set the inspection The LCD interface will show setup
speed on the main CPU to 50 fpm (Refer to instructions as you go through the procedure.
Adjustable Variables in section 10). Run the It is okay to exit the setup screen to place a call
car in either direction on inspection. The car and then return to it while the setup is being
will shutdown when the speed goes above 25 performed. The actual load value read from the
fpm. analog to digital converter and the percent load
can be viewed from the View/Modify LW
Reset the inspection speed on main CPU to the Setup menu. The percent load value will not be
desired inspection speed and set the inspection displayed correctly until the setup is complete
speed on the Safety Processor to 140 fpm or and the door has been cycled.
lower. Make sure the car will run on inspection
without shutting down. Run the car to the bottom floor and press Enter
6.5.9 Analog Load Weigher Setup to start the automatic setup sequence.
If the car is at the bottom floor and the doors
are not closed (the doors will not close
If the job uses an analog load weigher automatically from turning off the auto-door
purchased from G.A.L., complete the follow switch) then place a car call to run the car up
80
one floor then back again. The doors will Load Weigher Setup menu and following the on
close when the call is placed. screen instructions.
When the automatic sequence is activated, the 6.5.10 Adjust The Motor Pre-torque
car will run to each floor and measure the The motor pre-torque uses the load value
empty load value. The LCD display will obtained from the analog load weigher and
indicate when the sequence if finished. will work only if the load weigher is
installed and successfully setup.
The empty car setup must be successfully On the Quattro drive under User Switches C1
completed to run the full load setup. parameter, set Pre-Torque source to serial.
Run the empty car to a middle floor. From the
Once the empty setup is complete, run to the LCD interface set the adjustable variable for
loading floor and turn the auto-door switch on percent balanced load to the balanced load
to allow weights to be loaded on the car. With value (typically 40%). Set the torque amount
the car fully loaded, turn off the auto-door to 10.00%, set the pattern delay to2.15 seconds
switch and run the car to the bottom floor. and the brake pick delay to 0.1 seconds. The
Again if the doors are not closed, make a one long patter delay will cause an exaggerated
floor run to force the doors to close. amount of roll back or roll forward. Make a
one floor run and note the amount of roll.
With the car at the bottom floor, follow the Increase the torque amount until the drive can
LCD interface instructions to press enter to hold the car without any motion for the entire
start the full load setup sequence. The car will pattern delay time. Reduce the pattern delay
automatically run to each floor and measure so that the car takes of just after the brake lifts.
the full load value. When the full load
measurement is complete, the car can be run to Note that the pattern delay must be at least
the loading floor and the weights removed. 0.15 seconds (150 milliseconds). Setting the
From the LCD user interface, set the percent torque feature. Also if the load weighing
values for load bypass (60%), load anti- calibration sequence detects a load weighing
nuisance (10%), load dispatch (40%) and load error, the pre-torque feature is also
overload (110%). Setting the adjustable automatically disabled.
variable to 0% will disable that particular
option. To disable load bypass, set the percent 6.5.11 Verify The Doors Are Safe
value for load bypass to 0.
Sequence circuits are operational. Flip the “INS” and
The load weigher is automatically calibrated elevator should level into the floor and open
once each week. If an error is detected during the doors. If the doors do not open, correct the
this calibration sequence, the load weigher and door wiring. If the doors do open, the elevator
the pre-torque feature (if used) is disabled. is now on independent service.
A load weighing calibration sequence can be
manually activated from the LCD interface by
selecting Load Weigher Calibration under the Fine tune ride quality with the field adjustable
81

learn the hoistway again. Check all signal
devices for proper operation and remove all
temporary jumpers. The adjustment should
now be complete.
82
Section 7 - Adjustment of the correct or all three phases are not present, do
GALaxy - Combivert F5 AC Drive not proceed until corrected.
7.1 General Setup 7.2.2 Set Toggle Switches
Before adjustment begins the following items Flip all toggle switches on the 1038 or 1064
must be completed. board down except for the gate and lock
bypass switches. The gate and lock bypass
1. All field wiring and safety circuits switches should be place in the up position.
installed
2. Temporary jumpers from terminal “HC”
to terminals “MES & ALT” Verify that all elevator doors are closed and
that all safety circuits are functional.
5. Selector installed and magnets pre- position. Check the voltage at R, S, and T on
adjusted the AC drive. Verify that all three phases are
present. Check the voltage at fuses L1 and L2
6. Familiarize yourself with all wiring on controller. If correct, check the voltage at
schematics terminal “LIN” with respect to “GND”. The
7. Familiarize yourself with the Magnetek check the voltage at terminals “S10, LC, &
HPV 900 PM Elevator Drive Technical HC” with respect to “GND”. All should read
Manual. 120VAC. If not, check wiring diagram to
determine problem before continuing.
8. Verify that the PM AC motor is properly
wired. 7.2.5 Verify The LCD GALaxy Is Blinking
9. Verify that the encoder is connected
properly.
7.2 Initial Power-up blinking, continue to the next step. If not,
7.2.1 Check Main Line Voltage 1038 or 1064 board to insure 5VDC. If 5VDC
is present and the “axy” on the LCD display is
With main-line disconnect in the off position, not blinking, then contact factory.
83
Processor Board
values for the proper settings. Refer to section the Combivert F5 drive manual to enter the
6 of this manual for the operation of the safety following data:
following adjustment variables must be set Motor Data
properly: LF.10 - Motor HP - Read only. Can
not be entered. This is calculated from rated
Top Spd (contract speed) speed and torque for PM gearless
Enc RPM (if Fdbk Typ=1) configuration.
Enc PPR (if Fdbk Typ=1) LF.11 - Motor Rated Speed(rpm)
Fdbk Typ (0=tape, 1=enc) LF.12 - Motor Rated Current(A)
Ctrl Typ (1=Tr NDF, 2=Tract DF) LF.13 - Motor Rated Frequency(Hz)
2 Stop (0=Mult, 1=2 stop)
RearDoor (0=Front only, 1=Rear) Machine Data
UTS Vel (Set to top speed) LF.21 - Sheave Diameter (in)
DTS Vel (Set to top speed) LF.23 - Roping ratio (1:1 or 2:1)
INS Vel (Set to 140)
LEV Vel (Set to 140) Encoder Data
UT Vel (Set to 500) LF.27 = 2048 for EnDat
DT Vel (Set to 500)
UL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) The number of poles is provided below
DL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) is you are using one of the following motors:
Dmd Mult (Set to 1.000) MAG05 = 66 poles
SoftStop (Set to 1) MAG10 = 66 poles
MAG15 = 66 poles
Note that the velocity variables will be setup
once the car is running on automatic. Leroy Somer Z2 = 16 poles
Leroy Somer Z3 = 16 poles
7.2.7 Place Stop Switch In Run Position Leroy Somer Z4 = 16 poles
Flip the “STOP” toggle switch on the 1038 Leroy Somer Z10 = 32 poles
board to the up position. Verify that input
LED’s for “LC, HC, DN, UN, SS, GTS, RDY
Imperial 474 = 20 poles
and CS” are all on. If not, then correct field Imperial 475 = 24 poles
wiring. Imperial 522 = 20 poles
Hollister Whitney = 28 poles
84
If you are not using one of the following Most of the drive parameters have been preset
motors listed and need to calculate the motor to values required for your specific job. Other
poles or motor rated speed, use the following parameters not listed here may need to be
formula based from the motor name plate data: adjusted in the field. Please refer to the
Combivert F5 manual for more parameter
information and trouble shooting guidelines.
2  60  MotorExitationFrequency  Hz 
poles = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RatedMotorSpeed  rpm  7.2.9 Pre-set The Digital Speed Clamps

The number of motor poles will always be a
whole, even number.
are as follows:
85
Set Ins/Leveling Clamp minutes. When the drive keypad displays
Set DT/UT Slowdown Clamp “Done”, release the up or down inspection but-
Set DT1/UT1 Slowdown Clamp ton. Return the wires back to the main and
emergency brake to allow the brake to pick
again.
Set DTS/UTS Slowdown Clamp 7.3.3 Encoder Learn Procedure, v1.62
(unroped machine).
Set the speed for Ins/Leveling for 140 fpm and If you are using v1.62 on the Combivert F5
all the remaining slowdown limit speeds to the drive you need to learn the encoder position
contract speed of the car. Please note that the with the ropes removed from the machine.
displayed value of “Clamp Speed” is the value Lower the inspection speed on the controller to
the clamp should be set to. The slowdown zero. Verify the motor wiring from the drive to
limit “Clamp Speed:” will show 0000 until the the motor, U to U, V to V and W to W. Verify
car is run into the limits and the speed is on the drive under 2.LF.26 = “Conn”, this indi-
cates that serial communication is established
between the encoder and the drive. If 2.LF.26
does not display “Conn” then there is a prob-
lem with the encoder, connections, or possible
7.3 Start-Up Procedure
an encoder setting. This problem must be rec-
tified before proceeding. Once communica-
7.3.1 Adjust The Brake Voltage
tion is established with the encoder, set LF.3 to
Adjust the brake voltage using the controller “P Lrn” and press enter on the drive. The
LCD, GALX-1021N. Scroll up or down on drive keypad will display “Start”. Press and
the 1021 board until the option “Adjustable hold the up or down inspection button. The
Variables” is displayed. Hit the enter button motor sheave will begin to move back and
and use the up and down buttons again until forth and the drive display will display a
the option “Car Brake” is displayed. Hit the numeric value. If the sheave begins to move,
enter button to access the brake adjustment but an E.EnC1 error occurs on the drive, the
parameters. Enter the proper Brake Pick Volt, drive will swap the encoder channels in LF.28
Brake Hold Volt and BRK AC L-L Volt. automatically and then display “retry”. Press
and hold the up or down inspection button
7.3.2 Motor Learn Procedure again. If the sheave does not move and am
E.EnC1 occurs, verify the brake picks and the
Lower the inspection speed on the controller to sheave is able to move freely and then try
zero. Remove one wire from the brake coil, again. If this does not resolve the problem, try
both on the main and emergency brake to pre- swapping output motor phases. When the pro-
vent the brakes from picking. On the drive cess is complete the sheave will stop rotating
hand held keypad set parameter LF.3 to and the drive will display “done” and the up or
“S.Lrn”. Press Enter and the drive keypad will down inspection button can be released. Make
display “Start”. Press and hold the up or down a note of LF.77 value which is the learned
inspection switch. You will hear all the con- encoder position value. Return the inspection
tactors (BRK, RUN and MC pick and stay speed on the controller and set LF.3 to “run”.
energized on the controller. The drive keypad
will change as a number of motor measure- Important: If the encoder is removed, abso-
ments are made. This process takes 2 to 5 lute position will need to be relearned !
86
7.3.4 Encoder Learn Procedure, v1.72 Change d.LF.32 from 200 to 50
(unroped or roped machine). Change A.LF.33 from 200 to 0
If you are using v1.72 on the Combivert F5 Change d.LF.33 from 200 to 0
drive you can learn the encoder position with
or without the ropes removed from the
Make sure that on the drive parameter LF.3 is
machine. Lower the inspection speed on the
controller to zero. Verify the motor wiring set to “run”. Run the motor at 10% of contact
from the drive to the motor, U to U, V to V and speed on inspection. Verify that there is zero
W to W. Verify on the drive under 2.LF.26 = curent draw in LF.93 and also verify proper
“Conn”, this indicates that serial communica- motor rotation. Press the up inspection button
tion is established between the encoder and the and verify motor is rotating in the up direction
drive. If 2.LF.26 does not display “Conn” then and then press the down inspection button and
there is a problem with the encoder, connec- verify that the motor is rotating in the down
tions, or possible an encoder setting. This direction. If not then change LF.28 from 0 to 2
problem must be rectified before proceeding. or from 1 to 3 and re-verify direction. With a
Once communication is established with the
hand held tachometer, check the speed of the
encoder, set LF.3 to “SPI” and press enter on
elevator while running on inspection. The
the drive. The drive keypad will display
“Start”. Press and hold the up or down inspec- elevator should be running at 10% contract
tion button. The drive will take ten encoder speed or 25 fpm for a 250 fpm car.
position samples. When the process is com- From the LCD interface, select the “Display
plete the drive keypad will display “done” and Hoistway Tables” menu. While running on
the up and down inspection button can be inspection, monitor the controller velocity.
released. Make a note of LF.77 value which is
the learned encoder position value. Return the If the velocity on the LCD display is
inspection speed on the controller and set LF.3 incorrect, check the Encoder RPM and PPR
to “run”. After making a trial run, if the cur- parameters from the “Adjustable
rent in LF.93 is excessive, change the value in
Variables” menu. These variables should
LF.28 from 0 to 1 or from 2 to 3 and repeat the
be set the same as the “Contract Mtr
process.
Speed” and “Encoder Pulses” parameters
Important: If the encoder is removed, abso- on the drive, respectively.
lute position will need to be relearned !
7.3.6 Verify Controller Encoder Direction
7.3.5 Check Inspection Speed With the LCD interface displaying “Elevator
Status”, hit the “Up” or “Down” menu button
After the encoder learn procedure has been to change the screen to a motion screen.
completed run the motor to verify correct Monitor the direction of the car from “DIR” on
operation. If the ropes are not on the sheave the display or from the direction the pulse
counts are counting. DIR will show “Up” for
and prior to running the motor adjust the
up and “Dn” for down. The pulse counts
following parameters on the drive.
should increment going up and decrement
going down.
Change A.LF.31 from 1200 to 300
Change d.LF.31 from 1200 to 300 If the direction is wrong or the pulse counts
Change A.LF.32 from 200 to 50 change in the wrong direction, then the
87
encoder direction to the controller must be lock bypass switches in series. One and only
changed. one of the five inspection inputs should be on
for the car to run. Starting from the car top
On the encoder isolation board (1022N), inspection input, the five inspection inputs are,
move J1 and J2 on the encoder board. Refer “INS” for car top, “ACC” for access, “ICI” for
to the jumper diagram on the board. in-car, “MRI” for motor room, and “AUTO”
for automatic (no inspection). The inspection
If the encoder is counting properly then place string circuit is shown in Figure 7.1.
the ropes on the sheave of the motor and reset
the drive parameters back to their original Note that any one of the following conditions
values and continue to the next step. If not, will cause an inspection error:
contact G.A.L. Technical Support.
• More than one inspection input is on
7.4 Run The Car On Inspection with the • No inspection input is on
ropes on the sheave of the motor. • Gate or Lock bypass switch is open and the
car is not on car top inspection
If the controller is not on motor room
From the LCD interface, select the inspection at this point, then verify all switch
“Adjustable Variables” menu, verify the positions and wiring before proceeding.
inspection speedis set to 10% of contract
speed. Before moving the car on inspection, 7.4.2 Verify Selector And Slowdown Inputs
verify again that all door locks, gate switches,
safety circuits, and limit switches are Run the elevator up on inspection until it stops
functioning properly. on the up normal limit. The up and down
The car should be ready to run on inspection if normal limits should be set one inch above and
all is wired correctly. Select the “Elevator below the terminal floors respectively. Verify
Status” on the main CPU board LCD display. the selector inputs are being set properly on the
The display should show “Out of Service” on controller by running the elevator down until it
the first line and “Inspection Mode” on the stops on the down normal limit.
Processor Board will display one of the As the car approaches dead level to the floor
following types of inspection: going down, “DL” turns on first, then “DZ”
and then finally “UL” At floor level, “UL, DL,
“MR INS” (Motor Room) and DZ” inputs should all be on at the same
“CT INS” (Car Top) time. Leaving the floor going down “DL” will
“ACCESS” (Access) turn off first, then “DZ” and last “UL”.
“AUTO” (Not on Inspection) Also verify that the up and down terminal
slowdown limits inputs “UT, UTS, DT &
To run the car from the motor room, “MR DTS” are breaking at the proper distances as
INS” should be displayed. shown in the slowdown table 2.0. “UT, UTS,
DT & DTS” turn off when active.
88
7.4.3 Verify Car Speed On Safety Processor When using an encoder for the secondary speed
Board feedback, make sure that the adjustable variables
on the safety processor board are set properly.
Run the car in either direction and check the Set the feedback type to 1 for encoder and set the
car speed on the safety processor LCD display. encoder RPM and PPR appropriately for how the
The speed shown should match the car’s actual encoder is driven. To calculate the RPM, divide
speed. If the speed does not match and the
the contract speed of the car by the distance travel
secondary feedback comes from pulses from
the tape go to “Correct Car Speed When Using
A Tape”. If the secondary feedback comes below:
from an encoder go to “Correct Car Speed
When Using An Encoder”. If the correct
speed is shown proceed to the “Learn the For a 1 ft. diameter governor:
Hoistway” section.
RPM = 350/(1*pi) = 350/3.1415 = 111.4
7.4.3.1 Correct Car Speed When Using A
Tape
The tape has holes every 3/8” that are 3/8” in RPM = 350/(1.33* 3.1415) = 350/4.188 = 83.5
sensor closer to the tape until the orange LED 7.4.3.3 Incremental Encoder 1028/1066
at the end of the sensor turns on. Then turn the Board
sensor inwards another 1/8” and lock in the
sensor. While running on top of car inspection On a standard incremental encoder, the pulses
verify that the orange LED at the end of the PP per revolution are usually part of the part
sensor turns on and off as it passes by the holes number such as 1024 or 2048. Check the
on the tape. The safety processor board on the encoder part number and enter the encoder
controller measures the time between each PPR. Run the car on inspection and verify the
pulse to calculate the velocity. If the velocity velocity on the “CAR SPD” display. Compare
is not displayed correctly first make sure that the velocity with a hand held tachometer on
the feedback type in the safety processor board the vertical part of the governor cable. If the
adjustable variable is set to 0 for a tape correct velocity is not obtained, contact the
application. Next, while the car is running, factory. If the correct speed is shown proceed
make sure that the XP LED on this board is to the “Learn Hoistway” step.
pulsing. As the car increases in speed the LED
will glow solid on. If the LED does not pulse, 7.4.3.4 Absolute Encoder 1066 Board
try swapping the wires at the PPS and PP
terminals. If the LED still does not work, The Safety Processor 1066 Board uses a serial
contact the factory. If the correct speed is interface to a Turck absolute encoder, part #
shown proceed to “Learn the Hoistway”. T8.5882.3FB8.3001. With this system, the
encoder PPR is 8192 and this value should set
7.4.3.2 Correct Car Speed When Using An in the SPB. The RPM is calculated as above.
Encoder
Verify communications between the encoder
and the Safety Processor Board on the LCD
89
Interface Display “ENC COM”. Run the car If this car uses a tapeless selector with an
and verify that the “PLS CNT” on the SPB is absolute encoder, verify that the “PLS CNT”
incrementing when running up or decrement i on the Safety Processor Board was reset close
ng when running down. The “PLS CNT” to a count of 5000 when the car first starts
value can be considerably out of range but will moving to learn the hoistway. If the number is
automatically correct during the Learn extremely large or is decrement i ng, stop the
Hoistway procedure. To reverse the direction learn hoistway procedure, correct the direction
of counting, change the adjustable variable on the SPB and then restart the learn process.
Interface from “CW” to “CCW” or vise versa. After the elevator stops, move the elevator on
Run the car at a know inspection speed and inspection until the “DZ and DL” LED’s are
verify the velocity on the “CAR SPD” display. on. Flip the “INS” toggle switch on the 1038
If the correct velocity is not obtained, contact or 1064 board to the up position, and the
the factory. If the correct speed is shown elevator should level down to floor level at the
proceed to the “Learn Hoistway” step. top floor. If so, proceed to final adjustment.
7.5 Learn The Hoistway If the car levels down but does not run, then
check “Elevator Status” and “View Fault Log”
The elevator should now be stopped on the on the LCD interface for a binary preset error.
down normal limit with the inspection speed If the car oscillates at the floor, then check the
set to 10% of contract speed. Verify that the distance of the “UL” and “DL” sensors. If he
“DN and DL” input LED’s are both off. From sensors are too close together, spread both
the LCD interface choose to “Learn sensors apart slightly. After problem is
Hoistway”. Follow the instructions on the corrected, proceed to final adjustment.
screen.
In general, the car is run from the bottom of 7.6 Final Adjustment
the hoistway, the down normal limit, to the top
of the hoistway, the top normal limit. 7.6.1 Automatic Run
NOTE!!! The car must run the entire The elevator should now be sitting idle at the
hoistway without stopping. top floor. The “AD” and “IND” toggle
As the elevator moves up the hoistway, go to be in the down position. If the learn procedure
the “Display Hoistway Tables” menu on the was successful the elevator should be ready to
LCD display and verify again that the “DPP” make an automatic run.
pulse count on the screen are incrementing.
Also as the elevator passes each floor, the The default parameter settings for the ride
pulse count and distance for that floor should quality should be adequate for an initial run.
change and be stored. Verify that the floor From the LCD interface select the “Set Car
distances are valid. The pulse count for the Call” menu and using the up and down arrow
terminal slowdowns will also be stored. The keys, setup a call. The elevator should run to
elevator will stop when it reaches the up answer the call. When the elevator levels in
normal limit. and stops at the floor, the doors will remain
closed.
90
The acceleration and deceleration of the car board. Make sure that the soft stop parameter
should be smooth and stepless regardless of on the safety processor board is larger than the
the distance of the run. If the elevator does not soft stop parameter on the controller.
function as described above, then problem
should be analyzed before proceeding. If the car spots when approaching the floor, the
cause is usually from the car not tracking (the
7.6.2 Fine Tune The Ride Quality drive response is set too low) or the speed
In order to fine tune the ride quality, refer to increase the response of the drive.
Figure 7.2 which describes what part of the S-
curve that the different parameters effect. In If the car still spots increase the floor targeting
general, higher numbers in the given distance and retest the ride. The default value
parameters, cause quicker and more abrupt for the floor targeting distance is 12 inches.
changes from one mode to the next during a Increase it by steps of 2 or 3 and continue
run. All of the S-curve parameters have a retesting until the parameter is adjusted to 18.
If no change is notices, start again from 12 and
minimum and maximum value. The control
decrease the value.
will not allow you to enter values that are not
valid. After adjusting the S-curve parameters The deceleration rate can also be reduced a
for the desired ride, proceed to the next step. little to help remove the spotting. Proceed with
adjusting the start once the proper stop is
7.6.3 Adjust The Stop
achieved.
When at floor level the “UL, DL, & DZ” input 7.6.4 Adjust The Start
LED’s should be on. If the elevator
continually tries to seek floor level by leveling To provide a proper start, adjust the brake pick
up and down, try the following steps to correct delay, pattern delay, and soft start jerk rate.
the problem: Initially, set the brake pick delay to 0 and
Increase the response of the drive and retest increase the pattern delay by 0.1 seconds until
the car. the controller picks the brake completely
Reduce the leveling and re-leveling velocity before the motor starts to move. If roll back
parameters in the car and retest. occurs, then reduce the pattern delay until the
If the car still oscillates, adjust the “dead zone” roll back is gone. Sometimes, the timing works
on the selector. The “dead zone” is increased out better if the brake pick delay is set to 0.1
by moving the selector sensor boards closer second.
together.
If the car stops hard on the brake, then increase Adjust the soft start to for the quickness in
the brake drop delay until the motor stops reaching constant acceleration. Keep in mind
turning completely before the brake sets. that the larger the soft start number, the
The soft stop time MUST be set to at least 0.5 quicker the start. The ride should now be
seconds LONGER than the brake drop delay. acceptable.
Important: If you increase the soft stop time

on the controller you need to also increase the
soft stop parameter on the safety processor
91
7.6.5 Adjust Safety Processor Board Speed Count”. When using a tape feedback, there
Clamps are 16 pulse counts per foot or 1.333 pulses per
inch. If the limit is set to 40” from the
Make a one floor run to the top floor. terminal, to set the checkpoint at 20” use a
After the car stops, record the velocity the car count value of (20 * 1.333) = 26.6. Round up
hit the “UT, DT, UTS & DTS” slowdown and set the UT and DT count to 27. If the UT
limits. “UTS & DTS” are used on car with or DT Counts are modified, the limit velocity
reduced stroke buffers or with a top speed has to be rechecked.
greater than 200 fpm. The velocity value is
shown from the LIM VEL menu on the safety Run the car again to the top repeatedly from 2
processor board LCD display. floors, then 3 floors, etc, until top speed is
reached. Record the limit velocities each time
The velocity value shown on the display for the car stops at the top floor. Make the same
the “UT or DT” limit is the value after the car runs to the bottom floor starting from 1 floor,
hits the limit then counts the adjustable then 2 floors, then 3 floors, etc, until top speed
number of counts set from “UT Count” or “DT is reached. Record the limit velocities each
92
time the car stops at the bottom floor. Take the Adjust speed clamps for each slowdown limits
highest speed value for the up or down used as determined by the elevator’s contract
terminal slowdown limit, add 20 fpm and then speed.
set the new value in the corresponding variable
from the ADJ VAR menu. 7.6.7 Verify Inspection Velocity Clamp On
Clamps With the car on inspection, set the inspection
speed on the safety processor board to 25 fpm
Having just made several runs into the top and (Refer to Safety Processor Adjustable
bottom landings, the main CPU has also Variables in section 11). Set the inspection
recorded the car’s velocity when the slowdown speed on the main CPU to 50 fpm (Refer to
limits were hit. If the car has been powered Adjustable Variables in section 10). Run the
down prior to this step, several runs have to be car in either direction on inspection. The car
made to the limits to allow the main CPU to will shutdown when the speed goes above 25
record the limit velocity values. fpm.
From the main CPU LCD interface, choose Reset the inspection speed on main CPU to the
“Elevator Setup” and hit enter. Next choose desired inspection speed and set the inspection
“DT/UT Slowdown Clamp” and again hit speed on the Safety Processor to 140 fpm or
enter. lower. Make sure the car will run on inspection
The display will show the Speed the car hit the without shutting down.
clamp on the previous run as “Clamp Speed”
and “UT/DT Limit” with a value to be 7.6.8 Analog Load Weigher Setup
modified. Set the UT/DT Limit with the value
shown as Clamp Speed. If the Clamp Speed If the job uses an analog load weigher
shows 0000 either the limit is not being used or purchased from G.A.L., complete the follow
the limit was not hit. procedure. It is recommend to use two people,
one moving the weights and one in the
The number of slowdown limits depends on machine room to set up the load weigher.
the speed of the car as show in the table below:
Mount the load weigher as described by the
CAR NUMBER OF CLAMP LIMIT manufacturer. The load weigher control box
SPEED SLOWDOWN NUMBER USED will also contain a board supplied by G.A.L.
LIMITS that connects to the controller serial CAN bus
<= 250 1 2 UT,
and reads in the analog output from the load
fpm DT weighing device. Wire the load weigher and
G.A.L. board according to the controller
300-500 2 3 UT1, schematics.
fpm DT1
600-700 3 4 UT2, Calibrate the load weighing device hardware
fpm DT2
800 + 4 5 UT3,
fpm DT3 The controller setup for the load weigher is in
two parts, empty car for each floor and full
Table 7.1: Slowdown Clamps load for each floor. It is possible to manually
93
setup the load weigher from the LCD interface to allow weights to be loaded on the car. With
using the and the View/Modify Load Limits the car fully loaded, turn off the auto-door
menu. switch and run the car to the bottom floor.
Again if the doors are not closed, make a one
7.6.8.1 Empty Car Setup floor run to force the doors to close.
With an empty car placed on independent With the car at the bottom floor, follow the
operation and turn the auto-door switch to off. LCD interface instructions to press enter to
From the LCD interface, select Elevator Setup, start the full load setup sequence. The car will
then select Load Weigher Setup and the select automatically run to each floor and measure
Setup Load Weigher. the full load value. When the full load
measurement is complete, the car can be run to
The LCD interface will show setup the loading floor and the weights removed.
instructions as you go through the procedure.
It is okay to exit the setup screen to place a call From the LCD user interface, set the percent
and then return to it while the setup is being values for load bypass (60%), load anti-
performed. The actual load value read from the nuisance (10%), load dispatch (40%) and load
analog to digital converter and the percent load overload (110%). Setting the adjustable
can be viewed from the View/Modify LW variable to 0% will disable that particular
Setup menu. The percent load value will not be option. To disable load bypass, set the percent
displayed correctly until the setup is complete value for load bypass to 0.
and the door has been cycled.
Run the car to the bottom floor and press Enter Sequence
to start the automatic setup sequence. The load weigher is automatically calibrated
once each week. If an error is detected during
switch) then place a car call to run the car up A load weighing calibration sequence can be
one floor then back again. The doors will manually activated from the LCD interface by
close when the call is placed. selecting Load Weigher Calibration under the
When the automatic sequence is activated, the screen instructions.
car will run to each floor and measure the
empty load value. The LCD display will 7.6.9 Adjust The Motor Pre-torque
indicate when the sequence if finished. The motor pre-torque uses the load value
obtained from the analog load weigher and
will work only if the load weigher is
The empty car setup must be successfully installed and successfully setup.
completed to run the full load setup.
Run the empty car to a middle floor. From the
Once the empty setup is complete, run to the LCD interface set the adjustable variable for
loading floor and turn the auto-door switch on percent balanced load to the balanced load
94
value (typically 40%). Set the torque amount Check all signal devices for proper operation
to 10.00%, set the pattern delay to 2.15 and remove all temporary jumpers. The
seconds and the brake pick delay to 0.1 adjustment should now be complete.
exaggerated amount of roll back or roll
forward. Make a one floor run and note the
amount of roll. Increase the torque amount
until the drive can hold the car without any
motion for the entire pattern delay time.
Reduce the pattern delay so that the car takes
of just after the brake lifts.
torque feature. Also if the load weighing
calibration sequence detects a load weighing
error, the pre-torque feature is also
automatically disabled.



learn the hoistway again.
95
Section 8 - Adjustment of the three phases are present. If voltage is not
GALaxy - HPV-900 Permanent correct or all three phases are not present, do
Magnet AC Gearless Motor not proceed until corrected.
8.2.2 Set Toggle Switches

8.1 General Setup
Before adjustment begins the following items board down except for the gate and lock
must be completed. bypass switches. The gate and lock bypass
1. All field wiring and safety circuits
installed 8.2.3 Make Sure The Car Is Safe
2. Temporary jumpers from terminal “HC” Verify that all elevator doors are closed and
to terminals “MES & ALT” that all safety circuits are functional.
3. All hoistway limit switches installed 8.2.4 Check Controller Voltage
position. Check the voltage at R, S, and T on
5. Selector installed and magnets pre- the AC drive. Verify that all three phases are
adjusted present. Check the voltage at fuses L1 and L2
on controller. If correct, check the voltage at
6. Familiarize yourself with all wiring terminal “LIN” with respect to “GND”. The
schematics voltage should read 120VAC. If correct,
check the voltage at terminals “S10, LC, &
7. Familiarize yourself with the Magnetek HC” with respect to “GND”. All should read
HPV 900 PM Elevator Drive Technical 120VAC. If not, check wiring diagram to
Manual. determine problem before continuing.
8. Verify that the PM AC motor is properly 8.2.5 Verify The LCD GALaxy Is Blinking
wired.
9. Verify that the encoder is connected on the LCD display is blinking. If the “axy” is
properly. blinking, continue to the next step. If not,
8.2 Initial Power-up check voltage at terminals 5V to 0V on the
1038 or 1064 board to insure 5VDC. If 5VDC
8.2.1 Check Main Line Voltage is present and the “axy” on the LCD display is
not blinking, then contact factory.
With main-line disconnect in the off position,
96
Processor Board
values for the proper settings. Refer to section the HPV 900 PM drive manual to enter the
6 of this manual for the operation of the safety following data:
following adjustment variables must be set DRIVE A1 Sub Menu
properly: CONTRACT CAR SPD
CONTRACT MTR SPD
Top Spd (contract speed) (motor nameplate RPM)
Enc RPM (if Fdbk Typ=1) ENCODER PULSERS
Enc PPR (if Fdbk Typ=1) (PPR from encoder on motor)
Fdbk Typ (0=tape, 1=enc)
Ctrl Typ (1=Tr NDF, 2=Tract DF) MOTOR A5 Sub Menu
2 Stop (0=Mult, 1=2 stop) RATED MTR PWR
RearDoor (0=Front only, 1=Rear) (motor nameplate)
UTS Vel (Set to top speed) RATED MTR VOLTS
DTS Vel (Set to top speed) (motor nameplate)
INS Vel (Set to 140) RATED MOTOR CURR
LEV Vel (Set to 140) (motor nameplate)
UT Vel (Set to 500) MOTOR POLES
DT Vel (Set to 500) The number of poles is provided below
UL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) is you are using one of the following motors:
DL Vel (Set to 160 if Non-DF) MAG05 = 66 poles
Dmd Mult (Set to 1.000) MAG10 = 66 poles
SoftStop (Set to 1) MAG15 = 66 poles
Note that the velocity variables will be setup Leroy Somer Z2 = 16 poles
once the car is running on automatic. Leroy Somer Z3 = 16 poles
8.2.7 Place Stop Switch In Run Position Leroy Somer Z6 = 32 poles
Flip the “STOP” toggle switch on the 1038 Leroy Somer Z20 = 32 poles
board to the up position. Verify that input
LED’s for “LC, HC, DN, UN, SS, GTS, RDY
and CS” are all on. If not, then correct field Imperial 522 = 20 poles
wiring. Imperial 525 = 20 poles
Hollister Whitney = 28 poles
97
If you are not using one of the following Set the speed for Ins/Leveling for 140 fpm and
motors listed and need to calculate the motor all the remaining slowdown limit speeds to the
poles, use the following formula based from contract speed of the car. Please note that the
the motor name plate data: displayed value of “Clamp Speed” is the value
the clamp should be set to. The slowdown
limit “Clamp Speed:” will show 0000 until the
2  60  MotorExitationFrequency  Hz  car is run into the limits and the speed is
poles = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RatedMotorSpeed  rpm  recorded. Please refer to the LCD Display
8.3 PM Start-Up Procedure(no ropes on the

The number of motor poles will always be a
sheave of the motor)
whole, even number.
8.3.1 Adjust The Brake Voltage
RATED MTR SPEED
Adjust the brake voltage using the controller
(motor RPM on nameplate)
LCD, GALX-1021N. Scroll up or down on
the 1021 board until the option “Adjustable
Most of the drive parameters have been preset
Variables” is displayed. Hit the enter button
and use the up and down buttons again until
parameters not listed here may need to be
the option “Car Brake” is displayed. Hit the
adjusted in the field. Please refer to the enter button to access the brake adjustment
Magnetek HPV Technical manual for more parameters. Enter the proper Brake Pick Volt,
parameter information and trouble shooting Brake Hold Volt and BRK AC L-L Volt.
guidelines.
8.3.2 Encoder Learn Procedure
From the digital operator for the drive, reset
any active faults and clear the fault history log. Very Important !! You have to perform an
Absolute Encoder Alignment Procedure
8.2.9 Pre-set The Digital Speed Clamps prior to placing the ropes on the sheave of
the motor.
The following procedure is meant to work
directly with the controller. On the controller
LCD board, scroll through Adjustable Vari-
are as follows: ables, Car Motion, and set the Inspection speed
to 0 fpm. On the HPV-900 Hand held operator
Set Ins/Leveling Clamp go to the Utilities U0 option and hit enter.
Set DT/UT Slowdown Clamp Scroll through the Utilities option until the
Set DT1/UT1 Slowdown Clamp Rotor Align U10 option and hit enter. Verify
Set DT2/UT2 Slowdown Clamp ALIGNMENT METHOD is set to OPEN
Set DT3/UT3 Slowdown Clamp LOOP. Scroll to ALIGNMENT and press
Set DTS/UTS Slowdown Clamp enter to change parameter ALIGNMENT from
DISABLE to ENABLE and press enter.
98
Press the down arrow to start the alignment section on PM Start-Up Procedure in the
procedure. Press the enter to change the data HPV-900 PM Technical manual to resolve any
from NO to ON RUN. Wire the controller to faults. If faults persist contact G.A.L. Techni-
either run from car top inspection or machine cal Support.
room inspection. See prints or quick start-up
guide for wiring. Give the controller a com- Once the encoder alignment procedure is com-
mand to run on inspection up or down by plete, verify under A5 Motor the value of
momentarily jump INS to IU or ID (for car top ENCODER ANG OFST is anything but
inspection) or by pushing the Up or Down 30000. If the value is 30000 then the align-
inspection button (for machine room inspec- ment procedure did not work and must be
tion) on the GALX-1064 main I/O board. redone. Reset the inspection speed back to it’s
The motor should rotate smoothly back and original value. Prior to placing the ropes on
forth for about 4 seconds without any faults. If
a fault occurs on the drive please consult the
99
the sheave of the motor verify that you are encoder direction to the controller must be
able to rotate the motor in the up direction and changed.
in the down direction. If you are then proceed
to the next step. On the encoder isolation board (1022N),
move J1 and J2 on the encoder board. Refer
8.3.3 Check Inspection Speed to the jumper diagram on the board.
With a hand held tachometer, check the speed If the encoder is counting properly then place
of the elevator while running on inspection. the ropes on the sheave of the motor and
The elevator should be running at 10% continue to the next step. If not, contact
contract speed or 25 fpm for a 250 fpm car. G.A.L. Technical Support.
Also run the elevator while monitoring SPEED
8.4 Run The Car On Inspection with the
FEEDBACK on the HPV 900 drive display.
ropes on the sheave of the motor.
The display should show 10% of contract
speed.
From the LCD interface, select the “Display
From the LCD interface, select the
inspection, monitor the controller velocity. If “Adjustable Variables” menu, verify the
the velocity on the LCD display is incorrect, inspection speedis set to 10% of contract
check the Encoder RPM and PPR speed. Before moving the car on inspection,
parameters from the “Adjustable verify again that all door locks, gate switches,
Variables” menu. These variables should safety circuits, and limit switches are
be set the same as the “Contract Mtr functioning properly.
Speed” and “Encoder Pulses” parameters The car should be ready to run on inspection if
on the drive, respectively. all is wired correctly. Select the “Elevator
With the speed on all three of these devices Status” on the main CPU board LCD display.
reading approximately 10% of contract speed The display should show “Out of Service” on
(within +/-2 fpm) continue to the next step. If the first line and “Inspection Mode” on the
not, contact the factory. second. The LCD display on the Safety
Processor Board will display one of the
8.3.4 Verify Controller Encoder Direction following types of inspection:
With the LCD interface displaying “Elevator
“MR INS” (Motor Room)
Status”, hit the “Up” or “Down” menu button
“CT INS” (Car Top)
“ACCESS” (Access)
Monitor the direction of the car from “DIR” on
the display or from the direction the pulse
“AUTO” (Not on Inspection)
counts are counting. DIR will show “Up” for
up and “Dn” for down. The pulse counts
should increment going up and decrement
going down.
If the direction is wrong or the pulse counts
100
one of the five inspection inputs should be on
for the car to run. Starting from the car top Run the car in either direction and check the
inspection input, the five inspection inputs are, car speed on the safety processor LCD display.
“INS” for car top, “ACC” for access, “ICI” for The speed shown should match the car’s actual
in-car, “MRI” for motor room, and “AUTO” speed. If the speed does not match and the
for automatic (no inspection). The inspection secondary feedback comes from pulses from
string circuit is shown in Figure 8.1. the tape go to “Correct Car Speed When Using
A Tape”. If the secondary feedback comes
Note that any one of the following conditions from an encoder go to “Correct Car Speed
will cause an inspection error: When Using An Encoder”. If the correct
speed is shown proceed to the “Learn the
• More than one inspection input is on Hoistway” section.
• No inspection input is on
• Gate or Lock bypass switch is open and the 8.4.3.1 Correct Car Speed When Using A
car is not on car top inspection Tape
If the controller is not on motor room The tape has holes every 3/8” that are 3/8” in
inspection at this point, then verify all switch diameter. On the selector unit adjust the PP
positions and wiring before proceeding. sensor closer to the tape until the orange LED
at the end of the sensor turns on. Then turn the
8.4.2 Verify Selector And Slowdown Inputs sensor inwards another 1/8” and lock in the
sensor. While running on top of car inspection
Run the elevator up on inspection until it stops verify that the orange LED at the end of the PP
on the up normal limit. The up and down sensor turns on and off as it passes by the holes
normal limits should be set one inch above and on the tape. The safety processor board on the
below the terminal floors respectively. Verify controller measures the time between each
the selector inputs are being set properly on the pulse to calculate the velocity. If the velocity
controller by running the elevator down until it is not displayed correctly first make sure that
stops on the down normal limit. the feedback type in the safety processor board
adjustable variable is set to 0 for a tape
As the car approaches dead level to the floor application. Next, while the car is running,
going down, “DL” turns on first, then “DZ” make sure that the XP LED on this board is
and then finally “UL” At floor level, “UL, DL, pulsing. As the car increases in speed the LED
and DZ” inputs should all be on at the same will glow solid on. If the LED does not pulse,
time. Leaving the floor going down “DL” will try swapping the wires at the PPS and PP
turn off first, then “DZ” and last “UL”. terminals. If the LED still does not work,
contact the factory. If the correct speed is
Also verify that the up and down terminal shown proceed to “Learn the Hoistway”.
slowdown limits inputs “UT, UTS, DT &
DTS” are breaking at the proper distances as 8.4.3.2 Correct Car Speed When Using An
shown in the slowdown table 2.0. “UT, UTS, Encoder
DT & DTS” turn off when active.
When using an encoder for the secondary speed
8.4.3 Verify Car Speed On Safety Processor feedback, make sure that the adjustable variables
Board on the safety processor board are set properly.
101
Set the feedback type to 1 for encoder and set the ng when running down. The “PLS CNT”
encoder RPM and PPR appropriately for how the value can be considerably out of range but will
encoder is driven. To calculate the RPM, divide automatically correct during the Learn
the contract speed of the car by the distance travel Hoistway procedure. To reverse the direction
in one revolution with the governor as shown of counting, change the adjustable variable
below: “ENC DIR” on the SPB LCD Display
RPM = Speed fpm/(diameter GOV * pi ft/rev) Run the car at a know inspection speed and
verify the velocity on the “CAR SPD” display.
For a 1 ft. diameter governor: If the correct velocity is not obtained, contact
the factory. If the correct speed is shown
RPM = 350/(1*pi) = 350/3.1415 = 111.4 proceed to the “Learn Hoistway” step.
For a 16 in diameter governor (16/12 = 1.33ft) 8.5 Learn The Hoistway
RPM = 350/(1.33* 3.1415) = 350/4.188 = 83.5 The elevator should now be stopped on the
down normal limit with the inspection speed
8.4.3.3 Incremental Encoder 1028/1066 set to 10% of contract speed. Verify that the
Board “DN and DL” input LED’s are both off. From
the LCD interface choose to “Learn
On a standard incremental encoder, the pulses Hoistway”. Follow the instructions on the
per revolution are usually part of the part screen.
number such as 1024 or 2048. Check the In general, the car is run from the bottom of
encoder part number and enter the encoder the hoistway, the down normal limit, to the top
PPR. Run the car on inspection and verify the of the hoistway, the top normal limit.
velocity on the “CAR SPD” display. Compare
the velocity with a hand held tachometer on NOTE!!! The car must run the entire
the vertical part of the governor cable. If the hoistway without stopping.
correct velocity is not obtained, contact the
factory. If the correct speed is shown proceed As the elevator moves up the hoistway, go to
to the “Learn Hoistway” step. the “Display Hoistway Tables” menu on the
LCD display and verify again that the “DPP”
8.4.3.4 Absolute Encoder 1066 Board pulse count on the screen are incrementing.
The Safety Processor 1066 Board uses a serial pulse count and distance for that floor should
interface to a Turck absolute encoder, part # change and be stored. Verify that the floor
T8.5882.3FB8.3001. With this system, the distances are valid. The pulse count for the
encoder PPR is 8192 and this value should set terminal slowdowns will also be stored. The
in the SPB. The RPM is calculated as above. elevator will stop when it reaches the up
normal limit.
Verify communications between the encoder
and the Safety Processor Board on the LCD If this car uses a tapeless selector with an
Interface Display “ENC COM”. Run the car absolute encoder, verify that the “PLS CNT”
and verify that the “PLS CNT” on the SPB is on the Safety Processor Board was reset close
incrementing when running up or decrement i to a count of 5000 when the car first starts
102
moving to learn the hoistway. If the number is
extremely large or is decrement i ng, stop the 8.6.2 Fine Tune The Ride Quality
learn hoistway procedure, correct the direction
on the SPB and then restart the learn process. In order to fine tune the ride quality, refer to
Figure 8.2 which describes what part of the S-
After the elevator stops, move the elevator on curve that the different parameters effect. In
inspection until the “DZ and DL” LED’s are general, higher numbers in the given
on. Flip the “INS” toggle switch on the 1038 parameters, cause quicker and more abrupt
or 1064 board to the up position, and the changes from one mode to the next during a
elevator should level down to floor level at the run. All of the S-curve parameters have a
top floor. If so, proceed to final adjustment.
minimum and maximum value. The control
will not allow you to enter values that are not
If the car levels down but does not run, then
check “Elevator Status” and “View Fault Log” valid. After adjusting the S-curve parameters
on the LCD interface for a binary preset error. for the desired ride, proceed to the next step.
If the car oscillates at the floor, then check the
8.6.3 Adjust The Stop
distance of the “UL” and “DL” sensors. If he
sensors are too close together, spread both
sensors apart slightly. After problem is When at floor level the “UL, DL, & DZ” input
corrected, proceed to final adjustment. LED’s should be on. If the elevator
8.6 Final Adjustment up and down, try the following steps to correct
the problem:
8.6.1 Automatic Run Increase the response of the drive and retest
the car.
The elevator should now be sitting idle at the Reduce the leveling and re-leveling velocity
top floor. The “AD” and “IND” toggle parameters in the car and retest.
switches on the 1038 or 1064 board should still If the car still oscillates, adjust the “dead zone”
be in the down position. If the learn procedure on the selector. The “dead zone” is increased
was successful the elevator should be ready to by moving the selector sensor boards closer
make an automatic run. together.
If the car stops hard on the brake, then increase
The default parameter settings for the ride the brake drop delay until the motor stops
quality should be adequate for an initial run. turning completely before the brake sets.
From the LCD interface select the “Set Car The soft stop time MUST be set to at least 0.5
Call” menu and using the up and down arrow seconds LONGER than the brake drop delay.
keys, setup a call. The elevator should run to
answer the call. When the elevator levels in Important: If you increase the soft stop time
and stops at the floor, the doors will remain on the controller you need to also increase the
closed. soft stop parameter on the safety processor
The acceleration and deceleration of the car board. Make sure that the soft stop parameter
should be smooth and stepless regardless of on the safety processor board is larger than the
the distance of the run. If the elevator does not soft stop parameter on the controller.
function as described above, then problem
should be analyzed before proceeding.
103
If the car spots when approaching the floor, the parameter A1 CONTARCT MTR SPD until
cause is usually from the car not tracking (the the AC drive display reads contract speed,
drive response is set too low) or the speed proceed to the next step.
increase the response of the drive. 8.6.6 Adjust Safety Processor Board Speed
Clamps
If the car still spots increase the floor targeting
distance and retest the ride. The default value Make a one floor run to the top floor.
for the floor targeting distance is 12 inches. After the car stops, record the velocity the car
Increase it by steps of 2 or 3 and continue hit the “UT, DT, UTS & DTS” slowdown
retesting until the parameter is adjusted to 18. limits. “UTS & DTS” are used on car with
If no change is notices, start again from 12 and reduced stroke buffers or with a top speed
decrease the value. greater than 200 fpm. The velocity value is
shown from the LIM VEL menu on the safety
The deceleration rate can also be reduced a processor board LCD display.
little to help remove the spotting. Proceed with
adjusting the start once the proper stop is The velocity value shown on the display for
achieved. the “UT or DT” limit is the value after the car
8.6.4 Adjust The Start number of counts set from “UT Count” or “DT
Count”. When using a tape feedback, there are
To provide a proper start, adjust the brake pick 16 pulse counts per foot or 1.333 pulses per
delay, pattern delay, and soft start jerk rate. inch. If the limit is set to 40” from the
Initially, set the brake pick delay to 0 and terminal, to set the checkpoint at 20” use a
increase the pattern delay by 0.1 seconds until count value of (20 * 1.333) = 26.6. Round up
the controller picks the brake completely and set the UT and DT count to 27. If the UT
before the motor starts to move. If roll back or DT Counts are modified, the limit velocity
occurs, then reduce the pattern delay until the has to be rechecked.
out better if the brake pick delay is set to 0.1 Run the car again to the top repeatedly from 2
second. floors, then 3 floors, etc, until top speed is
reached. Record the limit velocities each time
Adjust the soft start to for the quickness in the car stops at the top floor.
reaching constant acceleration. Keep in mind Make the same runs to the bottom floor
that the larger the soft start number, the starting from 1 floor, then 2 floors, then 3
quicker the start. The ride should now be floors, etc, until top speed is reached. Record
acceptable. the limit velocities each time the car stops at
the bottom floor.
8.6.5 Verify Top Speed
Take the highest speed value for the up or
To fine tune high speed, make high speed runs down terminal slowdown limit, add 20 fpm
while monitoring the SPEED FEEDBACK on and then set the new value in the
the HPV drive display. The speed should be corresponding variable from the ADJ VAR
slightly under contract speed. If the speed is menu.
not correct increase or decrease drive
104
8.6.7 Adjust Digital Slowdown Speed The display will show the Speed the car hit the
Clamps clamp on the previous run as “Clamp Speed”
and “UT/DT Limit” with a value to be
Having just made several runs into the top and modified. Set the UT/DT Limit with the value
bottom landings, the main CPU has also shown as Clamp Speed. If the Clamp Speed
shows 0000 either the limit is not being used or
recorded the car’s velocity when the the limit was not hit.
slowdown limits were hit. If the car has been
powered down prior to this step, several runs
have to be made to the limits to allow the main
CPU to record the limit velocity values.
From the main CPU LCD interface, choose

“Elevator Setup” and hit enter. Next choose
“DT/UT Slowdown Clamp” and again hit
enter.
105
The number of slowdown limits depends on one moving the weights and one in the
the speed of the car as show in the table below: machine room to set up the load weigher.
CAR NUMBER OF CLAMP LIMIT Mount the load weigher as described by the
SPEED SLOWDOWN NUMBER USED manufacturer. The load weigher control box
LIMITS will also contain a board supplied by G.A.L.
<= 250 1 2 UT,
that connects to the controller serial CAN bus
fpm DT and reads in the analog output from the load
300-500 2 3 UT1, G.A.L. board according to the controller
fpm DT1 schematics.
600-700 3 4 UT2,
fpm DT2
800 + 4 5 UT3,
Calibrate the load weighing device hardware
fpm DT3 according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
The controller setup for the load weigher is in
Table 8.1: Slowdown Clamps two parts, empty car for each floor and full
load for each floor. It is possible to manually
Adjust speed clamps for each slowdown limits setup the load weigher from the LCD interface
used as determined by the elevator’s contract using the and the View/Modify Load Limits
speed. menu.
8.6.8 Verify Inspection Velocity Clamp On 8.6.9.1 Empty Car Setup
With an empty car placed on independent
With the car on inspection, set the inspection operation and turn the auto-door switch to off.
speed on the safety processor board to 25 fpm From the LCD interface, select Elevator Setup,
(Refer to Safety Processor Adjustable then select Load Weigher Setup and the select
Variables in section 11). Set the inspection Setup Load Weigher.
speed on the main CPU to 50 fpm (Refer to
Adjustable Variables in section 10). Run the The LCD interface will show setup
car in either direction on inspection. The car instructions as you go through the procedure.
will shutdown when the speed goes above 25 It is okay to exit the setup screen to place a call
fpm. and then return to it while the setup is being
performed. The actual load value read from the
Reset the inspection speed on main CPU to the analog to digital converter and the percent load
desired inspection speed and set the inspection can be viewed from the View/Modify LW
speed on the Safety Processor to 140 fpm or Setup menu. The percent load value will not be
lower. Make sure the car will run on inspection displayed correctly until the setup is complete
without shutting down. and the door has been cycled.
8.6.9 Analog Load Weigher Setup
Run the car to the bottom floor and press Enter
If the job uses an analog load weigher to start the automatic setup sequence.
purchased from G.A.L., complete the follow
106
switch) then place a car call to run the car up A load weighing calibration sequence can be
one floor then back again. The doors will manually activated from the LCD interface by
close when the call is placed. selecting Load Weigher Calibration under the
When the automatic sequence is activated, the screen instructions.
car will run to each floor and measure the
empty load value. The LCD display will 8.6.10 Adjust The Motor Pre-torque
indicate when the sequence if finished. The motor pre-torque uses the load value
obtained from the analog load weigher and
8.6.9.2 Full Car Setup will work only if the load weigher is
The empty car setup must be successfully installed and successfully setup.
completed to run the full load setup.
On the HPV-900 PM drive under User
Once the empty setup is complete, run to the Switches C1 parameter, set Pre-Torque source
loading floor and turn the auto-door switch on to serial. Run the empty car to a middle floor.
to allow weights to be loaded on the car. With From the LCD interface set the adjustable
the car fully loaded, turn off the auto-door variable for percent balanced load to the
switch and run the car to the bottom floor. balanced load value (typically 40%). Set the
Again if the doors are not closed, make a one torque amount to 10.00%, set the pattern delay
floor run to force the doors to close. to 2.15 seconds and the brake pick delay to 0.1
With the car at the bottom floor, follow the exaggerated amount of roll back or roll
LCD interface instructions to press enter to forward. Make a one floor run and note the
start the full load setup sequence. The car will amount of roll. Increase the torque amount
automatically run to each floor and measure until the drive can hold the car without any
the full load value. When the full load motion for the entire pattern delay time.
measurement is complete, the car can be run to Reduce the pattern delay so that the car takes
the loading floor and the weights removed. of just after the brake lifts.
From the LCD user interface, set the percent 0.15 seconds (150 milliseconds). Setting the
values for load bypass (60%), load anti- torque amount to 0.00 will disable the pre-
nuisance (10%), load dispatch (40%) and load torque feature. Also if the load weighing
overload (110%). Setting the adjustable calibration sequence detects a load weighing
variable to 0% will disable that particular error, the pre-torque feature is also
option. To disable load bypass, set the percent automatically disabled.
value for load bypass to 0.
Sequence The elevator should now be adjusted. Verify
The load weigher is automatically calibrated circuits are operational. Flip the “INS” and
once each week. If an error is detected during “AD” toggle switches to the up position. The
107


learn the hoistway again.
Check all signal devices for proper operation

and remove all temporary jumpers. The
adjustment should now be complete.
108
Section 9 - Troubleshooting 9.3 Input/Output Boards
9.1 General Information The two main sections of all the I/O boards are
the low voltage and the high voltage sections.
The GALaxy controller is equipped with a The low voltage section consists of all the digital
number of features that aid in troubleshooting interfacing necessary for the CPU to
any problems that may occur. The physical communicate with the field components. The
layout of the controller provides ready access to high voltage section consists of the field
all I/O in order to make voltage measurements. components (buttons, switches, lights, relays and
All inputs have LED’s that monitor the state of sensors) and their associated input and output
the input. The controller is also equipped with an signals. The standard voltage for all I/O is
LCD Display interface discussed in sections 7, 120VAC. However, if necessary, the I/O boards
and an LCD Display interface on the Safety can accept a voltage range from 24V to 120V
Processor Board discussed in section 8. In this AC.
section the basic points of troubleshooting will be
detailed. It is very important that the wiring schematics are
viewed in order to determine the voltages for
9.2 Microprocessor CPU which the controller was designed before power
is applied. The majority of problems that may
The CPU is very reliable and normally trouble- arise with the control system are due to faulty
free. With power turned on, the “axy” in inputs or outputs on the high voltage side of the
GALaxy on the LCD Display interface should system. For example, having a limit switch not
be blinking at one second intervals to indicate feeding or an acknowledgment light out. The
that the CPU is running. If it is not blinking, then GALaxy control system is designed to enable the
check voltage at the 5V terminal with respect to technician to check both the high voltage section
the 0V terminal on the 1038 or 1064 board. This and the low voltage section to correct the
voltage should read 5VDC. If not, then check the problem.
input and output voltage of the DC power supply.
If the “axy” is not blinking and 5VDC is present The high voltage section is checked with a digital
at the 5V terminal with respect to the 0V voltmeter or with the individual LED’s that are
terminal, then contact the factory. associated with each input. Depending on the
particular input or output, the voltage measured
All job parameters that are field adjustable are at the terminal will either be “high” or “low” with
stored in a non-volatile SRAM chip on the 1036 respect to its reference point. For example, to
board. If the field adjustable parameters will determine whether or not the up terminal
return to the default settings when the main slowdown limit switch was feeding, the voltage
power is turned off check that the J1 (Pin should be measured at terminal “UT” with
Devices) jumper on the 1036 board is set to 28 respect to “GND”. If the switch is feeding it
pin and the J2(VDROP) jumper on the 1036 should read 120VAC. If the switch is open, the
board is on. Both jumpers are located on the voltage should read less than 50VAC. Another
lower right hand corner of the 1036 board. means by which to determine whether the switch
is feeding is to view the “UT” input LED. If the
109
LED is on, the switch is feeding. If the LED is labeled “O_” on the silk screens of the different I/
off, the switch is open. O boards. The output solid-state relays are
socketed IC=s labeled “RLY_” on the silk
The previous example determines whether or not screens of the different I/O boards. If it is
the field component is functioning properly. determined through the previous troubleshooting
However, to determine if the signal is actually procedures that the input signal is present at the
being communicated to the CPU the signal must terminal, but is not being communicated to the
be checked on the low voltage section of the CPU, the input opto-isolator may be defective
board. The low voltage section is checked from and can be replaced in the field. If it is
the LCD interface. Using the previous example, determined that the CPU is communicating the
select the “Inputs and Outputs” menu on the output signal to the solid-state relay, but the
LCD interface. Scroll through the I/O list until voltage does not go high at the terminal, the
“UT” is located. It will show “UT=1” if the solid-state relay may be defective and can be
“UT” switch is feeding and “UT=0” if the switch replaced in the field. Any time IC=s are
is open. replaced, the power should be turned off and care
should be taken in removal of the old chip and
A second example will show how to determine if
replacement of the new one. All of the I/O and
an output is working properly. With the car at the
their associated IC=s are listed in the wiring
first floor and the controller designed for
schematics.
120VAC discrete position indicators, the “P1”
output should be on. The voltage measured at 9.4 Run Sequence
terminal “P1” with respect to “GND”, should
read 120VAC. If the voltage reads less than The following diagram in Figure 9.0 shows the
50VAC, the voltage supplied to the output device run sequence of the controller. The timing of
must be checked. The schematic, in this case, BRK changes with the adjustment variable DON
would show the “P1” voltage is supplied at the Start Control. When set to 0 the BRK output
“PIC” terminal. A voltmeter would be use to turns on before DON and when set to 1 BRK
measure the voltage between “PIC” and “GND”. turns on after DON. The BRK timing typical
If that voltage is at the terminal but the indicator works best with the adjustable variable set to 0
is not on. The LCD interface could be used to for VVVF and 1 for DC SCR.
view if the CPU is turning the “P1” output on.
From the LCD “Inputs and Outputs” menu, scroll
through the I/O list until the “P1” is located. The
display will show “P1=1” to turn on the “P1”
output. For this example, since the CPU is
turning on the output and the correct voltage is at
the output common but not at the output terminal,
it would indicate that the output solid-state relay
for “P1” is defective and should be replaced.
All of the I/O’s are optically isolated between the

high voltage section and the low voltage section.
The input opto-isolators are socketed IC=s
110
Figure 9.0: Run Sequence
9.5 The Safety Processor Board that the car is safe to run. It also verifies all
inspection operations and that the car is not
traveling at a speed greater than 150 fpm with
The Safety Processor Board has two fault
a door open in the door zone.
LED’s, one on the top center and one on the
bottom center of the board. The top center While the Safety Processor Board cannot turn
LED is for PAL inhibit and the bottom center on any run control signals, it can turn off the
one is for PIC inhibit (See Figure 9.1a). follow signals from the main CPU: RUNA,
BRK, UP, DNR, UPF and DF. The SFC relay
Important: When either LED is on, this in the safety string is also controlled by the
board will prevent the car from running. Safety Processor Board.
The Safety Processor Board verifies the speed The Safety Processor board detects two types
of the car when hitting the terminal limits, that of faults, active faults and velocity faults.
the doors are closed when they should be and Active faults are input conditions that are
111
Figure 9.1a: Safety Processor Board
considered as unsafe or an error such as the • View the fault log “Faults” for recorded
lock bypass switch place on while the car is on faults. The Safety Processor Board faults
automatic. Velocity faults are cause by a are recorded in ram and will be lost when
condition while the car speed is too high such power is turned off.
as hitting the DTS terminal limit at a speed
greater than the speed setting for that limit.
Of the signals that the Safety Processor Board
Both type of faults are reset after a 2 second
can turn off, the RUNA is turned on first in a start
delay, the condition is corrected and the main
CPU is not commanding an up or down run. sequence. Since the Safety Processor and the
main CPU run independent of each other, a
When troubleshooting errors detected by the RUNA Off error on the main CPU is typically
Safety Processor board, take the following steps: caused by the Safety Processor detecting an error
at the instant the run is starting. When a RUNA
• Check LED status. Either PAL inhibit or Off error is recorded, check the status of the
PIC inhibit LED on indicates an error. Safety Processor board first.
• View the elevator service “Elev Serv”.
Anything other than Automatic or a valid During a fault condition when the Safety
inspection service is an error. Processor drops the SFC relay, every input after
• View the inputs “Inp/Out” for an incorrect the SFC terminal will lose voltage including the
input status. See the Safety Processor LCD
inputs for the normal and terminal limits. This
Display Interface section for all the input
and output signals. could cause an Up or Down directional limit
error on the main CPU.
112
Even though we take every precaution to detect
an error and display the appropriate error code,
sometimes the sequence of inputs and output
change so quickly that correct error is not
recorded. Usually the fault table data will lead to
the circuit where the error was detected but, in
addition, it is also necessary to look ahead of the
circuit for possible causes.
Additional fault information is shown in the next

section of system faults.
9.6 System Faults
Fault information is displayed on the LCD

display from the “Elevator Status” and the “View
Fault Log” menus on the main CPU. Fault
information can also be obtained from the Safety
Processor LCD display under the “Fault” menu.
Below is a list of system faults logged by the
main CPU and possible reasons for each fault.
113
9.6.1 Main CPU Faults
Table 1: Main CPU Faults
Fault Description Possible Cause/Suggested Fix
ASV Time-out Car 1 Automatic Service Time-out Car • Car was not able to answer group
1 hall call within the automatic service
time-out timer. Look for fault condi-
tion on car.
tion on car.
tion on car.
tion on car.
tion on car.
tion on car.
tion on car.
tion on car.
114
Binary Input Fault The floor position, read from • Excessive ware on the selector
binary inputs on the selector, guides.
does not match the car position. • Preset magnet is missing or mis-
aligned.
• Faulty hall effect sensor on sensor
board.
• Faulty output on selector driver
board.
• Improper wiring between selector
and the Top of Car board (1037 or
1040 board).
• Faulty BP1, BP2 or BP4 input
BKS Fault Slowdown BKS Brake Switch Fault • Faulty brake lift switch.
Slowdown. The brake lift switch • Low brake hold voltage
dropped during the run causing
the car to slowdown at the next
available floor
Bot Final Limit Flt Bottom Final Limit Open • Car traveled onto the bottom final
limit.
• Faulty wiring of the final limit cir-
cuit.
Bottom Door Lock Fault The Bottom Door Lock failed on • Faulty door lock.
while the door was open. • Door lock not adjusted properly.
• Jumper placed on door lock circuit.
• Faulty wiring to DLB input.
• Faulty DLB and DLB-1 inputs (For
this to occur both DLB and DLB-1
inputs must fail on).
• DOL input failed. Replace DOL
input chip.
• Door operator open limit DOL is not
adjusted properly
Brake Drop Fault Brake failed to drop. The BKS • Improper adjustment of brake
input did not close while switch.
stopped. • Brake failed to drop.
115
Brake Fault Set Gripper The Rope Gripper was tripped • Improper adjustment of brake
when the brake did not drop. switch.
The brake switch adjustable • Brake failed to drop.
variable can be set to only show
the brake drop fault if the brake
does not drop.
Brake Pick Fault Brake failed to pick. The BKS • Improper adjustment of brake
input did not open during the run. switch.
• Brake failed to pick.
BRK CAN Com Error Brake Board CAN • Faulty CAN communication wire
Communication Error. connection. Verify proper twisted
pair wires to the CANH and CANL
terminals on the brake board.
• Noise on the CAN bus. Verify that
the shield wire is connected accord-
ing to the job print.
BRK I/O Failed Off The BRK input or output has • Improper wiring of the brake BRK
failed off. The BRK coil is wired coil. Refer to prints for wire connec-
through a NO contact of MC, a tions.
NO regulator release contact of • Faulty BRKi input. Replace BRKi
the drive (DON) and a BRK triac input chip on 1038 or 1064 board.
of the controller. • Faulty BRK output. Replace BRK
output chip on 1038 or 1064 board.
• Fault on 1028 Safety Processor
Board. The Safety Processor Board
can disable the run control to the
BRK output chip. Check if the PIC
or PAL inhibit LED turns on when
the car attempts to run. Check the
elevator service, faults, and inputs/
outputs on the Safety Processor
Board LCD display.
BRK I/O Failed On The BRK input or output has • Improper wiring of the brake BRK
failed on. coil. Refer to prints for wire connec-
tions.
• Faulty BRKi input. Replace BRKi
input chip on 1038 or 1064 board.
• Faulty BRK output. Replace BRK
output chip on 1038 or 1064 board.
116
BRK Low DC Bus Volts DC Bus Voltage is less than 80% • Incorrect Setting of Line to Line
of expected Brake voltage in Adjustable Vari-
ables
• Incorrect dipswitch setting for Three
Phase or Single Phase
• Low Line Voltage
• Rectifiers Blown or have bad Con-
nection
BRK No Current w/Volt Reading a resistance value • No Brake Connected

(Vout/Aout) of 1000Ω or greater • Bad Current Sensor
BRK No DC Bus Volts DC Bus Voltage is less than • No AC Voltage Coming into AC1-
5VDC AC2-AC3
• Rectifiers Blown or have bad Con-
nection
BRK No Output Volts If no DC Bus Faults, Requested • IGBT Not Gating

Output Voltage is greater than 0,
Actual Output voltage is less
than 3VDC
BRK Over Current Flt Average Current is higher than • IGBT Shorted
Preset Limit (based on board • Free Wheeling Diode Shorted
configuration) • Gating Circuitry Shorted ON
BRK Over Voltage Flt Output Voltage is at least 20V • IGBT Shorted
greater than the Voltage • Gating Circuitry shorted ON
Requested.
BRK Rq Volt > DC Bus Requested Output Voltage is 5% • Incorrect Setting of Pick/Hold/Rele-
greater than the DC Bus Voltage vel Voltage in Adjustable Variable
• Low Line Voltage
Buffer Switch Fault Buffer Switch Open • Verify that the buffer switch is set
and the switch is closed.
• Faulty wiring on the buffer switch
circuit.
• Car hit the buffer
CAN Bus Off Error CAN Bus Off Error. The can bus • Faulty CAN bus wiring. Check the
has been inactive for too long a CAN bus terminal connections on all
period of time. boards.
117
CAN Chip Init Error CAN Chip Initialization Error. • Faulty system ground. This error can
The can chip provides a clock occur if electrical noise on the sys-
output that is used for the system tem ground causes the CAN chip to
10 msec clock. The main CPU reset.
continually check the clock setup • Fault 1036 board. Replace the 1036
data and if incorrect will reset the board.
CAN chip and set this error code.
Car 2 Comm Loss The group car is not • Faulty wiring from R/T+ and R/T-
communicating with Car 2. from car to car.
• Faulty 75176 driver chip on 1036
board.
• Noise on shield wire. Connect shield
only on one end.
• Noise on the communication wires.
Run wires in separate conduit.
board.
only on one end.
board.
only on one end.
board.
only on one end.
118
communicating with Car 6 from car to car.
board.
only on one end.
board.
only on one end.
board.
only on one end.
Car Call Light Fuse Car Call Light Fuse Blown • Check for short on the Car Call
Light circuit.
Car Call Power Fuse Car Call Power Fuse Blown • Check for short on Car Call Power
circuit.
Car Com Device Reset Serial Car board reset • Usually caused by loss of power to
unexpectedly. Usually caused by the individual board. Check for
loss of power to the individual loose connection on power to board.
board. • Faulty I/O board.
119
Car Safe Fault The Car Safe Fault occurs from • The car does not have the gate or
the wanting to run but does not lock inputs and is running or trying
have a critical input energized. to run
Some of the conditions for a car • The gripper GTS input is not on.
safe fault will also cause other • The stop switch is open
faults to be logged. • An inspection string input fault.
Only one input should be on in the
inspection string (AUTO, CTI, ICI,
ACC or MRI)
• Gate or Lock Bypass switch is on
when not on car top inspection
Car Safe Fault Preop The car had a car safe fault while • The car lost the DZ input while lev-
pre-opening the door. eling into the floor and the door was
open.
Car Safe Fault Start The car had an onward call, had • The locks are not making properly
the door close limit but the car when the door closes.
gate or door locks did not make • The door is not closing properly.
after a 3 second time-out.
Car Safety Sw. Flt Car Safety Switch Fault • Verify that the car safety is not
tripped.
• Faulty wiring in the car safety cir-
cuit.
Comp. Switch Fault Compensating Rope Switch • Verify that the compensating rope
Open switch is set and the switch is closed.
• Improper cabling of the compensat-
ing ropes on the sheave.
CWT Error at DT Car “above cwt” flag was set for • The counterweight switch was not
above the counterweight when hit during the run or the car was lost
the car hit the down terminal when powered up.
slowdown limit. • Faulty wiring of the counterweight
switch.
• Improper adjustment of the counter-
weight switch.
120
CWT Error at UT Car “above cwt” flag was set for • The counterweight switch was not
below the counterweight when hit during the run or the car was lost
the car hit the up terminal when powered up.
slowdown limit. • Faulty wiring of the counterweight
switch.
• Improper adjustment of the counter-
weight switch.
DBR Temperature Flt Dynamic Braking Resistor • Faulty Temperature Sensor. If the
Temperature Fault. The DB Resistors are not hot, check the
temperature for the dynamic temperature sensor input board con-
braking resistors is read in nected to the CPU board. The input
through a temperature sensor LED should be on when the temper-
mounted above the resistors. ature is okay. If the LED is not on,
The temperature sensor connects jump the two terminals on the tem-
to the temperature sensor input perature input board and the LED
board mounted on the DIO1 should go on. If the LED goes on
connector on the CPU board. then the Temperature Sensor is bad.
When the temperature sensor Replace the Temperature Sensor.
opens a contact, the CPU detects • Faulty Temperature Sensor Input
a temperature fault, an error is Board. Test the sensor input as
above. If the LED does not turn on
recorded, the car is shut down at
when the input terminals are jumped
the next floor and the DBC relay
together, replace the Temperature
is de-energized to open the DB
Sensor Input Board.
Resistor circuit.
Delta Off Fault DEL input did not come on at • The delta contact did not make on a
start or went off during a run. Y-Delta starter.
• The MC contact did not make on an
across-the-line starter
• The “at speed” contact did not make
on an electronic soft-starter.
• Faulty DEL input. Replace the DEL
input chip.
Delta on Fault DEL input failed on when is • Faulty DEL input (failed on). Check
should have been off. This would the input and output status on the
occur at the start of a run when LCD interface.
the I/O’s are checked. The input • Faulty contact for DEL input failed
failed on or the contact for the on. Replace the DEL input chip.
input failed closed.
121
DF I/O Failed Off The DF input or output has failed • Traction

off. • Fault on 1028 Safety Processor
can disable the run control to the DF
output chip. Check if the PIC or PAL
inhibit LED turns on when the car
attempts to run. Check the elevator
service, faults, and inputs/outputs on
the Safety Processor Board LCD dis-
play.
• Faulty DF/B0 output. Replace the
DF/B0 output chip.
• Faulty DFi/B0i input. Replace DFi/
B0i input chip.
• No 24VDC from the drive. Verify
the 24VDC between terminals 10
and 12 on the drive.
• Incorrect jumper placement on 1038
or 1064 board. Verify that jumpers
on the bottom center of the board are
positioned for the correct drive type
(DSD or HPV). If necessary move
the jumpers to the correct drive type.
• RUN, MC or BRK auxiliary contact
not making properly. Contact GAL
for instructions.
• Hydro
SDF output chip. Check if the PIC or
PAL inhibit LED turns on when the
car attempts to run. Check the ele-
vator service, faults, and inputs/out-
puts on the Safety Processor Board
LCD display.
• Faulty wiring to the SC common on
the 1039 board.
• Faulty wiring to the SDF terminal on
the 1039 board.
• Faulty wiring to the Down Fast
valve.
• Faulty SDFi input (replace input
chip).
• Faulty SDF output (replace output
chip). 122
DF I/O Failed On The DF input or output has failed • Traction

on. • Faulty DF or B0 output. Replace the
DF or B0 output chip.
• Faulty DFi or B0i input. Replace
DFi or B0i input chip.
• Hydro
• Faulty SDFi input (replace input
chip).
• Faulty SDF output (replace output
chip).
DL & DL-1 Opposite Input failure on one of the down • Faulty DL or DL-1 input (replace
level sensor input input chip(s))
DL Failed On Fault DL Failed On Fault. The DL • DL hall effect sensor bad on selector
leveling sensor did not turn off sensor board. Replace sensor board.
during a run. • DL Output Driver failed on. Replace
output on selector driver board.
• DL traveling cable wire is shorted to
120 VAC. Remove input wire to
1038, 1064 or 1039 board and verify
that LED goes out. Correct short
condition.
• DL inputs failed on. Short on 1038,
1064 or 1039 main I/O board.
Replace main I/O board.
DLB and DLB-1 Input failure on one of the Door • Faulty DLB or DLB-1 input (replace
Opposite Lock Bottom (DLB) inputs. input chip).
DLM and DLM-1 Input failure on one of the Door • Faulty DLM or DLM-1 input
Opposite Lock Middle (DLM) inputs. (replace input chip).
DLT and DLT-1 Input failure on one of the Door • Faulty DLT or DLT-1 input (replace
Opposite Lock Top (DLT) inputs. input chip).
123
DNR I/O Failed Off The DNR input or output has • Traction
failed off. • Fault on 1028 Safety Processor
DNR output chip. Check if the PIC
or PAL inhibit LED turns on when
the car attempts to run. Check the
elevator service, faults, and inputs/
outputs on the Safety Processor
Board LCD display.
• Faulty DNR output. Replace the
DNR output chip.
• Faulty DNRi input. Replace DNRi
input chip.
for instructions.
• Hydro
the 1039 board.
• Faulty wiring to the SD terminal on
the 1039 board.
• Faulty wiring to the Down valve.
• Faulty SDi input (replace input
chip).
• Faulty SD output (replace output
chip).
124
DNR I/O Failed On The DNR input or output has • Traction

failed on. • Faulty DNR output. Replace the
DNR output chip.
• Faulty DNRi input. Replace DNRi
input chip.
• Hydro
chip).
chip).
DON I/O Failed Off The DON input or the drive run • Loss of voltage on terminal CS.
relay contact has failed off. The • MC contact in series with the drive
run relay on the drive turns on run relay opened.
the DON input (Drive ON) • The drive faulted on start and
indicating that the regulator is dropped the run relay. Check the
released and the drive is drive fault log.
controlling the motor. • Faulty run relay on the drive.
• Faulty DON input on the controller.
Replace the DON input chip.
• The run relay in the drive is not pro-
grammed properly. Check the
default drive setup for the Configure
C0 parameters.
DON I/O Failed On The DON input or the drive • Faulty run relay on the drive.
output has failed on. When the • Faulty DON input on the controller.
drive is turned off, the run relay Replace the DON input chip.
on the drive will drop out turning • The run relay in the drive is not pro-
off DON. grammed properly. Check the
default drive setup for the Configure
C0 parameters.
125
Door Close Fault The door did not reach the Door • Door Close Limit (DCL) not
Close Limit within the door close adjusted properly.
protection time. • Faulty Door Close Limit (DCL).
Replace DCL input chip.
• Trash in door track preventing door
from closing.
Door Open Fault The door did not reach the Door • Door Open Limit (DOL) not
Open Limit within the door open adjusted properly.
protection time. • Faulty Door Open Limit (DOL).
Replace DOL input chip.
Door Zone Aux Off Fault The auxiliary door zone input • DZA output on selector board did
failed off. not turn on. (Replace DZA output on
selector driver board).
• One or both of the DZA sensors on
the selector sensor board failed.
Replace selector sensor board.
• DZA input on the 1040 board failed.
Replace DZA input on 1037/1040
board.
Door Zone Aux On Flt The auxiliary door zone input • DZA output on selector board failed
failed on. on. (Replace DZA output on selec-
tor driver board).
• One or both of the DZA sensors on
the selector sensor board failed.
Replace selector sensor board.
• DZA input on the 1037/1040 board
failed. Replace DZA input on 1037/
1040 board.
Door Zone Fault Door Zone Fault occurs from the • The car does not have DZ when it is
following conditions: expected to be level at the floor.
The car is not on UL or DL when • DZ output on selector board failed
expected. on or did not turn on. (Replace DZ
The car does not have DZ when output on selector driver board).
expected. • One or both of the DZ sensors on the
The DZ relay does not drop out selector sensor board failed. Replace
while in motion. selector sensor board.
• DZ input on 1038 or 1064 board
failed on or off. Replace DZ input
on 1038 or 1064 board.
126
Door Zone Off Fault The door zone input failed off. • DZ output on selector board did not
turn on. (Replace DZ output on
• One or both of the DZ sensors on the
selector sensor board failed. Replace
selector sensor board.
• DZ input on the 1040 board failed.
Replace DZ input on 1037/1040
board.
Down Directional Fault Car unexpectedly hit the Down • Faulty wiring for the DN limit.
Normal Limit while running • The power common to the limit
down. switches (CS) was lost. Check
safety string prior to the CS termi-
nal.
DPM Input Fault The DPM input fault occurs • DPM switch not setup properly on
when door opens and the DPM the door operator.
input did not go off. • Faulty DPM input. Replace DPM
input chip.
DPM Off/GS or DL On DPM Off with Gate Switch or • The DPM switch on the door opera-
Door Lock On. The Door tor is not setup properly.
Protection Module input must go • There is no DPM input on the door
on before gate switch or door operator. Jump the DPM input to the
lock inputs go on. GS-1 terminal.
• Fault DPM input. Replace the DPM
input chip.
Drive Com 8259 Error Drive Communications 8259 • Hardware failure on the CPU board
Error. This error is used to detect or 1036 board. If this error occurs,
a hardware failure on the contact G.A.L.
controller communications port
to the drive.
127
Drive Com Error Drive Communication Error. • Faulty communications cable con-
The controller and drive are not nection. Check the drive twisted
communicating. pairs connected from the drive to the
1036 board.
• Noise on the communication cable.
Verify that the shield on the commu-
nications cable to the drive is con-
nected to earth ground on one end.
• Faulty communication chip.
Replace the 75176 driver chips on
the 1036 board.
Drive Com Int Error Drive Communications Interrupt • Hardware failure on the CPU board
Enable Error. This error is used or 1036 board. If this error occurs,
to detect a hardware failure on contact G.A.L.
the controller communications
port to the drive.
Drive Com Rcv Error Controller has a communication • Faulty communications cable con-
error with drive. The controller nection. Check the drive twisted
has not received a valid message pairs connected from the drive to the
from the drive for more than one 1036 board.
second. • Noise on the communication cable.
the 1036 board.
Drive Com Trm Error Drive Communications Transmit • Hardware failure on the CPU board
Error. This error is used to detect or 1036 board. If this error occurs,
a hardware failure on the contact G.A.L.
controller communications port
to the drive.
Drive Com Tx Stop Er Drive Communications Transmit • Missing jumper on J7 of the 1036
Stop Error. This error is used to board (COM1 IRQ6). Install the
detect a hardware failure on the jumper.
controller communications port • Hardware failure on the CPU board
to the drive. or 1036 board. If this error occurs
and the jumper J7 is in place, contact
G.A.L.
128
Drive Com TxEmpty Er Drive Communications Transmit • Hardware failure on the CPU board
Empty Error. This error is used or 1036 board. If this error occurs,
to detect a hardware failure on contact G.A.L.
the controller communications
port to the drive
Drive has Com Error Drive has a communications • Faulty communications cable con-
error. The controller has nection. Check the drive twisted
received a message from the pairs connected from the drive to the
drive that it has communication 1036 board.
receive errors. • Noise on the communication cable.
the 1036 board.
Drive Ready Fault The drive has a fault • The drive has or had a fault. Check
the drive fault log.
• Faulty RDY input. (Replace the
RDY input).
129
DT Count Fault The verification position count • The car was lost due to a preset
for the DT input switch was off error. Check the guides on the selec-
by more than 10 inches when the tor. Check the fault log for binary
switch was activated. preset errors.
• The controller has a faulty encoder
signal for the pulse count. Check
that the car can make long runs with-
out overshooting the floor or stop-
ping short of the floor.
• The power common to the limit
switches (CS) was lost. Check
nal.
• Incorrect counting of pulse counts.
Check encoder connection to motor
and encoder wiring.
• Hoistway not learned properly. Per-
form a hoistway learn procedure.
• DT switch not adjusted properly.
Check at slow speed if switch is
breaking, making and then braking
again. Switch needs to be closer to
the cam.
DT Fail On Fault DT input Failed On Fault. The • The DTS switch is not wired or the
car was at the bottom floor and DTS switch is not used. If the DTS
the DTS input was low true (DTS switch is not used, jump the DT and
switch made) but the DT input DTS inputs together.
was high (DT not made). • The DT did not break at the bottom
terminal landing. Adjust or replace
the DT switch.
• Faulty DT input. Replace the DT
input chip.
130
DT1 Count Fault The verification position count • The car was lost due to a preset
for the DT1 input switch was off error. Check the guides on the selec-
nal.
and encoder wiring.
• DT1 switch not adjusted properly.
the cam.
131
nal.
and encoder wiring.
form a Hoistway learn procedure.
breaking, making and then breaking
the cam.
132
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
133
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
134
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
135
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
136
DTS Count Fault Down Terminal Slowdown Limit • The car was lost due to a preset
Count Fault. The verification error. Check the guides on the selec-
position count for the DTS input tor. Check the fault log for binary
switch was off by more than 10 preset errors.
inches when the switch was • The controller has a faulty encoder
activated. signal for the pulse count. Check
nal.
and encoder wiring.
• DTS switch not adjusted properly.
the cam.
DTS Failed On Fault DTS input Failed On Fault. The • The DT switch is not wired or DT
car was at the bottom floor and input was lost.
the DT input was low true (DT • The DTS did not break at the bottom
switch made) but the DTS input terminal landing. Adjust or replace
was high (DTS not made). the DTS switch.
• Faulty DTS input. Replace the DTS
input chip.
EBAi Input Off Fault Emergency brake test contacts in • Possible bad N/C contact on BA1 or
BA1, BA2 failed off BA2 relays
• Check wiring on emergency brake
• Replace EBAi input on expansion I/
O board
EBAi Input On Fault Emergency brake test contacts in • Make sure BA1 and BA2 relays are
BA1, BA2 failed on being cycled
• Replace EBAi input on expansion I/
O board
137
EBBi Input Off Fault Emergency brake test contacts in • • Possible BBd NC contact on BB1
BB1,BB2 failed off or BB2 relays
• Check wiring on emergency brake
relays
• Replace EBBi input on expansion i/o
board
EBBi Input On Fault Emergency brake test contacts in • Make sure BB1 and BB2 relays are
BB1,BB2 failed on being cycled
• Replace EBBi input on expansion i/o
board
EE Ram Fault EE Ram (Flash Memory) Fault. • Call factory to verify memory size
Valid flash memory is not found on 1036 board. Replace memory
or memory chip is not large chip with larger size.
enough • Faulty 1036 board. Replace 1036
board
EM Brake Input OFF After the controller turn on the • Improper wiring of the brake
output EBKC, EBKi never came EBRKC coil. Refer to prints for
on wire connections.
• Faulty EBKi input. Replace EBKi
input chip on i/o board.
• Faulty EBKC output. Replace
EBKC output chip on i/o board
EM Brake Input ON The EBKi input or EBKC output • Improper wiring of the brake Emer-
has failed on. gency Brake coil. Refer to prints for
wire connections.
• Faulty EBKi input. Replace EBKi
• Faulty EBKC output. Replace
EBKC output chip on i/o board.
EM Brake Switch OFF Emergency brake switch EBKS • Improper wiring of Emergency
failed off once the car stopped brake switch.
• Faulty EBKS input. Replace EBKS
EM Brake Switch ON Emergency brake switch EBKS • Improper wiring of Emergency

failed on once the car stopped brake switch.
• Faulty EBKS input. Replace EBKS
• Check adjustment of Emergency
brake switch.
138
Emergency Exit Flt An emergency stop occurred • The Safety string opened while the
while moving. car was running. Check the safety
circuit.
• The LC input is off. Check the LC
fuse. If the LC fuse is blown check
for short from LC to GND.
• The car was placed on inspection
while the car was moving. Check
for faulty or loose wiring in the
inspection circuit.
Encoder Count Error Encoder Count Error. An error is • Faulty encoder connection. Verify
announced when the encoder the encoder connection to the 1022
count value is greater than 4 encoder isolation board.
inches in 3 milliseconds. • Faulty 4I30 encoder board. Replace
the 4I30 board.
• Faulty 1022 encoder isolation board.
Replace the encoder isolation board.
• Bus address problem on the PC/104
bus. Contact GAL regarding this
fault.
EP Recall Car 1 OTS Emergency Power Recall Car • Car 1 was out of service while eleva-
Out of Service Car 1 tors were in an Emergency Power
Recall Sequence
• Check faults for car 1
Recall Sequence
Recall Sequence
Recall Sequence
139
Recall Sequence
Recall Sequence
Recall Sequence
Recall Sequence
EPRecall Car1 Tim-ot Emergency Power Recall Time- • Car 1 time-out while it was in Emer-
out Car 1 gency power recall mode
• Make sure the field variable “Recall
Timeout" is set properly to allow the
car enough time to recover if it is
between floors and away from
Emergency Power Floor
• If you have a blank shaft, consider
increasing the Recovery Speed
(default 25fpm)
• Make sure the field variable "Recall
(default 25fpm)
140
(default 25fpm)
(default 25fpm)
(default 25fpm)
(default 25fpm)
141
(default 25fpm)
(default 25fpm)
142
Estop Fault An emergency stop occurred • The “P” input did not drop from
while moving or attempting to MC, BRK or RUN contactors being
move. energized.
• The drive on (DON) input did not
energize or dropped out while run-
ning.
• The BRK contactor did not energize
or dropped out while running.
• BRKI input did not turn on or
dropped out while running.
• The DEL contactor did not energize
or dropped out while running
• The DEL input did not turn on or
dropped out while running.
• The stop switch was pulled while
running.
• The car was not safe usually from
clipping a door lock. See Car Safe
Fault.
• The stall protection timer timed-out.
• (Hydro only) An emergency power
recall was initiated while the car was
running up.
• The pulse count stopped counting.
Field Vars Dflt Init Field Variables Default • Job related parameters are invalid.
Initialization. Field adjustable This error occurs on the first time the
variables are being initialized for 1036 board is being powered up.
the first time.
Field Vars Relocated Field Variables Relocated. In • The software has been updated to a
software version 5.08 the version 5.08 or higher from a previ-
adjustable field variables were ous version. This is normal and
relocated to a new location in should only occur once. If an older
flash memory to allow for version software (earlier than 5.08)
additional future field variables. is later installed, the job parameters
may be lost.
Fire Fighter Stop Sw. Fire Fighter Stop switch is pulled • Fire Fighter Stop switch is pulled.
while the car is in motion. • Faulty wire connection in the Fire
Fighter stop switch circuit.
143
FST I/O Failed OFF The FST input on the 1038 or • Faulty FST output chip. Replace
1064 board did not pick up when output chip.
expected. • Faulty FSTI input chip. Replace
input chip.
FST I/O Failed ON The FST input on the 1038 or • Faulty FST output chip. Replace
1064 board did not drop out output chip.
when expected. • Faulty FSTI input chip. Replace
input chip.
FSTP I/O Failed OFF The FSTP input on the 1038 or • Faulty FST1 output chip. Replace
1064 board did not pick up when output chip.
expected. • Faulty FSTI input chip. Replace
input chip.
FSTP I/O Failed ON The FSTP input on the 1038 or • Faulty FST1 output chip. Replace
1064 board did not drop out up output chip.
when expected. • Faulty FSTI input chip. Replace
input chip.
Gate Switch Fault The Gate Switch failed on while • Gate switch not adjusted properly.
the door was open. • GS input failed on. Replace GS
input on 1039 board.
Gate/Lock Bypass Switch The gate or lock bypass switch • Gate or Lock bypass switch on the
Fault was on while the car was NOT controller 1038 or 1064 board is in
on car top inspection. the on position.
• Gate or Lock bypass input failed on.
Replace GBP OR LBP input chip on
1038 or 1064 board.
Governor Switch Flt Governor Switch Tripped. • Verify that the governor switch is set
properly.
• Verify that the drive is setup prop-
erly and that the car does not over-
speed.
Gripper Did Not Pick The rope gripper did not pick • Faulty wiring to the rope gripper.
Fault when the GR1 and GR2 relays • Faulty GTS switch on rope gripper.
were energized. Make sure that the switch opens and
closes properly when the gripper is
energized and dropped.
• Faulty GTS input. Replace the GTS
input chip.
144
Gripper Trip Fault An overspeed or uncontrolled • Check if the governor has tripped
motion caused the rope gripper to from.
trip. • Make sure that the brake can hold
the car.
Group Comm Loss Car 2 is not communicating with • Faulty wiring from TX+/TX- from
Car 1. car to car.
• Faulty 75176 driver chip on the 1036
Comm/Memory board (next to the
connector for the group comm).
only on one end.
Grp Comm Config Err Group Comm configuration • There is a device trying to get initial-
error. ized that should not be on the bus
• Check detailed fault data for "dev"
to identify board address
GRT1 Input Off Fault While testing the rope gripper • Faulty GR1R or GR2R relays.
relays, the contacts for GR1R or Replace both GR1R and GR2R
GR2R did not close or the GRT1 relays.
input failed off. • Faulty GRT1 input. Replace the
GRT1 input chip.
GRT1 Input On Fault While testing the rope gripper • Faulty GR1R or GR2R relays.
relays, the contacts for GR1R or Replace both GR1R and GR2R
GR2R did not open or the GRT1 relays.
input failed on. • Faulty GRT1 input. Replace the
GRT1 input chip.
GRT2 Input Off Fault While in a door zone the DZ and • Faulty DZ or DZ1 relays. Replace
DZ1 contacts used in the rope both DZ and DZ1 relays.
gripper circuit were not closed or • Faulty GRT2 input. Replace the
the GRT2 input failed off. GRT2 input chip.
• Faulty LE or LE1 outputs. When a
DZ input is on from the selector DZ
output, LE and LE1 outputs control
the DZ and DZ1 relays respectively.
Replace the LE and LE1 output
chips.
145
GRT2 Input On Fault The DZ and DZ1 contacts used • Faulty DZ or DZ1 relays. Replace
in the rope gripper circuit did not both DZ and DZ1 relays.
open during a run or the GRT2 • Faulty GRT2 input. Replace the
input failed on. GRT2 input chip.
• Faulty LE or LE1 outputs. When a
DZ input is on from the selector DZ
output, LE and LE1 outputs control
the DZ and DZ1 relays respectively.
Replace the LE and LE1 output
chips.
GS and GS-1 Opposite Input failure on one of the Gate • GS or GS-1 input failed on. Replace
Switch (GS) inputs. GS or GS-1 input chip. Check status
of input from Input and Output menu
on the LCD interface.
GTS Input Off Fault Emergency Brake: GTS input • Check wiring for emergency brake.
did not turn on while doing the • Check emergency brake relays dur-
safety check for PFC and SFC ing safety check
• Faulty GTS input chip. Replace
relays.
input chip.
GTS Input On Fault Emergency Brake: GTS input • Check wiring for emergency brake.
did not turn off while doing the • Check emergency brake relays dur-
safety check for PFC and SFC ing safety check
• Faulty GTS input chip. Replace
relays.
input chip.
Hall Call Light Fuse Hall Call Light Fuse Blown • Check for short on the Hall Call
Light circuit.
HC Com Device Reset Serial Hall Call board reset • Usually caused by loss of power to
unexpectedly. This is usually the individual board.
caused by loss of power to the • Faulty power connection to board.
individual board. • Fault hall call board.
146
HC DrvBd Rx from Bot Not receiving packets from the • Cable is bad or disconnected
bottom station • Cables going to wrong port (ie,
switched TO ABOVE and TO
BELOW)
• Transmitter from device above or
below is bad, check faults for that
device.
• Receiver on board is bad – replace
device
HC DrvBd Tx to Bot Can't internally read information • Cable connecting two devices could
from Transmitter to bottom sta- be flip-flopped (ie, gray wire goes
tion from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the
other end). Disconnect cable, and if
fault changes to Rx Fault, the prob-
lem is the cable.
• Cables going to wrong port (ie,
BELOW)
• Transmitter is bad – replace the
Device.
HC DvrBd Rx from Top Not receiving packets from the • Cable is bad or disconnected
top station. • Cables going to wrong port (ie,
BELOW)
• Transmitter from device above or
below is bad, check faults for that
device.
• Receiver on board is bad – replace
device
HC DvrBd Too Few Dev Too Few stations detected based • Check configuration and number of
on configuration – will only trig- stations
ger if loop is closed (i.e. will not
trigger if device #5 is not func-
tioning, causing driver to estab-
lish communication with all but
one station.)
HC DvrBd TooMany Too Many stations detected • Check configuration and number of
Dev based on configuration. stations
147
HC DvrBd Tx to Top Can't internally read information • Cable connecting two devices could
from Transmitter to top station. be flip-flopped (ie, gray wire goes
from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the
lem is the cable.
BELOW)
• Transmitter is bad – replace the
Device.
HC Fuse Blown Fault The HC input is off. No power • Make sure that the hall call power
on HC. for each car is in phase. During a
power up for car 1 while car 2 is
powering the hall call power could
cause a momentary short if the hall
call power for each car is not in
phase.
• Short circuit in the hall call lighting
circuitry.
HCB Device Comm Loss The Driver does not see this • Comm faults above and below a
HCB device device – check wiring
• Board not powering up – check
24VAC and MCU on device
• Fuses blown on driver
HCB Device Reset The HCB has just comeback online • Fixed previous problem.
• There is a power/communication
problem, where the board is either
resetting (power) or temporarily los-
ing communication on both ports.
HCB Dn FET Open HCB fet open down • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB Dn FET Short HCB fet short down • Replace GALX-1054AN
148
HCB Dn LED Open HCB led open down • Make Sure there is a GALX-
1056AN attached to the proper con-
nector (Up LED always attached to
CN5, Down LED attached to CN5 if
only down call at that station (like
the top floor), otherwise attached via
ribbon at CN6.
• Replace GALX-1056AN for the
associated up or down call.
HCB Dn LED Short HCB led short down • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB FET Open Blue Dn HCB fet open blue down • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Open Blue Up HCB fet open blue up • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Open Grn Dn HCB fet open green down • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Open Grn Up HCB fet open green up • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Open Red Dn HCB fet open red down • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Open Red Up HCB fet short red up • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Short Blu Dn HCB fet short blue down • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Short Blu Up HCB fet short blue up • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Short Grn Dn HCB fet short green down • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Short Grn Up HCB fet short green up • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Short Red Dn HCB fet short red down • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB FET Short Red Up HCB fet short red up • Replace GALX-1054AN
149
HCB Invalid Floor HCB has invalid floor • This fault is only intended for inter-
nal use to identify floors that need to
be skipped in diagnostics. It should
never occur
HCB LED Open Blue Dn HCB led open blue down • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Open Blue Up HCB led open blue up • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Open Grn Dn HCB led open green down • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Open Grn Up HCB led open green up • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
150
HCB LED Open Red Dn HCB led open red down • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Open Red Up HCB led short red up • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Short Blu Dn HCB led short blue down • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Short Blu Up HCB led short blue up • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
151
HCB LED Short Grn Dn HCB led short green down • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Short Grn Up HCB led short green up • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Short Red Dn HCB led short red down • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB LED Short Red Up HCB led short red up • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB No Dn Led Board HCB No Down Led Board • HCB board could not detect an LED
Detected board
• Replace LED board (GALX-
1085AN)
152
HCB No Up Led Board HCB No Up Led Board Detected • HCB board could not detect an LED
board
• Replace LED board (GALX-
1085AN)
HCB Rx from above fl HCB rx fault up to above floor • Receiver on board is bad – replace
device
• Cable is bad or disconnected
switched to above and to below)
• Transmitter from device above is
bad.
HCB Rx from below fl HCB rx fault down from below • Receiver on board is bad – replace
floor device
• Cable is bad or disconnected
switched to above and to below)
• Transmitter from device below is
bad.
HCB Stuck Dn Button HCB stuck button down • Button is physically stuck – fix but-
ton
• Input is stuck on or shorted – replace
device
HCB Stuck Up Button HCB stuck button up • Button is physically stuck – fix but-
ton
• Input is stuck on or shorted – replace
device
HCB Tx to above fl Can't internally read information • Cable connecting two devices could
from Transmitter to device be flip-flopped (ie, gray wire goes
above from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the
lem is the cable.
• Transmitter is bad, Replace the
Device
153
HCB Tx to below fl Can't internally read information • Cable connecting two devices could
from Transmitter to device be flip-flopped (ie, gray wire goes
below from pin 1 on one end to pin 8 on the
lem is the cable.
• Transmitter is bad, Replace the
Device
HCB Up FET Open HCB fet open up • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB Up FET Short HCB fet short up • Replace GALX-1054AN
HCB Up LED Open HCB led open up • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
HCB Up LED Short HCB led short up • Make Sure there is a GALX-
ribbon at CN6.
Hoistway Default Init Hoistway Default Initialization. • Job related hoistway setup informa-
Hoistway values are being tion is invalid. This occurs on the
initialized for the first time. first time the 1036 board is being
powered up.
Hoistway Learn Fault Car is on automatic and the • Hoistway learn procedure needs to
hoistway has not been learned. be performed.
• Faulty ram-flash memory chip.
154
Hoistway Update Init Hoistway Update Initialization. • Job related hoistway setup informa-
Table of door zone positions for tion is invalid. This occurs on the
hoistway used to update position first time the 1036 board is being
count while traveling has been powered up.
initialized for the first time.
Inspection Input Fault More than one input is on in the • Faulty Top of Car inspection wiring.
inspection string. The inspection Verify voltage on CTA and ICA ter-
string condition is also shown on minals when car top inspection
the safety processor. switch is in the run position. Verify
INS input when switch in the inspec-
tion position.
• Verify that one and only one inspec-
tion string inputs is on: AUTO, MRI,
INS, ICI and ACC.
• Faulty inspection string input:
AUTO, MRI, INS, ICI or ACC.
Replace faulty input chip
Inspection Up/Dn Sw An up or down inspection run • Faulty inspection up or down input:

input was on when first entering IU, ID, MRIU, MRID, BAD, BAU,
into inspection operation. This TAD or TAU. Replace faulty input
caused from a faulty inspection chip.
up or down switch or from • Faulty inspection wiring keeping an
someone holding the up or down inspection up or down input on.
run button when placing the car • Placing the car on inspection while
on inspection. holding an up or down run button.
Invalid DN or DT Cnt Invalid DN or DT Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
position count for DN is greater hoistway.
than the count for DT • The hoistway has not been learned.
Learn the hoistway.
• If this problem is not corrected with
a hoistway learn, contact the factory
Invalid DT or DT1 Cnt Invalid DT or DT1 Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
position count for DT is greater hoistway.
than the count for DT1 • The hoistway has not been learned.
Learn the hoistway.
155
Invalid DT1 or DT2 Cnt Invalid DT1 or DT2 Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
position count for DT1 is greater hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
Invalid DZU or DZD Cnt Invalid DZU or DZD Count. If • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
the DZU count is greater than the hoistway.
floor position count or the DZD • The hoistway has not been learned.
count is less than the floor Learn the hoistway.
position count, then this error is • If this problem is not corrected with
declared. a hoistway learn, contact the factory
156
Invalid FL Offset Cnt Invalid Floor Offset Count. If • The offset starts out at zero and is
the offset count is greater than 3 modified by the adjuster. This value
inches. should never be greater than 3
inches.
• Encoder was changed from lower
resolution to higher resolution which
would cause the offset value to be
out of range. Correct the offset
value.
Invalid Floor Count Invalid Floor Count. The floor • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
count of the floor above must hoistway.
always be larger than the floor • The hoistway has not been learned.
below. An above floor count Learn the hoistway.
was lower than the floor below in • If this problem is not corrected with
the floor hoistway table a hoistway learn, contact the factory.
Invalid SEL Bot Cnt Invalid Selector Bottom Count. • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
(Tapeless selector) The bottom hoistway.
floor count is less then 4000. • The hoistway has not been learned.
The count is initialized at 5000. Learn the hoistway.
Invalid SEL Top Cnt Invalid Selector Top Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
top selector count – the bottom hoistway.
selector count is less than the • The hoistway has not been learned.
number of floors times 30. The Learn the hoistway.
count averaged less than 30 • If this problem is not corrected with
counts per floor. a hoistway learn, contact the factory
Invalid Top Fl Count Invalid Top Floor Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
top floor count is zero. hoistway.
• The hoistway has not been learned.
Learn the hoistway.
Invalid UT or UN Cnt Invalid UT or UN Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
position count for UT is greater hoistway.
than the count for UN • The hoistway has not been learned.
Learn the hoistway.
157
Invalid UT1 or UT Cnt Invalid UT1 or UT Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
position count for UT1 is greater hoistway.
than the count for UT • The hoistway has not been learned.
Learn the hoistway.
Invalid UT2 or UT1 Cnt Invalid UT2 or UT1 Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
than the count for UT1 • The hoistway has not been learned.
Learn the hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
Learn the hoistway.
158
Invlid Top Floor Cnt Invalid Top Floor Count. The • Invalid hoistway learn. Re-learn the
top floor count is zero. hoistway.
• The hoistway has not been learned.
Learn the hoistway.
LC Fuse Blown Fault The LC input is off. No power • Short from LC to GND.
on LC.
Learn HW Safe Fault Part of the safety string open • Check for possible faults on the
while in automatic learn hoist- safety processor or drive
way mode • Door locks, gate switch or contacts
open while in motion
Learn HW Stall Fault Car timed out while learning • Increase field variable "Hoistway
hoistway in auto Learn Stall Time" and try again
Level Stop Cnt Fault Leveling stop fault occurred • Floor offset value set too high
from incorrect count. As the car • Increase dead zone when the car is
was leveling off the pulses, UL configured to stop on the pulses
instead of just the magnet
or DL turned off.
• Ensure outer sensors are set no more
than 7.5" apart
Leveling Fault Leveling Fault. When the car • Brake is dropping too slowly.
attempted to drop the brake, the Adjust the drop of the brake.
car moved out of the dead level. • The drive is not holding zero speed.
The leveling fault count was Run the car on inspection at 5fpm
incremented. If this occurs more and while running change the
times than the adjustable variable inspection speed to zero. The car
“Level Fault Cnt” then this error should stop and hold zero.
is declared. • The response is not high enough on
the drive.
• Brake contactor is not dropping
properly.
159
Leveling Time-out Flt Leveling Time-out Fault • Car overshot floor and continue lev-
eling.
• Car targeted floor too soon and was
creeping to the floor in leveling.
• Check for causes of invalid pulse
counts or invalid floor positions
• Invalid floor position preset
• Faulty encoder connection
• Faulty encoder wiring
Low Pressure Fault Low Oil Pressure Fault. The low • Low oil in the tank.
oil pressure switch has been • Faulty LOS input if low oil switch
activated. option is being used. Replace the
LOS input chip.
• Faulty Low Oil Switch. If low oil
switch option is being used. Verify
the operation of the low oil switch.
Lowoil Switch Fault Low Oil Switch Fault. The low • Low oil in the hydraulic tank
oil switch became active • Faulty wiring to the low oil input
• Faulty low oil input. Replace LOS
input.
LW Calibration Error Load Weigher Calibration Error. • The load weigher device should be
The load weigher attempted to do re-calibrated according to the manu-
an automatic calibration and facturer’s instructions.
could not be calibrated.
MCA I/O Failed Off The MCA input or output has • Faulty MCAi input chip. Replace
failed off. input chip.
• Faulty MCA output chip. Replace
output chip.
MCA I/O Failed On The MCA input or output has • Faulty MCAi input chip. Replace
failed on. input chip.
• Faulty MCA output chip. Replace
output chip.
MCC I/O Failed Off The MCC input or output has • Faulty MCCi input chip. Replace
failed off. input chip.
• Faulty MCC output chip. Replace
output chip.
160
MCC I/O Failed On The MCC input or output has • Faulty MCCi input chip. Replace
failed on. input chip.
• Faulty MCC output chip. Replace
output chip.
Middle Door Lock Fault The Middle Door Lock failed on • Faulty door lock.
while the door was open. • Jumper on door lock circuit.
• Door lock not adjusted properly.
• Faulty wiring to DLM input.
• Faulty DLM and DLM-1 inputs (For
this to occur both DLM and DLM-1
input chip.
adjusted properly
NV Ram Fault NV Ram (Battery Backed) Fault. • Call factory to verify memory size
Valid battery backed ram on 1036 board. Replace memory
memory is not found or memory chip with larger size.
chip is not large enough • Faulty 1036 board. Replace 1036
board
Overspeed Fault Car overspeed fault. If the car • Encoder PPR incorrectly set. Set to
goes 15% over contract speed the match the Drive’s Encoder Pulses.
fault will be logged and the car • Encoder RPM incorrectly set. Set to
will do an emergency stop. match the Motor’s RPM.
• The drive is not controlling the hoist
machine motor. Check the response
setting on the drive.
P input off Fault The normally closed contacts on • Not enough current draw through all
MC, BRK or RUN contactors did three contacts. Place a 10K 3W
not drop. resistor from the normally closed
contact of RUN to GND.
• Faulty normally closed contacts on
MC, BK or RUN. Replace auxiliary
contacts.
P Input On Failure The “P” input did not drop out • Faulty contactor or auxiliary con-
while the car was running. This tacts on MC, BRK, or RUN.
input should drop out when MC, Replace auxiliary contacts or entire
BRK and Run contactors are contactor.
energized.
161
PC/104 Bus Error PC/104 Bus Error. During two • This error detects a hardware error
consecutive reads to the encoder on the PC/104 bus. Contact GAL
board the count value was regarding this error.
different.
PFC Relay Failed Off PFC relay did not pick up as • Faulty PFC output chip. Replace
expected. output chip.
• Faulty PFC relay on 1038 or 1064
I/O board. Replace PFC relay.
PFC Relay Failed On PFC relay did not drop as • Faulty PFC output chip. Replace
expected when performing a output chip.
SFC/PFC test. • Faulty PFC relay on 1038 or 1064
I/O board. Replace PFC relay.
PFC-SFC Test Lost DZ Lost DZ input when performing • DZ output on selector board did not
a SFC/PFC test. turn on. (Replace DZ output on
• One or both of the DZ sensors on the
selector sensor board failed. Replace
• DZ input on the 1040 board failed.
Replace DZ input on 1037/1040
board.
• Check leveling magnet.
Pit Door Switch Flt Pit Door Switch Open • Verify that the pit door switch is
closed.
• Faulty wiring on the pit door switch
circuit.
Pit Switch Fault Pit Switch Input Open • Verify that the pit switch is closed.
• Faulty wiring on the pit switch cir-
cuit.
162
Position Fault The Terminal limits do not match • Car is out of step from faulty selec-
the car position (UT or DT is hit tor inputs. Check that the DZ, UL
but the car position is not at the and DL selector inputs work prop-
top or bottom floor). erly at each floor.
• Car missed a slowdown input mag-
net. Check that the US and DS
selector inputs work properly prior
to each landing.
• UT or DT input lost from the safety
string being opened.
• Improper adjustment of UT or DT
limit switches.
Possible DRV/1028 Er The controller CPU lost the stop • View the faults on the Safety Proces-
switch input, but has the SS and sor board display and debug from
GTS inputs ON indicating that the fault code listed.
the drive or Safety Processor • View the drive faults log or led sta-
(1028) board has opened the tus and debug as directed from the
safety string. drive manual.
Power Up Reset Whenever power is cycled on the • This error code is normal for a
controller this error will indicate power loss. If power was not lost
that the controller CPU was and the CPU re-boots, verify the
reset. +5VDC on the CPU power connec-
tor reads in the range of 4.90 and 5.1
VDC. If out of range, adjust the
5VDC supply pot for the correct
voltage.
Pulse Er 75% Top Speed Pulse Error occurred while car is • This error occurs if the car loses its
running greater than 75% of pulse feedback from the encoder.
contract speed. The pulse counts Make sure that the encoder is not
have to change a minimum slipping. Check the encoder cable
distance by the time the car from the drive to the controller.
reaches 75% of top speed. Also check the ribbon cable from the
encoder isolation board (1022N) to
the encoder board (4I30) on the PC/
104 CPU stack.
• Possible faulty encoder isolation
board (1022N), faulty ribbon cable
or faulty encoder board (4I30).
163
Pulse Error > 75 fpm Pulse count shows a travel • Make sure that the encoder is not
distance less then 2 inches while slipping. Check the ribbon cable
the car demand velocity is from the encoder isolation board
greater than 75 fpm. (1022N) to the encoder board (4I30)
on the PC/104 CPU stack.
• Possible faulty encoder isolation
board (1022N), faulty ribbon cable
or faulty encoder board (4I30).
PWL UPS Comm Fault Power loss: Controller cannot • Check wiring and shielded pairs
establish comm to UPS • Defective comm board
• Possible bad UPS unit
PWL UPS Low Bat Flt Power loss: ups battery fault • UPS Battery voltage has dropped
below 18V
• Replace unit
PWL UPS Low Bat Volt Power loss: ups batter fault • Defective battery inside UPS unit
• Replace UPS
PWL UPS On Bat Power Power loss: ups on battery power • No Line voltage on UPS. Unit run-
ning on battery power
PWL UPS Turned Off Power loss: ups turned off • Power loss on UPS. Power has been
turned off
Rear Bottom Door Lock The Rear Bottom Door Lock • Faulty door lock.
Fault failed on while the door was • Jumper placed on door lock circuit.
open (door on the rear door open • Rear door lock not adjusted properly.
limit). • Faulty wiring to DLB input.
• Faulty DLB and DLB-1 inputs (For
this to occur both DLB and DLB-1
• DOLR input failed. Replace DOLR
input chip.
• Rear door operator open limit is not
adjusted properly
Rear Door Close Fault The rear door did not reach the • Rear Door Close Limit (DCLR) not
Rear Door Close Limit within the adjusted properly.
door close protection time. • Faulty Rear Door Close Limit
(DCLR). Replace DCRL input.
• Trash in door track preventing door
from closing.
164
Rear Door Open Fault The rear door did not reach the • Rear Door Open Limit (DOLR) not
Rear Door Open Limit within the adjusted properly.
door open protection time. • Faulty Rear Door Open Limit
(DOLR). Replace DOLR input.
Rear Gate Switch Fault The Rear Gate Switch failed on • Rear Gate switch not adjusted prop-
while the door was open. erly.
• RGS input failed on. Replace RGS
input.
Rear Middle Door Lock The Middle Door Lock failed on • Faulty door lock.
Fault while the door was open. • Jumper placed on door lock circuit.
• Rear door lock not adjusted properly.
• Faulty wiring to RLM input.
• Faulty RLM and RLM-1 inputs (For
this to occur both RLM and RLM-1
input chip.
adjusted properly
Rear Top Door Lock The Rear Top Door Lock failed • Faulty door lock.
Fault on while the door was open. • Jumper placed on door lock circuit.
• Rear door lock not adjusted properly.
• Faulty wiring to DLT input.
• Faulty DLT and DLT-1 inputs (For
this to occur both DLT and DLT-1
input chip.
adjusted properly
165
Reset Fault Anytime the system detects one • This fault is logged under normal
of the following faults a reset conditions. Check the fault log for
fault is logged: error that would indicate a fault con-
· . Power is cycled dition prior to the reset fault.
· Controller finds itself out
of the door zone.
· Binary input fault.
· Terminal limits do not
match the current
position.
· Car has been switched off
of inspection.
· After an open safety string
has been closed.
RGS and RGS-1 Input failure on one of the Rear • Faulty RGS or RGS-1 input.
Opposite Gate Switch (RGS) inputs. Replace input chip.
RLM and RLM-1 Input failure on one of the Rear • Faulty RLM or RLM-1 input.
Opposite Lock Middle (RLM) inputs. Replace input chip.
RPM Input Fault RPM Input Fault. The Rear • RPM switch not setup properly on
Door Protection input stayed on the door operator.
when the rear door reached full • Faulty RPM input. Replace RPM
open. input chip.
RPM Off/RGS or RDL RPM Off with Rear Gate Switch • The RPM switch on the door opera-
On or Door Lock On. The Rear tor is not setup properly.
Door Protection Module input • There is no RPM input on the door
must go on before rear gate operator. Jump the RPM input to the
switch or door lock inputs go on. RGS terminal.
• Faulty RPM input. Replace the RPM
input chip.
RUN 0/RUN I Failed RUN output failed off or run • Faulty RUNi input chip. Replace
input failed on input chip.
• Faulty RUN output chip. Replace
output chip.
166
Run Fault: Shutdown Run Fault: Shutdown. If the car • Verify that the brake is lifting prop-
attempts to run 4 consecutive erly.
times and incurs a specific type • Verify that the encoder pulses incre-
of emergency stop without ment and decrement when running
making a successful run, the car up or down.
is shutdown and this error code is
shown. The specific types of
emergency stops to cause this
fault are as follows:
1 The car has picked the brake
and is in the run mode for
more than 2 seconds and the
position pulse has not
changed.
2 The car is demanding a
velocity greater than 75 fpm
and change in position count
is less than 3 inches.
3 The run stall protection timer
has expired
RUN I/O Failed Off The RUN input or output has • Traction
failed off. • Faulty wiring to RN1 terminal.
• Faulty RUNi input. Replace the
RUNi input chip.
• Faulty RUN output. Replace the
RUN output chip.
• Hydro
• Faulty wiring at the SC terminal.
Verify that the valve common SC
terminal on the 1038 or 1064 board
is connected properly.
RUNi input chip.
RUN output chip.
167
RUN I/O Failed On The RUN input or output has • Traction

failed on. • Faulty wiring to RN1 terminal.
RUNi input chip.
RUN output chip.
• Hydro
RUNi input chip.
RUN output chip.
RUN, RUNA, DNR The RUN input or output, the • Hydro

Failure RUNA output or the DNR output • Faulty wiring at the SC terminal.
failed to turn on. Verify that the valve common SC
• Faulty wiring at the SD terminal.
Verify that the down valve is wired
to the SD terminal on the 1038 or
1064 board.
chip).
chip).
RUNi input chip.
RUN output chip.
168
RUN, RUNA, UP Failure The RUN input or output, the • Hydro

RUNA output or the UP output • Faulty wiring at the SC terminal.
failed to run on. Verify that the valve common SC
• Faulty wiring at the SU terminal.
Verify that the down valve is wired
to the SU terminal on the 1038 or
1064 board.
• Faulty SUi input (replace input
chip).
• Faulty SU output (replace output
chip).
RUNi input chip.
RUN output chip.
169
RUNA I/O Failed Off The RUNA input or output has • Traction
RUNA output chip. Check if the PIC
or PAL inhibit LEDs are on or if
they turn on when the car attempts to
run. Check the elevator service,
faults, and inputs/outputs on the
Safety Processor Board LCD dis-
play.
• Faulty RUNAi input. Replace the
RUNAi input chip.
• Faulty RUNA output. Replace the
RUNA output chip.
• Hydro
• Faulty RUNAi input. Replace
RUNAi input chip.
• Faulty RUNA output. Replace
RUNA output chip.
• Faulty RUN output. Replace RUN
output chip.
RUNA I/O Failed On The RUNA input or output has • Traction

failed on. • Faulty RUNAi input. Replace the
RUNAi input chip.
• Faulty RUNA output. Replace the
RUNA output chip.
• Hydro
• Faulty RUN output. Replace RUN
output chip.
• Faulty RUNAi input. Replace
RUNAi input chip.
• Faulty RUNA output. Replace
RUNA output chip.
170
RUNA O/RUN I Failed RUNA output or RUNI input • RUNA output failed off. Replace
failed. the RUNA output. Or
• RUNI input failed off. Replace the
RUNI input.
Safety String Fault Safety string fault occurs from • The safety string is open (SS input if
the following conditions: off). Refer to the job prints and
• The safety string is open (SS check all circuits ahead of the SS
input is off). input.
• The drive ready input is not
energized from the drive.
• The potential to run input “P”
is off.
SEB CAN Com Error Serial Expansion Board CAN • From the LCD user interface, select
Communications Error. One of the Diagnostic menu and then the
the Serial Expansion boards is Car Com Status menu. The device
not communicating with the that is not communicating will be
main CPU. shown with the online status equal 0.
Check the terminal connection for
the twisted pair wires.
SEL CAN Com Error Top of car selector board • From the LCD user interface, select
communication error. the Diagnostic menu and then the
Car Com Status menu. If the selector
board is not communicating it will
show with the online status equal to
0.
• Check the terminal connection for
the twisted pair wires. Verify that
CANH and CANL on the selector
board are wired to CANH and
CANL to the top of car board
respectively.
Selector Count Fault Selector Count Fault. If the • The governor encoder has lost bat-
hoistway has been learned and tery power.
the selector count init flag • The encoder was disconnected from
(tapeless selector) is not set then the governor.
this error is declared. • Faulty encoder connection to the
governor
• Loss of communications from the
Safety Processor Board to the
encoder.
171
SFC Relay Failed Off SFC relay did not pick up as • Faulty SFC output chip. Replace
expected. output chip.
• Faulty SFC relay on 1038 or 1064
I/O board. Replace SFC relay.
• Verify the software version on the
safety processor board (1028/1066)
is 3.07 or higher.
SFC Relay Failed On SFC relay did not drop as • Faulty SFC output chip. Replace
expected when performing a output chip.
SFC/PFC test. • Faulty SFC relay on 1038 or 1064
I/O board. Replace SFC relay.
• Verify the software version on the
safety processor board (1028/1066)
is 3.07 or higher.
Side Emerg. Exit Flt Side Emergency Exit Fault • Verify that the side emergency exit is
properly shut and the switch is
closed.
• Faulty wiring in the side emergency
exit circuit.
SPB CAN Com Error Safety Processor Board CAN • Check the terminal connection for
Communications Error. The the twisted pair wires.
Safety Processor Board is not • Verify that the bus termination
communicating to the main CPU. jumper is placed on the 1028 Safety
Processor Board.
• Verify that the bus termination
jumper is place on the 1036 Comm/
Memory board.
• Disconnect the CAN wires to the
traveling cable. If the 1028 SPB
starts communicating, verify that the
bus termination jumper is placed on
the TOC board (1037 or 1040).
Replace the traveling cable CAN
wires.
172
SPB SFC Off Fault Safety Processor Board SFC • Check faults in safety processor
fault. CPU detected SFC (Sec- board
ondary Fault Controller) turn off • Replace SFC (EQR) input chip
• If no voltage at SFC terminal and no
while the ready input (RDY) was
faults in safety processor, replace
still on
output chip for SFC on the main i/o
board
SPB Unintend Motion Safety Processor Board unin- • Safety processor detected unin-
tended motion tended motion of elevator with the
doors open
Stalled Fault Stall Fault occurs if the motion • Low oil.

run timer exceeds the stall • Improper valve adjustment.
protection time. The motion run
timer is incremented while the
car is trying to run.
Stop Switch Fault Stop switch is pulled while the • Stop switch is pulled.
car is in motion. • Faulty wire connection in the stop
switch circuit.
Target Fault at DT When going down, the target • This fault should never occur. Please
count should always be below call the factory if this fault occurs.
the position count. This fault is
logged if the target count is
above the position count when
the DT slowdown limit is hit.
Target Fault at DT1 This fault is logged if the target • This fault should never occur. Please
count is above the position count call the factory if this fault occurs.
when the DT1 slowdown limit is
hit
hit.
hit.
173
hit.
hit.
hit.
Target Fault at DTS This fault is logged if the target • This fault should never occur. Please
when the DTS slowdown limit is
hit.
Target Fault at UT When going up, the target count • This fault should never occur. Please
should always be above the call the factory if this fault occurs.
position count. This fault is
logged if the target count is
below the position count when
the UT slowdown limit is hit.
Target Fault at UT1 This fault is logged if the target • This fault should never occur. Please
count is below the position count call the factory if this fault occurs.
when the UT1 slowdown limit is
hit.
hit.
hit.
174
hit.
hit.
hit.
Target Fault at UTS This fault is logged if the target • This fault should never occur. Please
when the UTS slowdown limit is
hit.
TOC CAN Com Error Top of Car Board • Fault CAN wire connection. Verify
Communication Error. the traveling cable connections from
the 1036 Comm/Memory board, to
the 1028/1066 Safety Processor
board and to the TOC board (1037 or
1040).
• Jumper for bus termination resistors
not placed. Verify that the bus ter-
mination resistor jumpers are placed
on the TOC (1037 or 1040), on the
1036 Comm/Memory Board, and on
the 1028 Safety Processor Board.
• Noise on the communication cable.
Verify that the traveling cable shield
wires are connected only at one end
or is not connected at all.
• Faulty communication chip. Replace
the CAN bus drive chip 82C251.
• Faulty 5V isolated supply for CAN
driver on TOC board (1037 or 1040).
Measure DC voltage between pins 2
and 3 on the 82C251 CAN driver
chip. Call GAL for instructions.
175
Top Door Lock Fault The Top Door Lock failed on • Faulty door lock.
while the door was open. • Jumper on door lock circuit.
• Door lock not adjusted properly.
• Faulty wiring to DLT input.
• Faulty DLT and DLT-1 inputs (For
this to occur both DLT and DLT-1
input chip.
adjusted properly
Top Emerg. Exit Flt Top Emergency Exit Fault • Verify that the top emergency exit is
properly shut and the switch is
closed.
• Faulty wiring in the top emergency
exit circuit.
Top Final Limit Flt Top Final Limit Open. • Car traveled onto the top final limit.
• Faulty wiring of the final limit cir-
cuit.
UL & UL-1 Opposite Input failure on one of the Up • Faulty UL or UL-1 input (replace
Level sensor input input chips)
UL Failed On Fault UL Failed On Fault. The UL • UL hall effect sensor bad on selector
leveling sensor did not go off sensor board. Replace sensor board.
during a run. • UL Output Driver failed on. Replace
output on selector driver board.
• UL traveling cable wire is shorted to
120 VAC. Remove input wire to
1038, 1064 or 1039 board and verify
that LED goes out. Correct short
condition.
• UL inputs failed on. Short on 1038,
1064 or 1039 main I/O board.
Replace main I/O board.
176
UL or DL Fault Both UL and DL level sensors • Faulty adjustment of the selector

are off when car is at a floor. head.
• Worn selector guides. Replace
selector guides.
• Faulty Door Zone Magnet. If this
fault occurs at one particular floor,
replace the door zone magnet at the
floor.
• Faulty sensor board. Replace the
UL, DL & DZ Off at FL UL, DL & DZ sensors off at • Loss of power on the selector.
floor. The car thinks it should be • Faulty cable from the selector driver
at a floor or is at a floor and all board to the sensor or sensor board.
the floor sensors have turned off. • Faulty wiring from the selector
driver board to the main I/O board
(1038, 1064 or 1039).
UL,DL Learn Cnt Flt Pulses per inch are incorrect • Dead Zone was estimated to be
from the Encoder RPM/ PPR set- greater than eight inches
tings • Make sure the car is running at cor-
rect speed before learning the hoist-
way
• The recommended distance between
UL and DL sensors in tapeless sys-
tem is 7.5 inches if the controller is
configured to stop on pulses
Up Directional Fault Car unexpectedly hit the Up • Faulty wiring for the UN limit.
Normal Limit while running up. • The power common to the limit
nal.
177
UP I/O Failed Off The UP input or output has failed • Traction

off. • Fault on 1028 Safety Processor
can disable the run control to the UP
output chip. Check if the PIC or PAL
inhibit LED turns on when the car
attempts to run. Check the elevator
service, faults, and inputs/outputs on
the Safety Processor Board LCD dis-
play.
• Faulty UP output. Replace the UP
output chip.
• Faulty UPi input. Replace UPi input
chip.
• RUN or MC auxiliary contact not
making properly. Contact GAL for
instructions.
• Hydro
the 1038 or 1064 board.
• Faulty wiring to the SU terminal on
• Faulty wiring to the Up valve.
• Faulty SUi input. Replace SUi input
chip.
• Faulty SU output. Replace SU out-
put chip).
178
UP I/O Failed On The UP input or output has failed • Traction

on. • Faulty UP output. Replace the UP
output chip.
• Faulty UPi input. Replace UPi input
chip.
• Hydro
• Faulty SUi input. Replace SUi, input
chip.
• Faulty SU output. Replace SU out-
put chip.
179
UPF I/O Failed Off The UPF input or output has • Traction
UPF/B1 output chip. Check if the
PIC or PAL inhibit LED turns on
when the car attempts to run. Check
the elevator service, faults, and
inputs/outputs on the Safety Proces-
sor Board LCD display.
• Faulty UPF/B1 output. Replace the
UPF/B1 output chip.
• Faulty UPFi/B1i input. Replace
UPFi/B1i input chip.
for instructions
• Hydro
UPF output chip. Check if the PIC or
PAL inhibit LED turns on when the
car attempts to run. Check the ele-
vator service, faults, and inputs/out-
puts on the Safety Processor Board
LCD display.
• Faulty wiring to the SUF terminal on
• Faulty wiring to the Up Fast valve.
• Faulty SUFi input. Replace SUFi
input chip.
• Faulty SUF output. Replace SUF
output chip.
180
UPF I/O Failed On The UPF input or output has • Traction

failed on. • Faulty UPF/B1 output. Replace the
UPF/B1 output chip.
• Faulty UPFi/B1i input. Replace
UPFi/B1i input chip.
• Hydro
• Faulty SUFi input. Replace SUFi
input chip.
• Faulty SUF output. Replace SUF
output chip.
UT Count Fault The verification position count • The car was lost due to a preset
for the UT input switch was off error. Check the guides on the selec-
switch was activated. The car preset errors.
was lost due to a preset error or • The controller has a faulty encoder
the controller has a faulty signal for the pulse count. Check
encoder signal for the pulse that the car can make long runs with-
count. out overshooting the floor or stop-
nal.
and encoder wiring.
• UT switch not adjusted properly.
the cam.
181
UT Fail On Fault UT input Failed On Fault. The • The UTS switch is not wired or the
car was at the top floor and the UTS switch is not used. If the UTS
UTS input was low true (UTS switch is not used, jump the UT and
switch made) but the UT input UTS inputs together.
was high (UT not made). • The UT did not break at the bottom
terminal landing. Adjust or replace
the UT switch.
UT1 Count Fault The verification position count • The car was lost due to a preset
for the UT1 input switch was off error. Check the guides on the selec-
nal.
and encoder wiring.
• UT1 switch not adjusted properly.
the cam.
182
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
183
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
184
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
185
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
186
nal.
and encoder wiring.
the cam.
187
UTS Count Fault Up Terminal Slowdown Limit • The car was lost due to a preset
Count Fault. The verification error. Check the guides on the selec-
position count for the UTS input tor. Check the fault log for binary
switch was off by more than 10 preset errors.
inches when the switch was • The controller has a faulty encoder
activated. The car was lost due signal for the pulse count. Check
to a preset error or the controller that the car can make long runs with-
has a faulty encoder signal for out overshooting the floor or stop-
the pulse count. ping short of the floor.
nal.
and encoder wiring.
• UTS switch not adjusted properly.
the cam.
UTS Fail On Fault UTS input Failed On Fault. The • The UT switch is not wired or UT
car was at the top floor and the input was lost.
UT input was low true (UT • The UTS did not break at the top ter-
switch made) but the UTS input minal landing. Adjust or replace the
was high (UTS not made). UTS switch.
Wrong Dir Pls Run Dn Wrong Direction Pulses while • Check the jumper on the encoder
car running down. The pulse isolation board. If this car has been
counts should be counting down previously running properly, the
while the car is running down. encoder isolation board could be
faulty. If during initial setup, change
the jumpers for A and A not.
Wrong Dir Pls Run Up Wrong Direction Pulses while • Check the jumper on the encoder
car running up. The pulse counts isolation board. If this car has been
should be counting up while the previously running properly, the
car is running up. encoder isolation board could be
faulty. If during initial setup, change
the jumpers for A and A not.
188
Zero Vel Decel Roll Zero Velocity Deceleration Roll. • This fault should never occur. Please
The controller calculated a call the factory if this fault occurs.
velocity value of zero during the
roll in to constant deceleration.
4.6.2 DETAILED FAULT DATA
Table 2: Detailed Fault Data
Detailed Fault Data Description
SRV Service Flag

0 = Out of Service
1 = Automatic
2 = Independent
3 = Load Weighing Bypass
4 = Attendant
5 = Code Blue
6 = Fire Phase 2
7 = Emergency Power
8 = Earthquake Emergency
9 = Fire Phase 1 Main Egress
10 = Fire Phase 1 Alternate Egress
11 = Homing
12 = Reset Run Up
13 = Reset Run Down
14 = Low Oil Operation
15 = Return to Lobby
16 = Load Overload
17 = Massachusetts Medical Emergency
189
PRC Process Flag

1 = Reset
2 = Inspection
3 = Motion: hsf=1, dir=1, Up Fast
hsf=0, dir=1, ul=0, Up Transition
hsf=0, dir=1, ul=1, Up Leveling
hsf=1, dir=2, Down Fast
hsf=0, dir=2, dl=0, Down Transition
hsf=0, dir=2, dl=1, Down Leveling
4 = Motion Mode 1 – Soft Start
5 = Motion Mode 2 – Constant Acceleration
6 = Motion Mode 3 – Roll Over to Max Velocity
7 = Motion Mode 4 – Constant Velocity
8 = Motion Mode 5 – Roll Over to Deceleration
9 = Motion Mode 6 – Constant Deceleration
10 = Motion Mode 7 – Targeting Floor
11 = Motion Mode 8 – Emergency Slowdown
12 = Safety String
13 = Turned Off
14 = Parked
15 = Waiting Assignment
16 = Doors Operation
17 = Elevator Stalled (or Low Oil for Hydro)
DRF Front Door Flag

0 = Door Closed
1 = Door Opening
2 = Door Dwelling
3 = Door Closing
4 = Door Nudging Closed
RDF Rear Door Flag

0 = Door Closed
1 = Door Opening
2 = Door Dwelling
3 = Door Closing
4 = Door Nudging Closed
DPR Direction Preference Flag

0 = None
1 = Up
2 = Down
190
DIR Car Direction Flag

0 = None
1 = Up
2 = Down
EMP Emergency Power Flag

0 = Not on Emergency Power
1 = On Emergency Power Waiting
2 = On Emergency Power Waiting with Doors Open
3 = On Emergency Power Returning Home
4 = On Em. Power Returned Home with Doors Open
5 = On Em. Power Returned Home with Doors Closed
6 = On Emergency Power and Selected to Run
MED Medical Emergency

0 = No Medical Emergency Service
1 = Recall Car to Medical Emergency Recall Floor
2 = At Return Floor with Door Open (Return Complete)
4 = On EMS Car Call Service
5 = On EMS Car Hold Service (key off but not at the recall
floor)
CBL Code Blue Flag

0 = No Code Blue
1 = Recall to Emergency Floor
2 = At Code Blue Floor
3 = At Code Blue Floor with Door Open
4 = finished Code Blue
EQU Earthquake Flag

0 = Not on Earthquake Operation
1 = Earthquake Sensor Activated
2 = Counterweight Derailment Sensor Activated
3 = Recover Away From the Counterweight
4 = Stopped at a Floor
191
FIR Fire Flag

0 = Not on Fire Service
1 = Phase 1 Main Egress Return
2 = Phase 1 Alternate Egress Return
3 = Phase 1 Completed
4 = Phase 2 Door Hold
5 = Phase 2 Constant Pressure Door Open
6 = Phase 2 Constant Pressure Door Close
7 = Phase 2 Door Hold
8 = Phase 2 Momentary DCB Door Close
RFI Rear Fire Flag

0 = Not on Fire Service
1 = Phase 1 Main Rear Egress Return
2 = Phase 1 Alternate Rear Egress Return
3 = Phase 1 Completed
4 = Phase 2 Rear Door Hold
5 = Phase 2 Constant Pressure Rear Door Open
6 = Phase 2 Constant Pressure Rear Door Close
7 = Phase 2 Rear Door Hold
8 = Phase 2 Momentary DCB Rear Door Close
HSF High Speed Flag

1 = High Speed
STF Start Flag

1 = Start of Run
CAL Direction of Calls

0 = No Call
1 = Above Call
2 = Below Call
3 = Above and Below Calls
ESP Emergency Stop Flag

1 = Emergency Stop
NST Need to Stop Flag

1 = Car need to stop at next floor
RLV Re-level Flag

1 = Car in re-leveling
STE Step Flag

1 = Step to the next position (non-distance feedback)
192
PDO Pre-open Door Flag

1 = Pre-open door
ST0 Next Stop Floor

Floor number of next stop
INS Inspection Status Flag (Status bit set to “1” when switch is on)
Bit 0: Car Top Inspection
Bit 1: Machine Room Inspection
Bit 2: Access
Bit 3: Lock Bypass
Bit 4: Gate Bypass
Bit 5: Automatic
NDS Next Car Up Sequence

0 = Initiate Next Up Door Open
1 = Opening Next Up Door
2 = Door full open on Next Up
3 = Allow door close for onward call
4 = Allow door close while on next up
GTM Group Transmitter Empty

1 = Transmit Buffer Empty
IO0 1038 or 1064 I/O Block 1, Byte 0: Listed in order of Bits 0-7
Table 3:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 1
DN
DT
DTS
DT1
DT2
DT3
UN
UT
193
Table 4:
1038/1064Main I/O
Block 1
UTS
UT1
UT2
UT3
DLB
DLM
DLT
RLM
Table 5:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 1
DLB-1
DLM-1
DLT-1
RLM-1
ACC
BAD
BAU
TAD
194
Table 6:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 2
HWS
MRS
MES
ALT
BP
FS
HC
SS
Table 7:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 2
UT4/1U
UT5/2U
RTL/3U
Reserved/4U
DT4/2D
DT5/3D
Spare/4D
Reserved/5D
195
Table 8:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 3
GBP
LBP
IND
AD
DEL
BKS
UL-1
DL-1
Table 9:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 3
UL
DZ
DL
DPM
GS
GS-1
LC
INS
196
Table 10:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 4
IU
ID
CS
ICI
MRI
MRIU
MRID
AUTO
Table 11:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 4
P/RTL
FST
GTS
RDY
GRT1
GTR2
BRKI
DON
197
Table 12:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 5
RUNI
RUNAI
MCCI
MCAI
RGS
RGS-1
SECF/SVSD
LVC
IOA 1038 or 1064 I/O Block 5, Byte 1: Listed in order of Bits 0-7
Table 13:
1038/1064 Main I/O
Block 5
DNI
DFI
UPI
UFI
CWS
RDPM
GOV
PS
198
IOB 1037/1040 I/O Block 25, Byte 0: Listed in order of Bits 0-7
Table 14:
1037/1040 Board
Block 25
DOL
DCL
EE
SE
LWA
OVL
LWB
LWD
IOC 1037/1040 I/O Block 25, Byte 1: Listed in order of Bits 0-7
Table 15:
1037/1040 Board
Block 25
BP1
BP2
BP4
BP8
BP16
EP
US
DS
199
IOD 1037/1040 I/O Block 25, Byte 2: Listed in order of Bits 0-7
Table 16:
1037 Board 1040 Board
Block 25 Block 25
DO DO
DC DC
NUD NUD
CUL P6
CDL EQL
FL EML
FB/NB OLL
HB CLF
STATUSF Control Status Flag (Status bit set to “1” when status active)
Bit 0: NO LC power
Bit 1: NO HC power
Bit 2: NO SS input
Bit 3: Drive not ready
Bit 4: Gripper error
Bit 5: I/O error during redundancy check
Bit 6: Inspection or lock bypass fault
Bit 7: Binary Position Input Error
Bit 8: Position Error
Bit 9: No automatic Doors
Bit 10: Stop switch open
Bit 11: Door Zone fault
Bit 12: Gate or Door lock fault
Bit 13: No Potential “P” Input
Bit 14: No DCL
Bit 15: No gate or lock
Bit 16: Brake lift switch error
Bit 17: Top of Car Communications Error
Bit 18: Drive Communications Error
Bit 19: Safety Processor Board Communications Error
Bit 20: DB Resistor Temp. Error
CT Position Count in pulses

TG Target Count in pulses
VEL Velocity in feet per minute
200
ENC VEL Encoder Velocity in feet per minute
4.6.3 SAFETY PROCESSOR FAULTS
Table 17: Safety Processor Faults
Fault Description and Cause
DL/GS Door Lock/Gate Switch Fault. Car is moving outside the door zone with the
door open. The car will immediately shut down.
DT Spd DT Speed Fault. The car hit the DT limit at a higher velocity than the value
set for the DT Velocity adjustable variable. The car will immediately shut
down.
DTS Sp DTS Speed Fault. The car hit the DTS limit at a higher velocity than the
value set for the DTS Velocity adjustable variable. The car will immediately
shut down.
EEprom EEprom fault. Defective EEprom device or EEprom device is not installed.
The car will not be able to run until the EEprom is installed or replaced.
EncBat Encoder Battery Error. The encoder uses an internal battery to maintain
position of the car when power is off. While the system is powered up and
communicating, the Safety Processor Board monitors the status of the
encoder battery. If the battery level is too low to maintain the position
count, a batter error is declared. Replace the encoder.
EncCom Encoder Communication Error. Encoder and Safety Processor Board

stopped communicating. Possible causes:
• Improper connection on SPB for R./T+ or R/T-
• Faulty driver chip on Safety Processor Board
• Improper connection on Encoder
• Fault Encoder
EncFlt Encoder Fault. The encoder has detected an internal fault. Replace the
encoder.
EncIni Encoder Initialization Error. On power up of the controller the Safety Pro-
cessor Board will request the position count from the encoder. If the SPB is
unable to receive the position count and the encoder is still communicating,
an initialization error will be declared. See possible causes under EncCom
error.
201
EncPos Encoder Position Error. Once the encoder position count has be initialized
during the learn hoistway procedure, the Safety Processor Board will moni-
tor that the count does not go above 30,000,000. If it does then a position
error is declared. Possible causes:
• Faulty encoder coupling to governor
• Car was lost from fault UT or DT limit switch and ran down. If the
count decrements past zero it will roll over to 35,000,000.
EncVel Encoder Velocity Error. To calculate velocity from the encoder a position
update must be received every 50 millisecond. If the SBP fails to receive 5
consecutive data packets from the encoder then the velocity cannot be calcu-
lated properly and you will get this error. See EncCom error for possible
causes.
INS DO Inspection Door Open Fault. A door is open while running on inspection
and the gate and locks are not being bypassed. The car will immediately
shut down.
INS Sp Inspection Speed Fault. The car exceeded the INS Velocity adjustable vari-
able while running on inspection. The car will immediately shut down.
Invalid Invalid fault number. (This can only be caused by a programming error in
the chip).
IO Flt I/O Fault. An input is on in error. The Elev Serv display will show the I/O
error. Possible causes are as follows:
• All inspection inputs and the auto input are off.
• More than one inspection or auto input is on at the same time.
• A bypass input is on while the car is not on Car top inspection.
• Both up and down run output from the main CPU are on at the same
time.
The car will not be able to run until the error is cleared.
LEV Sp Leveling Speed Fault. The car exceeded the LEV Velocity adjustable vari-
able while leveling with a door open. The car will immediately shut down.
No Flt No fault is recorded in this index location.
202
Pls Er Pulse Error. Not enough pulses have occurred during the Pulse Fault Time
period. This error is detected only on automatic operation. Verify that the
pulse LED on the Safety Processor board blinks while the car is running on
inspection. Possible causes are as follows:
• Improper connection for PP and PPS. Refer to the job specific prints.
• PP and PPS field wires need to be swapped.
• Photocoupler in selector is faulty. Call the Factory.
• Voltage from PP to 0V on the Safety Processor Board is less than 10
VDC with the PP and PPS wires disconnected. Call the Factory.
UT Spd UT Speed Fault. The car hit the UT limit at a higher velocity than the value
set for the UT Velocity adjustable variable. The car will immediately shut
down.
UTS Sp UTS Speed Fault. The car hit the UTS limit at a higher velocity than the
value set for the UTS Velocity adjustable variable. The car will immediately
shut down.
203
Section 10 - LCD Display Interface
10.1 Operating the LCD Interface
The LCD display interface board uses a 2 line by

24 character display and four buttons. This inter-
UP button is used to scroll up face allows the user to adjust parameters, view
to the next menu item or to critical controller information, to implement the
increment a data value. controller setup and to view the elevator status.
Upon power-up the display shows a blinking
DOWN button is used to GALaxy name to indicate the controller is run-
scroll down to the next menu ning as show above.
item or to decrement a data The four inputs buttons used with the LCD dis-
value. play are, UP, DOWN, MODE and ENTER. The
UP and DOWN buttons are used to scroll up and
down to each menu item. When an appropriate
MODE button is used to go
menu item is reached, the ENTER button is used
back to the previous menu or
to select the item. Some menu items, once
to select a digit of a data
selected, show a second menu. Again, use the UP
value.
and DOWN buttons to scroll through the menu
items and the ENTER button to select a particular
ENTER button is used to item. The MODE button is used to go back to the
select the menu item or to previous menu. When a menu item is an adjust-
complete the operation of able variable, select the item with the ENTER
changing a data value. button and change the variable with the UP or
DOWN button. The MODE button is used to
Potentiometer is used to move the cursor to the next digit. When the
adjust the viewing angle. It appropriate value is reached, used the ENTER
will make the display button to complete the variable change operation
lighter or darker. and return to the current menu.
204
10.2 The LCD Menu Structure
205
10.2.1 Set Date and Time
It is important to set the date and time on the con-

troller clock so that the fault log shows the cor-
rect time sequence that faults occur.
206
10.2.2 Adjustable Variables
All field variables are adjustable from the LCD of field adjustable variables and the minimum
interface. Values can be changed within the valid and maximum values for each is shown below:
minimum and maximum range. A complete list
207
10.2.2.1 Car Motion
Table 1: Car Motion
Car Motion Min Max Initial Units Description
Inspect 0 150 75 Fpm Inspection Speed. Maximum car speed

Speed while running on inspection.
Ins Decel 50 480 300 fpm/s Inspection decelaration rate. The rate
Stop for the elevator to decelerate from
inspection speed to zero.
Pattern 0 3.00 0 Sec Pattern Delay. Delay time before the
Delay speed profile will start.
Brake Pick 0 5.0 0 Sec Brake Pick Delay. Delay time to pick
Del the brake after the run relay is energized.
Soft Start 50 480 125 Fpm/ss Soft Start Jerk Rate. Maximum jerk rate
Jerk to roll into constant acceleration from a
dead stop.
Acceleratio 50 300 92 Fpm/s Acceleration Rate. The constant
n acceleration rate to reach top speed.
Roll Over 50 480 125 Fpm/ss Rollover Jerk Rate. Maximum roll jerk
Jerk rate while rolling into top speed.
Decel Jerk 50 480 125 Fpm/ss Deceleration Jerk Rate. Maximum jerk
rate to roll from top speed to constant
deceleration.
Decel Rate 50 300 92 Fpm/s Deceleration Rate. The constant
deceleration rate from top speed to
leveling speed when stopping for a floor.
Floor Targ 1.2 25.0 12.0 Inch Floor Target Distance. Distance to start
Dis leveling mode into the floor. Increasing
this distance will lower the jerk rate.
Leveling 1.0 15.0 5.0 Fpm Leveling Speed. Maximum car speed
Speed while leveling into the floor.
Stop Decel 5 225 50 Fpm/s Stop Deceleration Rate. Rate to bring
Rate the velocity from leveling speed to zero
speed.
208
Table 1: Car Motion
Soft Stop 0 3.0 1.0 Sec Soft Stop Time. For Hydraulic
Time Elevators – time the motor is kept
running after the valve is turned off. For
Traction Elevators – time that zero speed
is held until the brake is set.
Brake Drop 0 5.0 0.1 Sec Brake Drop Delay. Delay time to drop
Del the brake after the car has stopped and is
dead level at the floor.
Relev Pat 0 3.00 0 Sec Relevel Pattern Delay. Delay time
Dly before speed profile will start on a
relevel.
Relevel 1.0 15.0 6.0 Fpm Re-level Speed. Maximum car speed
Speed during re-leveling operation.
Relev Strt 0.0 15.0 0 Fpm Re-level Start Speed. Maximum starting
Spd velocity for a re-level. Once the car
establishes motion the car will then
switch from re-level start speed to re-
level speed.
Em Decel 80 300 180 Fpm/s Emergency Deceleration Rate. The rate
Rate at which the elevator will decelerate
when it is doing an emergency
slowdown.
Recovery 25 100 25 Fpm Recovery speed to the nearest floor.
Speed
EM Decel 50 300 100 Fpm/s Emergency deceleration rate to leveling
Lev rate.
EP Recov 10 100 25 Fpm Emergency power recovery speed.
Speed
Overspeed 110 125 110 Percent Percentage of contract speed the
Trip controller will drop the rope gripper.
209
Table 1: Car Motion
Short Fl 10.0 60.0 30.0 Inch Short Floor Distance. Any floor less
Dist than this distance is considered a short
floor. The short floor flag gets set and if
preopening is enabled, it can be
specifically disabled for the short floor
run.
ShFl SoftSt 50 480 125 Fpm/ss Short Floor Soft Start Jerk Rate.
Jrk Maximum jerk rate to roll into constant
acceleration from a dead stop.
ShFl Accel 50 300 92 Fpm/s Short Floor Acceleration Rate. The
Rate constant acceleration rate to reach top
speed.
ShrtFl Roll 50 480 125 Fpm/ss Short Floor Rollover Jerk Rate.
Jrk Maximum roll jerk rate while rolling
into top speed.
ShrtFl Decl 50 480 125 Fpm/ss Short Floor Deceleration Jerk Rate.
Jrk Maximum jerk rate to roll from top
speed to constant deceleration.
ShFl Decel 50 480 92 Fpm/s Short Floor Deceleration Rate. The
Rate constant deceleration rate from top speed
to leveling speed when stopping for a
floor.
ShrtFl Targ 1.2 25.0 8.0 Inch Short Floor Target Distance. Distance to
Dist start leveling mode into the floor.
Increasing this distance will lower the
jerk rate.
Short Fl 0 7 0 _ Short Floor Control. +1=Car will make
Cntrl a run between very short floors instead
of re-leveling. +2=Slowdown magnets
between short floor (non-distance
feedback). +4=Slowdown magnets
between middle short floor (non-
distance feedback)
210
Table 1: Car Motion
DON Start 0 1 0 _ DON Start Ctrl. Drive ON Start Control.

Ctrl When set to 1 the controller starts the
pattern delay after the drive on signal
(DON) from the drive.
Field 60 110 110 %Vel Field Weakening Velocity. Percent of
Weaken velocity above which the motor field is
weakened to allow the car to reach top
speed.
Preopen 0 3200.0 0.5 Sec Preopen Delay. Delay time to preopen
Delay the door starting from when the car
reaches 3 inches from dead level and the
door can safely be opened.
Encoder 256 20000 2048 PPR Encoder Pulses Per Revolution. The
PPR number of pulses the motor encoder has
per revolution
Encoder 50 3000 1050 RPM Encoder Revolutions Per Minute. The
RPM number of revolutions per minute the
motor makes at top speed.
Drv Speed 0.25 2 1 - Used for KEB drive to adjust the speed
Mult of the elevator.
Balanced 0 100.0 40.0 Percent Balanced Load. Percent load of the
Load counterweight.
Torque 0 100.00 0 Gain Torque Amount. Multiplier for the
Amount amount of torque proportional to the
load. A value of 100 will give 100
percent torque with 100 percent load or
60 percent torque with an empty car.
Torque 0 100.0 0 Gain Torque Down Amount. Torque Amount
Down Amt for down direction of travel. Multiplier
for the amount of torque proportional to
the load. A value of 100 will give 100
percent torque with 100 percent load or
60 percent torque with an empty car. If
this value is set to zero then the Torque
Amount parameter above will be used
for both up and down direction.
211
Table 1: Car Motion
Rope Comp 0 50.00 0 Offset Rope Compensation Torque. Used

Torque primarily on gearless machines that does
not have any compensation.
Torque 0 1.00 0 Sec Torque Ramp Time. The amount of time
Ramp Time for the torque to ramp up prior to the
elevator leaving the floor during pattern
delay.
Pos Count 0 1 0 _ Position Count Update Flag. The pulse
Upd count is checked every time the DZ input
is hit. +1=Update the DPP floor count as
the elevator passes by a landing and hits
DZ. +2=Interrupt the CPU when DZ hit
otherwise the update is done during the
loop time (roughly 1 msec). +4=Update
every time the DZ is hit and the car is at
constant speed regardless of the pulse
count update error value.
Pls Err 1 10,000 5000 1/Sec Position Count Update Error Delay. This
Delay number is the time delay from when DZ
is hit until the input is read. The time
delay parameter, times the current speed
of the car, is used to estimate the number
of pulses the count will change during
the “turn on time” of the DZ input.
Pls Cnt Upd 0 2.00 0 Inch Position Count Update Error. If the
Err count is off by more than this value and
the update flag is enabled, the position
pulse count is updated. If this value is
set to zero and the update flag is enabled,
then the pulse count is updated every
time the DZ is hit at high speed.
Stop On Pos 0 1 0 _ Enable to stop the elevator on position
Cnt pulse count. Used only for tapeless
application.
212
10.2.2.2 Car Brake
Table 2: Car Brake
Car Brake Min Max Initial Units Description
Brake Pick 0 5.0 0 Sec Brake Pick Delay. Delay time to

Del pick the brake after the run relay is
energized.
Brk Pick 0 400 0 Voltage Brake Pick Start Voltage. Initial DC
Start Voltage to pick the brake. Brake
voltage will ramp to pick voltage.
Brake Pick 40 400 230 Sec Brake Pick Voltage. DC Voltage to
Volt pick the brake. Brake voltage will
start at start voltage and then ramp to
pick voltage.
Brk Pick 0 2.0 0 Sec Brake Pick Rate Time. Time value
Rate for brake to ramp from start voltage
to pick voltage.
Brake Pick 0.1 6.0 3.0 Sec Brake Pick Time. Duration of
Time applied brake pick voltage before
changing to the hold voltage.
Brake Hold 40 400 160 Voltage Brake Hold Voltage. Voltage to
Volt hold the brake for the remainder of
the run.
Brake Drop 0 5.0 0.1 Sec Brake Drop Delay. Delay time to
Del drop the brake after the car has
stopped and is dead level at the floor.
Brk AC L-L 80 300 208 Voltage Brake AC Line to Line Voltage. AC
Volt input voltage to the brake board.
Brk 0.1 500.0 283.0 Ohms Brake Resistance. Resistance value
Resistance measured on the brake coil on ohms.
Relev Brk 0 5.0 0 Sec Relevel Brake Delay. Time delay to
Delay lift the brake during a relevel.
Brk Relev 0 400 0 Voltage Brake Relevel Start Voltage. Initial
Start DC Voltage to pick the brake on a
relevel. Brake voltage will ramp to
relevel voltage.
213
Table 2: Car Brake
Car Brake Min Max Initial Units Description
Brk Relev 20 400 230 Voltage Brake Relevel Voltage. Brake

Volt voltage applied on the brake coil
during a relevel. This parameter
useful to have a partial brake lift on
relevel. Relevel brake voltage will
start at relevel start voltage and then
ramp to relevel voltage.
Brk Relev 0 2.0 0 Sec Brake Relevel Rate Time. Time
Rate value for brake to ramp from relevel
start voltage to relevel voltage.
Relev Brk 0 1 0 - Relevel Brake Low Voltage. Set to a
LowV 1 to relevel the car with the hold
voltage to create a partial pick of the
brake.
Brake Opto 0 7372 200 3686/ Brake Opto Delay. The SCR Brake
Dly msec board trigger circuit uses opto-
coupler devices that have a turn on
delay of roughly 1 millisecond but
can vary from part to part and vary
from different input filtering. This
parameter is used to compensate for
different turn on delays to start of
triggering of the SCRs. Only
change this value at the advice of a
G.A.L. Technician.
EM Brk 10 3200 60 Sec Emergency Brake Drop Delay.
Drop Dly Delay time to drop the emergency
brake after the car has stopped and is
dead level at the floor.
EM Brk 0 10 3 Sec Emergency Brake Pick Time.
Pick Tim Duration of applied emergency brake
pick voltage before changing to the
hold voltage.
214
10.2.2.3 Car Timers
Table 3: Car Timers
Car Timers Min Max Initial Units Description
Y Delta 0 5.0 1.5 Sec Transfer time to change motor from

Time Y start to Delta run.
Fault Time 0 10.0 2.0 Sec Fault Time. Delay time before
allowing the car to run after a fault
occurs.
Reset Time 0 10.0 5.0 Sec Reset Time. Delay time in the reset
mode before allowing the car to run.
Lant On 0 2.0 0.7 Sec Lantern On time. Used for double
Time stroke gongs. The lantern will turn
on, turn off and then turn on again.
The Lantern on time is the delay time
from when the lantern first turns on
until it turns on the second time.
Lant Off 0 2.0 0.2 Sec Lantern Off Time. Used for double
Time stroke gongs. The lantern off time is
the delay time after the lantern first
turns on until it turns off.
Pas Chime 0.2 2.0 0.5 Sec Floor Passing Chime Time. Length
Time of time the floor passing chime will
sound when a floor is passed.
Door Fail 10.0 3200.0 25.0 Sec Door Fail Time. Time with power
Time on the door without getting the door
open limit.
Nudging 20.0 3200.0 60.0 Sec Nudging Time. Delay time for a
Time door to be held before going into
nudging.
Car Call 1.0 60.0 2.0 Sec Car Call Dwell. Door open dwell
Dwell time when answering a car call only.
Hall Call 1.0 60.0 4.0 Sec Hall Call Dwell. Door open dwell
Dwell time when answering a hall call or
both a hall and car call.
215
Table 3: Car Timers
Lobby 1.0 60.0 5.0 Sec Lobby Dwell. Door open dwell time
Dwell for a car at the lobby.
Handicap 1.0 120.0 25.0 Sec Handicap Dwell. Extended door time
Dwell from pressing the ED button in the
car.
Short Dwell 0.0 60.0 1.0 Sec Short Door Dwell Time. Door open
Tim dwell time when the doors re-open
on a door open button, electric eye,
safety edge or door hold button.
RTL Dwell 1.0 60.0 8.0 Sec Return To Lobby Door Dwell Time.
Time Time the door stays open before
closing on a return to lobby
operation.
CB Door 1.0 3200.0 60.0 Sec Code Blue Door Time. Door open
Time time on a code blue return.
Non Interfer 1.0 60.0 2.0 Sec Non-Interference Time. Time
T between when you stop from when
you can run again.
Stall Time 30.0 3200.0 60.0 Sec Stall Time. Maximum time a run is
requested but the car is not moving.
Learn HW 1.0 3200.0 30.0 Sec Automatic Hoistway Learn Stall
Stall Time. The time required for a
hoistway learn is calculated by the
number of floor at an average height
of 12.5 feet. This stall time value is
added to the calculated value for the
maximum time allowed for the auto
hoistway learn to run. If floor
heights are taller or if there is a blind
shaft, this timer may need to be
increased to the additional floor
height times 1.2 (multiplier for car
running at 30fpm). For a blind shaft
of 50 feet then use a timer value of
50 * 1.2 = 60.0 seconds.
216
Table 3: Car Timers
Gen/LT/Fan 30.0 3200.0 360.0 Sec Generator Run/Cab Light/Fan Time.

Time Length of time to leave the generator
running or the Cab light and fan on
after there is no longer a demand to
run.
ATT Buz 0.0 900.0 60.0 Sec Attendant Buzzer Delay. Buzzer
Delay sounds if a hall call is entered and the
car has not started moving within
this delay time. This function is
disabled when set to zero.
ATTBuz 0 30.0 0 Sec Attendant Buzzer Off Time. Cycle
Off Time off time to turn attendant buzzer on
and off once attendant delay time
function has been meet (See ATT
Buz Delay). Buzzer will stay on
continuously if this timer set to zero.
ATTBuz On 1.0 30.0 5.0 Sec Attendant Buzzer On Time. Cycle on
Time timer to turn attendant buzzer on and
off once attendant delay time
function has been meet (See ATT
Buz Delay).
Door Delay 0.0 1.5 0 Sec Door Delay Time. Delay time
Time between DO and DC to switch when
opening or closing the door.
Video 0.0 3200.0 0 Sec Video Time-out. Turn off the
Time-out machine room video after this timer
times out. This function is disabled
when set to zero.
ManDoor 0.0 900.0 0 Sec Manual Door Buzzer Delay. On a
Buz Dly car with manual doors, sound the
buzzer if the door is left open and a
call is entered after this time delay.
This function is disabled when set to
zero.
RC Pick 0 5.0 0 Sec. The amount of delay time for the
Delay retiring cam to pick once the doors
are closed.
217
Table 3: Car Timers
Grip Reset 0 20.0 0 Sec The amount of time it takes for the
Tim rope gripper to reset on power-up.
Relev Dly 0 2.0 0 Sec The amount of delay time before the
Tim car will re-level. This would be used
for jobs that have excessive rope
stretch.
EE Time- 0 3200 0 Sec Electric Eye Time-out time. If the
out Electric Eye or detector edge is ON
continuously for this amount of time,
it will be flagged as timed-out and
the controller will ignore the EE
input and close the door on nudging.
When set to zero, this feature is
disabled.
F1 DC 10.0 30.0 20 Sec The amount of time it will take
Time-out before the car doors start to close
while the car is on Independent or
Attendant service prior to recalling
the elevator on Fire Phase 1.
VIP Door 1 3200 20 Sec VIP door time. The amount of time
Time the car will park at the VIP recall
floor prior to going to automatic
service.
FR DC 1 3200 1 Sec The amount of time prior to closing
Time-out the doors on automatic freight door
operation.
FR Pwr DO 0 30 2 Sec The amount of time to turn on the
Time power door open relay on automatic
freight door operation.
Adv Door 0 240 0 Sec Door open advance enable for non-
En Tim simultaneous doors
Run Cycle 0 300 0 Hours Used to initiate a run when the
Time elevator has been sitting idle for a
period of time. Used for jobs that
have high friction bearing machines.
218
10.2.2.4 Car Options
Table 4: Car Options
Car Options Min Max Initial Units Description
Brake Lift 0 2 0 _ Brake Lift Switch. If set to 1 or 2 a brake lift

Switch switch fault is detected. The car is
prevented from running if the brake does not
drop or if the brake did not pick on the
previous run. The car is allowed to run after
the brake drops. If set to 2 the rope gripper
will set if the brake does not drop and the
can only be reset by placing the car on
inspection and back to automatic.
Invert BLS 0 1 0 _ Invert Brake Lift Switch. When set inverts
the logic for the brake lift switch to use a
normally close switch instead of normally
open.
ISER 0 7 0 _ Invert In Service Output. When set to 1, the
Output Ctl in service light output is turned off when the
car is in service instead of turned on.
When set to a 2 the ISER output will
function as an elevator in use light.
When set to a 4, this output functions as out
of service from a shutdown and does not
include independent, inspection or recovery
mode.
Invert CLF 0 1 0 0 – N/O Invert the logic for the car light fan. If set to
1 – N/C 0 car light fan is normally open. If set to 1
car light fan is normally closed.
Double 0 1 1 Gongs Select 1 or 2 gongs for down hall calls. 0 = 1
Stroke gong and 1 = 2 gongs.
Next Up Dir 0 3 0 _ Next Up Direction Lantern Control.
Lant +1=Turn off hall lantern after next up time.
+2=Turn off cab lantern after next up time.
Next Up 0 1 0 _ Next Up Preference Control. When set
Pref Ctl allows direction preference to change before
the door starts to close after the next up door
time.
219
SR Lant Ctl 0 1 0 _ Second Riser Lantern Control. When set,

ring cab lantern only for second riser
slowdown.
HBZ/PI 0 1 0 _ Handicap Buzzer/PI Display Control. When
Disp set to 1, do not sound HB or update floor PI
when passing an invalid floor.
DOB Over 0 1 0 _ DOB Over Nudging. If set the door open
Nudg button will open the door when the door is
nudging closed.
Nudge No 0 1 0 _ If set to a 1 the doors will close on nudging
Calls even if the elevator has no onward calls.
Nudge Dis 0 1 7 _ If set to a 1 then do not close the doors on
Ctl nudging.
If set to a 2 then re-open the doors fully on
nudging.
If set to a 4 sound the nudging buzzer but do
not close the doors on nudging.
DO No Actv 0 1 0 _ Door Open Output when no Active DOL.
DOL When the door is fully open and hits the
DOL, the DO is turned off and stays off
even if the door drifts off of DOL. With this
bit set, the DO output will turn on any time
the DOL is lost.
Dis GL Test 0 1 0 _ If this option is set to a 1 it will disable the
NY gate and lock test. This option is only for
New York City only.
DCB Canc 0 1 0 _ Setting this option to 1 will cancel the door
Dwell dwell timing if the door close button is
pressed.
220
Non-Simul 0 2 0 _ If set to 0 then both front and rear doors will

Doors open at the same time if there is a demand at
both the front and rear openings.
If set to a 1 the front doors will open first
before the rear doors open if there is a
demand to open.
If set to a 2 the rear doors will open first
before the front doors open if there is a
demand to open.
Preopen 0 1 0 _ Setting this option to a 1 will enable pre-
Doors opening of the doors. If retiring cam used
with auto door, RCM will also turn on at the
preopening point.
Cl Gate No 0 1 0 _ Close Gate (Swing Door) when No Onward
Pref Preference. The gate on a swing door
normally stays open until a call is placed.
This bit causes the gate to close while the car
is setting at the floor.
No HC 0 1 0 0-OFF No Hall Call Button Door Reopen. When
Door Reop 1-ON set do not reopen the door from an at floor
hall call.
Behind CC 0 1 0 - When enabled the elevator will not latch any
Canc car calls in the opposite direction of travel.
RCM 0 3 0 _ Retiring Cam Control. When set to 1, hold
Control the retiring cam up at the floor if there is no
pilot to open the door (manual doors). The
retiring cam will drop after 5 minutes. When
set to 2, RCM output turns on when DZ hit
to advance the RCM ahead of the door open
(auto door with retiring cam) otherwise
RCM turns on when dead level. If
preopening is set RCM and DO turn on
when DZ hit.
221
COP/ 0 7 0 _ COP/Remote Car Call Select. 0=Bo: Both

Remote CC COP and Remote Car Call Station used to
enter calls. 1=Separate: COP only or
Remote CC only used to enter car calls.
+2=C-R: Car calls entered on the COP sets
the acknowledgement light on the Remote
station. +4=R-C: Car calls entered on the
Remote station sets the acknowledgement
light on the COP.
Griper Spd 0 3 0 _ 0 – Off,
Trip 1 – Safety processor speed
2 – Overspeed
GOV Grip 0 1 0 _ Governor Switch Gripper Trip Control. Sets
Trip and latches a gripper fault immediately
when the governor switch is opened.
1=Latches the gripper fault only if the
governor switch is opened while the car is
traveling at contract speed or above 150
fpm. When the gripper fault is latched it
must be reset from the LCD interface for the
car to run.
Griper Trip 0 1 0 _ If this options is set to a 1 the in car buzzer
Bz will sound if the rope gripper is engaged.
Level Fault 3 10 3 # Level Level Fault Count. Maximum count of
Cnt Faults consecutive re-level tries when a re-level
error is detected. A relevel error is detected
when the brake is dropped and the car moves
out the level zone.
Binary 0 1 0 - 1 = Always update the car position count
Preset based on binary preset when the position
doesn’t not match.
0 = Update the car position count based on
the binary preset when the car recovers into
a floor.
Drive Rdy 1 10 5 Count Drive Ready Fault Reset Count. Number of
Faults times the drive can be reset in a 20 minute
time period.
222
Drive Baud 0 4 0 _ Drive Baud Rate. 0=19200 (HPV-900,

Rate DSD-412, HPV-600 and Quattro Drives).
1=38400, 2=57600, 3=11500, 4=9600.
Drive 0 2 0 _ Drive Command Update Rate. 0=10 msec
Update Rate (HPV-900, DSD-412, HPV-600 and Quattro
Drives), 1=15 msec, 2=20 msec. Rate at
which commands are sent to the drive.
Drive 0 5 0 _ Modbus protocol
Modbus 0-5 = N1, N2, E1, E2, O1, O2 (Always 8
data bits, parity, stop bits). Used for Delta
drive.
User Baud 0 3 0 Bits/sec User Interface Baud Rate. 0=2400, 1=4800,
Rate 2=9600 and 3=19200 bits per second.
Safe Test 2000 2999 0 Years Safety Test Year.
Year
Safe Test 1 12 0 Months Safety Test Month.
Month
Safe Test 1 31 0 Days Safety Test Day.
Day
Auto Fault 0 1 0 - Enable to automatically display a fault on
Dpy the LCD screen.
Password 0 9999 0 - Password code to modify and adjust field
variables
Pword 0 3200 300 Sec The amount of inactive time for the LCD to
Time-out lock out the field variables.
DoorOpenL 0 8 0 - To enable output for door open light button.
Ctrl
223
10.2.2.5 Service Options
Table 5: Service Options
Service
Min Max Initial Units Description
Options
Lobby Floor Bot Top 1 Floor Lobby Floor.

Return to 0 7 0 _ Return to Lobby Option. +1=cycle door at
Lobby lobby, +2=cancel car calls when activated,
+4=cycle door on reversal.
Stop At 0 3 0 1 – Up 1 = The car will stop at the lobby when the
Lobby 2 – Dn car is traveling up and the car is below the
3 – Both lobby floor.
2 = The car will stop at the lobby when the
car is traveling down and the car is above the
lobby floor.
3 = The car will stop at the lobby when
traveling in either direction.
Em Power Bot Top 1 Floor Emergency Power Recall Floor.
Floor
EP 0 1 0 - Recover to the nearest floor on emergency
Recovery power.
Dir 0 = based on movement of the car when
brake is picked.
1 = based on load weighing device.
Med Em Bot Top 1 Floor Medical Emergency Return floor.
Floor
Med Em Sw 0 1 0 _ Medical Emergency Switch Location. 0 =
Loc Medical Emergency is located at front door.
1 = Switch is located at rear door.
Emerg 0 1 0 _ Emergency Dispatch. If set and hall call
Dispatch power lost, the group will set down hall calls
above the lobby and up hall call at and
below the lobby. Also if communication is
lost to a particular hall call board, hall calls
are set for the affected floors.
Ind Over 0 1 0 Independent Overrides Security. Set to 1 to
Sec _ allow independent service to override
security car call lockouts.
224
Service
Options
IND Door 0 1 0 _ 1 = will close the doors from a car call when
Cl CC the elevator is on independent.
Ins Door 0 1 0 _ Inspection Door Close. When set to 1, the
Close door close output will turn on when the up or
down inspection run button is pressed.
LW-Antinus 0 29 0 Floors Load Weighing Anti-nuisance. Set to the
maximum number of car calls that can be
entered before all car calls are cancelled
without the load switch LWA input on.
Once the load switch is on, all car calls will
stay latched. If set to 0, this function is
disabled.
No Psg Run 0 10 0 # of No Passenger Run Count. When set to a
Cnt Runs number other than zero, the car call anti-
nuisance feature is activated. This count is
the number of times the car will run from a
car call without detecting that a passenger
has broken the detector edge. Once the
count is reached, all remaining car calls will
be cancelled.
Load 0 100 0 Percent Load Bypass. Percent load when above this
Bypass set point will cause the car to bypass hall
calls. This function is disabled when set to
zero.
Load 0 100 0 Percent Load Anti-nuisance. Percent load when
Antinuisan below this set point will cause the car to
drop its car calls. This function is disabled
when set to zero.
Load 0 100 0 Percent Load Dispatch. This set point is used as a
Dispatch trigger to activate Up Peak operations in the
group. Each time the car leaves the lobby
with a load greater than this value, the group
will increment the Up Peak Trigger. This
function is disabled when set to zero.
225
Service
Options
Load 0 125 0 Percent Load Overload. Percent load when above

Overload this set point will cause the car to go on
overload operation (sit at the floor with the
door open and the overload light on). When
the load goes below this value, the car will
automatically return to service. This
function is disabled when set to zero.
Handicap 0 100 40 Percent Handicap Car Capacity. Percent load when
Capacity above this value, the car my not have
enough room for a person in a wheelchair.
Cars with loads below this value would be
given a preference to get an assignment at a
floor requested by a handicap person.
Security 0 7 0 _ Security Recall Selection. 0=No: No Recall,
Recall +1=Recl: Recall to Security Floor on
activation of security. +2=fD: Cycle front
door once recalled to the Security Floor.
+4=rD: Cycle rear door once recalled to the
Security Floor.
Sec Recall 2 0 2 0 - Security recall control 2.
0 = out of group on first recall.
1 = out of group on al recalls.
2= no out of group recalls.
Security Bot Top 1 Floor Security Floor. The security recall floor.
Floor This is the floor where the security guard
would be stationed. This floor would not be
locked out when on security.
DOB Over 0 1 0 _ DOB Override Security. When set to 1, the
Sec DOB will be allowed to open the door at a
secured floor.
Att CC from 0 1 0 0 – OFF When set to 1 and the car is on Attendant
HC 1 – ON service the respective car call will register
when a hall call is registered.
Flash CB 0 1 0 0 – OFF When set to 1 the code blue light inside the
Light 1 – ON car station will flash.
226
Service
Options
HSV Door 0 1 0 0 – OFF Close the doors from a car call when the car
Cl CC 1 – ON is on Hospital Service.
Vip Op 0 3 0 _ Vip (Priority Call) Operation. +1=Cancel
hall call if no cars available for VIP call.
+2= Cancel car call upon initiation of being
selected as the VIP car.
Elev Off 0 7 0 _ Elevator Off Control. +1=Recall car when
key switch activated. +2=Keep door open at
the shutdown floor. +4=Allow the cab light
and fan to time-out even though the door is
open but the car is shut down.
Elev Off Ret 0 Top 0 Floor Hall Switch Elevator Off Return Floor.
Fl Return floor when the hall elevator off
switch is active. If zero, car will return to
the lobby floor.
PI Serv Msg 0 30 0 Service PI Service Message 1. When the car service
1 matches this number, user message 1 is sent
to the PI display. This will correspond to
user PI display message 17.
PI Serv Msg 0 30 0 Service PI Service Message 2. When the car service
2 matches this number, user message 2 is sent
to the PI display. This will correspond to
user PI display message 18.
Access Top Bot Top Top Floor Floor for top access
Fl Flr Flr Flr
Access Bot Bot Top Bot Floor Floor for bottom access
Fl Flr Flr Flr
227
10.2.2.6 Fire Options
Table 6: Fire Options
Fire Initi
Min Max Units Description
Options al
Fire Main Bot Top 1 Floor Fire Main Floor.

Floor
Alt Fire Bot Top 2 Floor Alternate Fire Floor.
Floor
Fire Sw Loc 0 3 0 _ Fire Switch Location. Location of fire hall
switch. 0 = Main/Alt Front, 1 = Main Rear/Alt
Front, 2 = Main Front/Alt Rear, 3 = Main/Alt
Rear.
Aux. Fire 0 1 0 _ Auxiliary Fire Switch. When set, the controller
Sw. expects an auxiliary hall fire switch to be used.
Rcl from F1 0 1 0 _ Recall from Fire Phase 1 Alternate floor. If the
Alt car has return to the alternate floor from a smoke
sensor and when two fire hall switch are used,
both must be on to recall the car from the
alternate floor to the main floor. When this flag
is set to 1, the car will recall from the alternate
floor to the main floor from either hall fire key
switch. (Set to 1 for Mass. fire service).
Hall Fire 0 3 0 _ Hall Fire Light. The variable controls the FSO
Light output on the controller so it can be used for a
hall fire light or a fire security override.
0=PH1&2: FSO output on for both phase 1 and
2 fire service. 1=PH1: FSO output on while
phase 1 fire is in effect. +2=flash: FSO is
flashed at a 1 second interval while activated.
MachRm 0 1 0 _ Machine Room Fire Sensor Return Floor
Fire Ret Selection. 0 = Return to the Main fire floor, 1 =
Return to the Alternate fire floor.
Hoistw Fire 0 1 0 _ Hoistway Fire Sensor Return Floor Selection. 0

Ret = Return to the Main fire floor, 1 = Return to the
Alternate fire floor.
228
Table 6: Fire Options
Fire Initi
Min Max Units Description
Options al
HWS 2 Fire 0 1 0 - Second hoistway fire service sensor return

Ret option.
0 = Main recall floor
1 = Alternate recall floor
Recall Reset 0 1 0 _ Recall Reset Selection. 0 = Reset fire service
phase 1 after hall switch is turned off and car
returns to fire floor. 1 = Reset phase 1
immediately after hall switch is turned off.
Fire Options 0 1 0 _ 1 = Do not blink the fire light in the hall when
the car is on phase 1 recall via Hoistway Smoke
or Machine Room Smoke (Used for Fire
Chicago only).
2 = Turn buzzer OFF at fire recall floor.
Fire Option 0 1 0 _ Fire Option 2. +1=Initiate a phase 2 recall only
2 when the door is open (Chicago fire).
+2=Disable flashing FL on phase 2 (Chicago
fire).
F1 DC 10.0 30.0 20 Sec The amount of time it will take before the car
Time-out doors start to close while the car is on Indepen-
dent or Attendant service prior to recalling the
elevator on Fire Phase 1.
Alt Rcl FS 0 1 0 - Enable to have the elevator recall back to the
Off alternate floor when the lobby fire switch is
turned to the off position and car recalled to the
main fire floor.
229
10.2.2.7 Group Dispatch
Table 7: Group Dispatch
Group
Dispatch
Parking 0 4 1 Car Number of Cars to Park. One car is parked

at the lobby. The remaining cars are parked
at the most used floors of the building. If set
to zero, no cars are parked.
Park Delay 0 120. 8.0 Sec Parking Delay Time. Time delay an idle car
Time 0 waits before being parked.
Parking 0 29 0 Floor Parking Floor 1. Floor to park the idle car. If
Floor 1 set to zero, the group will use number of hall
call history to decide where to park the car.
The parking variable must be set to at least 1
for this function to work.
Parking 0 Top 0 Floor Parking Floor 5. Floor to park the idle car. If
Floor 5 Floo set to zero, the group will use number of hall
r call history to decide where to park the car.
230
Group
Dispatch
Parking 0 Top 0 Floor Parking Width. The number of floor that a
Width Floo car is within to be considered parked at the
r parking floor.
Parking 0 3 0 _ Parking Type. Determines the type of
Type parking operation that is implemented by the
group. 0=park free cars to floors with the
most hall calls for that 15 minute period.
1=Divide the hoistway by the number of
cars and place a car in each zone starting
with the lobby. 2=Park cars according to the
adjustable variable parking floor. Note that
during parking, a car is always parked at the
Lobby except when the option for alternate
parking floor is selected through an input.
Alt Parking Bot Flr Top Bot Flr Floor Alternate parking floor
Fl Flr
Grp Timer 0 # of 0 # of Group service number of parking cars.
Park cars cars
Lobby Floor Bot Flr Top 1 Floor Lobby Floor.
Flr
Alt Parking 1 Top 1 Floor Alternate parking floor.
Fl Flt
Lobby 0 4 0 Car Lobby Request. Number of Cars Requested
Request to the Lobby floor. Used with Next Car Up
operation.
231
Group
Dispatch
Lobby Req 0 1 0 _ Lobby Request Control. If the lobby request

Ctrl variable is set to non-zero, then that is how
many cars are requested to the lobby all the
time. When this flag is set to 1, the lobby
request is only used when next up is active.
Next Up can be active all the time, from a
dedicated input or from Up Peak.
Next Car Up 0 4 0 _ Next Car Up. Set to 1 or 2 will activate the
Next Car Up operation. If set to 1 the next
up car will open its door at the lobby and
keep it open. The car is allowed to leave the
floor after the Lobby Dwell time expires but
will remain at the floor with the door open
until an onward call is assigned to it. If set
to 2 the next up car will close its door after
the Lobby Dwell time expires and go off of
next up but will remain at the lobby. An up
hall call at the lobby will cause the car to
open its door and go on next up. When set
to 4, Next up is activated on Up Peak
detection only. Next up can also be
activated from an input.
Up Pk Trig 0 3200 60.0 Sec Up Peak Trigger Time. The time interval to
Time .0 count the number of up peak triggers.
Up Pk Trig 1 100 3 Count Up Peak Trigger Count. The number of up
Cnt peak triggers that are set within the up peak
trigger time to activate up peak operation.
Up peak triggers are counted when the car
leaves the lobby with the load dispatch input
set or with the more car calls than the up
peak car call count.
Up Pk CC 1 40 3 Car Up Peak Car Call Count. Number of car
Count Call calls the car must have when leaving the
Count lobby to count as an up peak trigger.
Up Peak 0 3200 180.0 Sec Up Peak Duration Time. The duration time
Time .0 for up peak operation once up peak is
activated.
232
Group
Dispatch
Up Peak 0 1 0 _ Up peak control

Contrl 0 = Normal up peak
1 = Heavy up peak
Up Peak 0 # of 0 # of Number of cars to be utilized for up peak.
Pool cars cars
Dn Pk Trig 0 3200 60.0 Sec Down Peak Trigger Time. The time interval
Time .0 to count the number of down hall calls above
the lobby to activate down peak operation.
Dn Pk Trig 1 100 12 Down Down Peak Trigger Count. Number of
Cnt Hall down hall calls above the lobby that are set
Call within the down peak trigger time to place
Count the system on down peak operation.
Down Peak 0 3200 180.0 Sec Down Peak Duration Time. The duration
Time .0 time for down peak operation once down
peak is activated.
Dn Peak 0 1 0 _ Down peak control
Contrl 0 = Normal down peak
1 = Heavy down peak
Down Peak 0 # of 0 # of Number of cars to be utilized for down peak.
Pool cars cars
ETA Min 0 60 6 Sec ETA Minimum Time. For a hall call to be
Time assigned to a new car, the difference in ETA
must be greater than the ETA Minimum
Time.
ETA Co CC 0 60 15 Sec ETA Coincident Car Call Time. Hall calls
Time will be assigned to the car with the
coincident car call unless the car without the
coincident car call can reach the call faster
then ETA Coincident Car Call Time.
233
10.2.2.8 Group Options
Table 8: Group Options
Group
Options
Em Power 1 29 1 Floor Emergency Power Recall Floor.

Floor
Em Power 1 4 1 Car Number of Emergency Power Cars that
Cars can run at the same time on the emergency
power source.
1st Recall 0 4 1 Car First Recall Car. This is the first car
Car allowed to recall during the recall
sequence. The recall sequence continues
in consecutive order and then loops around
until all cars are recalled.
1st EP Run 0 4 1 Car First Emergency Power Run Car. This is

Car the first car selected to run. If this car
cannot run, the next consecutive car is
selected.
EP Recall 0 3200 15 Sec Emergency power recall delay time.
Delay
Recall 1.0 600.0 60.0 Sec Recall Time-out. The time allowed for the
Timeout car to reach the recall floor. If this timer
expires, the next car is selected to recall.
EP Op LED 0 3 0 _ Emergency Power Operation LED. This
parameter controls the group outputs for
emergency power status for each car.
0=Outputs are on for cars that are
operational. 1=Outputs on for cars on
normal power. 2=Outputs on for car on
emergency power. 3=Outputs on for cars
that are being recalled.
EP Park 0 1 0 _ Emergency Power Park LED. This
LED parameter controls the group outputs for
emergency power parked status for each
car. 0 = cars are parked on emergency
power. 1=cars are parked or selected to
run.
234
Group
Options
Code Blue 0 4 0 Car Code Blue Car. If set to zero, the best
Car ETA car will be assigned the code blue
call. If set to a car number, the selected car
will always be assigned the code blue call.
CB Req Ind 0 1 0 _ Code Blue Request Independent Car.
Car When set to 1, a code blue call can request
a car on independent service.
IR Car 0 4 0 Car Inconspicuous Riser Car. This car is
assigned all the IR hall calls.
2nd IR Car 0 # of 0 Car Set this option to have a second car answer
Cars the Inconspicuous Risers.
IR Control 0 7 0 1=IREn Inconspicuous Riser Control. This
2=AnCB4S variable is used to set the automatic
4=AnCB4F activation of IR service. Add each number
to activate the option. 1 = IREn: Enable IR
automatic activation. +2=AnCB4S:
Answer all Car calls Before Starting IR
service. +4=AnCB4F: Answer all Car
calls Before Finishing IR service.
Vid Pos Car 1 6-8 1 Column Video Position Car 1. The column where
1 Position the car is displayed on the dispatch screen
starts from left to right for positions 1
through 6 (8 for high rise cars). Car 1
through 6 positions are defaulted to
display positions 1 through 6 respectively.
Changing the car’s video position changes
the column where the car is displayed.
Vid Pos Car 1 6-8 2 Column Video Position Car 2. See Video Position
2 Position Car 1 for an explanation.
235
Group
Options
HC X- 0 500 60 Sec Hall Call Cross Assignment ETA limit. If
Assign ETA ETA for hall call assignment is greater
than this ETA limit, the hall call will be
cross-assigned to the old group controller.
HC X- 0 2 0 _ Hall Call Cross Assignment Enable.
Assign En When set to 1, hall call cross assignment is
enabled. The group will look for cross
assignment calls as well as hall calls.
Power should be cycled on controller after
this variable is modified so all
communications to all devices are made.
When set to 2, then hall calls are not
cancelled when all cars are out of service
when using cross cancellation.
X-Assign 0 # of 0 # of cars Number of cars in the old group to assign
Cars cars calls using cross assignment system.
Dispatcher 0 1 0 _ Dispatcher Car. If set to 1, this car is
Car allowed to become the dispatcher. In
normal operation, this variable would be
set to zero and car #1 would be the
dispatcher. If car #1 is shut down, car #2
automatically becomes the dispatcher.
During installation, it may be necessary to
force car #3 or above to be the dispatcher
until car #1 or #2 are brought on line.
236
Group
Options
Emergency 0 1 0 _ Emergency Dispatch. If set and hall call

Dispatch power lost, the group will set down hall
calls above the lobby and up hall call at
and below the lobby. Also if
communication. is lost to a particular hall
call board, hall calls are set for the affected
floors.
Single Auto 0 2 0 _ 0 – Manual Doors.
PB 1 – Enable for automatic doors.
2 – Disable this feature.
This feature allows only hall calls and car
calls to register when the doors are closed.
OTS No HC 0 1 0 _ Do not cancel hall calls if cars are out of
Canc service. This is used in accordance with
cross assignment feature.
Second 0 2 0 _ Second Riser Control. Defines the second
Riser Ctl riser operation. 0=Car defined for second
riser answer second riser call and standard
hall calls. 1=Car defined for second riser
answer only second riser calls. 2=Second
riser call or’ed with standard riser calls if
second riser operation not selected from
input.
Attendant 0 60 0 Seconds Attendant ETA Preference. When set to
ETA Pref non-zero, the car not on attendant service
has this time added to its ETA time. This
causes the attendant car to be given a
preference for the hall call.
Vip Op 0 3 0 _ Vip (Priority Call) Operation. +1=Cancel
hall call if no cars available for VIP call.
+2= Cancel car call upon initiation of
being selected as the VIP car.
Number Vip 0 # Cars 0 Cars Number of VIP Cars. Number of cars
Cars allow to service VIP (priority service)
calls at one time.
237
Group
Options
Handicap 0 255 0 Seconds Handicap Car Wait Time. Special

Car Wait operation that when a passenger presses a
handicap hall button, the group adds this
time to the ETA of all cars that do not have
enough capacity. See Handicap Capacity
in car options. Normally, if a car is at the
floor of the handicap hall call, it will get
the assignment regardless of the handicap
capacity unless this value is set to 255.
Grp CC Sec 1 240 60 Sec Group car call security override timer.
OvrT
HCB On 0 15 15 - Select what color LED to illuminate on
Color hall call button when button is pressed.
Used only with GAL serial hall button fix-
tures.
HCB On 0 100 0 - Hall call light on brightness for LED hall
Bright call buttons. Used only with GAL serial
hall button fixtures.
HCB Off 0 15 15 - Select what color LED to illuminate on
Color hall call button when button is NOT
pressed. Used only with GAL serial hall
button fixtures.
HCB Off 0 100 0 - Hall call light off brightness for LED hall
Bright call buttons. Used only with GAL serial
hall button fixtures.
HCB On 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light on red intensity. Used only
Red with GAL serial hall button fixtures.
HCB On 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light on green intensity. Used
Green only with GAL serial hall button fixtures.
HCB On 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light on blue intensity. Used only
Blue with GAL serial hall button fixtures.
HCB Off 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light off red intensity. Used only
Red with GAL serial hall button fixtures.
HCB Off 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light off green intensity. Used
Green only with GAL serial hall button fixtures.
238
Group
Options
HCB Off 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light off blue intensity. Used
Blue only with GAL serial hall button fixtures.
HCB Sec 0 15 0 - Select what color to illuminate the hall
Color buttons when the system is on security.
Used only with GAL serial hall button fix-
tures.
HCB Sec 0 100 62.5 -
Bright
HCB Sec 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light red intensity when on secu-
Red rity. Used only with GAL serial hall but-
ton fixtures.
HCB Sec 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light green intensity when on
Green security. Used only with GAL serial hall
button fixtures.
HCB Sec 0 100 62.5 - Hall call light blue intensity when on
Blue security. Used only with GAL serial hall
button fixtures.
HCB Sec Lt 0 3 0 - Hall call button security light.
Ctl 1 = invert security, +2 = flash security
Sabbath 0 3200 8 Sec The amount of time after the elevator
Restart answered the last sabbath call to restart the
process.
239
10.2.3. Job Statistics
Select to view or clear job statistics from this
menu.
10.2.3.1 Job Statistics • Number of Down Hall Calls with < 15 sec-
ond wait time
The Job Statistics shows the number car calls and • Number of Down Hall Calls with < 30 sec-
the number and percent of hall calls serviced ond wait time
since the job was started or since the job statistics • Number of Down Hall Calls with < 45 sec-
were cleared. Below is a list of all the categories ond wait time
maintained: • Number of Down Hall Calls with < 60 sec-
• Number of Car Calls ond wait time
• Number of Up Hall Calls • Number of Down Hall Calls with > 60 sec-
• Number of Down Hall Calls ond wait time
• Number of Up Hall Calls with < 15 second • Percent of Hall Calls with < 15 second wait
wait time time
wait time time
wait time time
wait time time
• Number of Up Hall Calls with > 60 second • Percent of Hall Calls with > 60 second wait
wait time time
240
241
10.2.3.2 Clear Job Statistics
This operation will set all the job statistics data

to zero.
242
10.2.4 Inputs and Outputs
243
10.2.4.1 Car Inputs and Outputs
Inputs and outputs show a “1” for ON and a “0”

for OFF. A list every input and output used on
the controller and the board it is located on is
shown in Appendix A. The controller determines
which boards are used depending on the options
selected and the number of front and rear floors.
All the I/Os for a given board are displayed even
if a particular I/O is not used.
244
10.2.4.2 Group Inputs and Outputs
Inputs and outputs show a “1” for ON and a “0” in Appendix A. All the I/O’s for a given board
for OFF. This I/O display is show only in the are displayed even if a particular I/O is not
group car and only when serial hall call board are used.
used. It the hall calls are placed on the standard
car I/O they will be shown with the car I/O
screen. A list every input and output used on the
controller and the board it is located on is shown
245
10.2.5 Set Calls and Lockouts
When a car is in the group the menu system

allows access to setting both hall calls and car
calls. When not the group, only car calls can
be set. Rear lockouts are only displayed only
when the car has a rear door.
246
10.2.5.1 Setup Car Calls
247
10.2.5.2 Setup Down Hall Calls
248
10.2.5.3 Setup Up Hall Calls
249
10.2.5.4 Lockout Front Car Calls
250
10.2.5.5 Lockout Rear Car Calls
251
10.2.6 Elevator Status
The elevator status display continuously updates cleared. The following status information can be
to show the current status and fault information. displayed:
The Up and Down keys allows access to both sta-
tus display and the velocity display. When a sys-
tem fault occurs, it will be displayed on the top
line of the status display while the fault exist and
will remain for 60 seconds after the fault is
252
Elevator Service: UT3 count Fault
Out of Service DT count Fault
Automatic Service DT1 count Fault
Independent Service DT2 count Fault
Load Weighing By Pass DT3 count Fault
Attendant Service Rear Door Open Flt
Code Blue Service Rear Door Close Flt
Fire Service Phase 2 Group Comm Loss
Emergency Power Service Car 1 Comm Loss
Earth Quake Service Car 2 Comm Loss
Fire Phase 1 Main Return Car 3 Comm Loss
Fire Phase 1 Alt Return Car 4 Comm Loss
Homing Car 5 Comm Loss
Reset Going Up Car 6 Comm Loss
Reset Going Down RUN I/O Failed ON
Stalled Out of Service Fault #39
RUN I/O Failed OFF
Fault Status: RUNA I/O Failed ON
Reset Fault RUNA I/O Failed OFF
Out Of Step Fault UP I/O Failed ON
Binary Input Fault UP I/O Failed OFF
Safety String Fault DNR I/O Failed ON
Door Zone Fault DNR I/O Failed OFF
Stalled Fault UPF I/O Failed ON
Door Open Fault UPF I/O Failed OFF
Door Close Fault DF I/O Failed ON
Up Directional Fault DF I/O Failed OFF
Dn Directional Fault MCC I/O Failed ON
No Potential Fault MCC I/O Failed OFF
Stop Switch Fault MCA I/O Failed ON
Gate or Interlock MCA I/O Failed OFF
LC Fuse Blown Fault BRK I/O Failed ON
HC Fuse Blown Fault BRK I/O Failed OFF
Drive Ready Fault DON I/O Failed ON
'P' Input Off Fault DON I/O Failed OFF
Car Safe Fault RUN I/O or UP Fail
UL or DL off Fault RUN I/O or DNR Fail
Delta off Fault Top Door Lock Fault
UT count Fault Mid Door Lock Fault
UT1 count Fault Bot Door Lock Fault
UT2 count Fault Gate Switch Fault
253
Rear Top Lock Fault Elev Door Opening PI= 1
Rear Mid Lock Fault Elev Door Dwelling PI= 1
Rear Bot Lock Fault Elev Door Open PI= 1
Rear Gate Sw Fault Elev Door Closing PI= 1
'P' Input On Fault Elev Door Nudging PI= 1
Estop Fault F1RET Door Open PI= 1
Inspection Input Flt F2CPO Door Open PI= 1
Gate/Lock Byp Sw Flt F2CPO Door Opening PI= 1
GRT1 input ON Fault F2CPO Door Closed PI= 1
GRT1 input OFF Fault F2CPO Door Closing PI= 1
GRT2 input ON Fault F2CPC Door Open PI= 1
GRT2 input OFF Fault F2CPC Door Opening PI= 1
Gripper did not Pick F2CPC Door Closed PI= 1
Gripper Trip Fault F2CPC Door Closing PI= 1
F2HLD Door Open PI= 1
Elevator Status: F2HLD Door Opening PI= 1
Reset Mode PI= 1 F2HLD Door Closed PI= 1
Inspection Mode PI= 1 F2HLD Door Closing PI= 1
Up Fast PI= 1 F2MBC Door Open PI= 1
Up Transition PI= 1 F2MBC Door Opening PI= 1
Leveling Up PI= 1 F2MBC Door Closed PI= 1
Down Fast PI= 1 F2MBC Door Closing PI= 1
Down Transition PI= 1
Leveling Down PI= 1 Rear Door Status:
Soft Start Mode PI= 1 Rear Door Closed PI= 1
Constant Accel PI= 1 Rear Door Opening PI= 1
Roll Over Max Vel PI= 1 Rear Door Dwelling PI= 1
Constant Velocity PI= 1 Rear Door Open PI= 1
Roll Over Deccel PI= 1 Rear Door Closing PI= 1
Constant Deccel PI= 1 Rear Door Nudging PI= 1
Targeting Floor PI= 1 F1RET RDor Open PI= 1
Emergency Slowdown PI= 1 F2CPO RDor Open PI= 1
Safety String Open PI= 1 F2CPO RDor Opening PI= 1
Elevator Off Line PI= 1 F2CPO RDor Closed PI= 1
Elevator Parked PI= 1 F2CPO RDor Closing PI= 1
Waiting Assignment PI= 1 F2CPC RDor Open PI= 1
Door Procedure PI= 1 F2CPC RDor Opening PI= 1
Elevator Stalled PI= 1 F2CPC RDor Closed PI= 1
F2CPC RDor Closing PI= 1
Door Status: F2HLD RDor Open PI= 1
Elev Door Closed PI= 1 F2HLD RDor Opening PI= 1
254
F2HLD RDor Closed PI= 1
F2HLD RDor Closing PI= 1
F2MBC RDor Open PI= 1
F2MBC RDor Opening PI= 1
F2MBC RDor Closed PI= 1
F2MBC RDor Closing PI= 1
10.2.7 Fault Log
This menu allows the user to view or clear the

fault log.
255
10.2.7.1 View Fault Log
The fault display shows the fault, the car position, in a circular buffer that fits up to 50 faults. Once
time and date the fault occurred and the number the buffer is full the next fault over writes the old-
of occurrences. Faults are displayed in the order est fault. Refer to the system faults in the trouble-
of occurrence with the order number displayed shooting section of this manual for possible
on the top left. The largest order number signifies causes of the fault and a description of the
the last fault that has occurred. Faults are stored detailed fault data.
256
10.2.7.2 Clear Fault Log
This operation clears the fault log. Once cleared,

all faults will show “No Occurrences” until a new
fault occurs.
257
10.2.8 Elevator Setup
From this menu, the user can select to set all of doors on inspection and setup the load
the speed clamps, learn the hoistway, run an weigher.
overspeed test, run a car buffer test or run a
counterweight buffer test, open and close the
258
10.2.8.1 Set Speed Clamps
Once the car is running on automatic, the acceler- UT2 and DT3/UT3) and the Down and Up
ation and deceleration rates are adjusted, and sev- Emergency Terminal Speed clamp (DTS/UTS).
eral runs have been made to the top and bottom
terminals at contract speed, the speed clamps can
then be adjusted. Using the set speed clamp
menus on the LCD interface, select the clamp to
adjust and hit enter to access that particular speed
clamp setting. In the above illustration, the sug-
gested setting is shown as the “Clamp Speed”
and the actual clamp setting is shown as “Ins/
Level Spd”. The enter button is used to enter and
exit the edit mode. Once in the edit mode, the
mode button selects the next digit to edit. The up
and down buttons increment or decrement the
clamp speed setting. All speed clamps are
adjusted in the same manor. The speed clamps
that can be adjusted are the inspection/leveling
speed clamp, the Down and Up Terminal Slow-
down speed clamps (DT/UT, DT1/UT1, DT2/
259
10.2.8.2 Automatic Learn Hoistway
260
This operation is used to automatically learn the
hoistway on initial setup. From the LCD Inter-
face, select the “Elevator Setup” menu, use the
up or down button to select the “Learn Hoistway”
item and then hit enter. Follow the directions dis-
played for each step. Learn Hoistway can be initi-
ated with the car located anywhere in the
hoistway but is usually quicker to run the car to
the bottom first.
261
10.2.8.3 Inspection Learn Hoistway
262
This operation is used to manually learn the 10.2.8.4 Overspeed Test
hoistway on initial setup. From the LCD Inter-
face, select the “Elevator Setup” menu, use the The overspeed test disables the velocity check for
up or down button to select the “Learn Hoistway” the car traveling faster than 15% over contract
item and then hit enter. Follow the directions dis- speed. The mechanism is disabled for one run.
played for each step. Learn Hoistway can be ini- See Appendix B for instruction on running an
tiated with the car located anywhere in the overspeed test.
hoistway but is usually quicker to run the car to
the bottom first.
263
10.2.8.5 Car and Counterweight Buffer
Test
The car and counterweight buffer test follow the

same menu operation. For specific instruction on
executing a buffer test, refer to Appendix B.
264
10.2.8.6 Inspection Open/Close Door
The menu allows the user to open or close the

elevator doors from the up or down LCD
interface buttons while the car is on inspection.
10.2.8.7 Load Weigher Setup
265
The load weigher hardware is setup according to
the manufacturers instructions. The controller is
then setup to read the empty and full load values
at every floor.
10.2.8.7.1 Setup Load Weigher
266
10.2.8.7.2 View/Modify LW Setup
267
10.2.8.7.3 View/Modify Load Limits
268
10.2.8.7.4 Load Weigher Calibration
269
10.2.8.8 Reset Gripper Fault
270
A detailed description to reset the gripper fault
or emergency brake fault is shown in Appen-
dix B.
10.2.8.9 Lift Brake On Inspection
271
10.2.8.10 Display Hoistway Tables
272
This menu is useful for checking the direction of
the encoder by watching if pulse counts are
counting up or down. Once the hoistway is
learned, the pulse count values for each floor can
be displayed. If the pulse count for each floor is
zero, the hoistway has not been learned or
retained in memory. The velocity displayed here
is the speed of the car read from the motor
encoder.
10.2.8.11 Select Video Display
273
On jobs with an optional video display, this menu I/O screen is only viewable if this is the group
allows the user to change video display screen car and the controller uses serial hall call boards.
from the group display and group I/O screen to Depending on the number of floors, the number
each of the car I/O and fault displays. The group of car I/Os might not fit on one screen. To view
the remaining I/Os, select I/O Screen 2.
10.2.8.12 Software Version
274
The software version menu allows the user to
view the controller’s software version or to place
the controller in file transfer mode to upload or
download the controller software to another ver-
sion. To place the car in file transfer mode, the
car must be on inspection. As shown in the
above diagram, the controller is programmed to
be Car # 1, having software version 4.03.
10.2.8.13 Diagnostics
275
This menu allows access to diagnostic informa-
tion to help troubleshoot operational or commu-
nication errors.
10.2.8.14 View System Status Log
276
System status information is stored in a circular that cause a fault. The most recent block of
buffer whenever the service, elevator status or a information is always at location 000 and the
fault occurs. This buffer holds 256 blocks of data event prior to the most recent is at block location
in the sequence in which the events occur. This –001. The event at block –002 happened before
data can be used to debug a sequence of events block –001 and also before block 000.
10.2.8.15 Clear System Status Log
277
The system log can be cleared to get a new start-
ing point. When cleared, an empty block dis-
plays “No Data Logged”.
10.2.8.16 Group Comm Status
278
The group communications status shows the The transmit and receive counters should always
number of data packets successfully transmitted be incrementing in both the car and the “group”
and received from the group to the cars, for the car. If either counter does not increment, it
“group” car, and from the car to the group for the would indicate a poor cable connection or that
remaining cars. The communication sequence is there is electrical noise on the communications
always initiated by the group. The group sends a cable. Electrical noise is usually caused by
data packet to the car and after the car validates installing the communications cable in the same
the checksum of the packet, it responds with a conduit with high voltage wires.
data packet to the group.
10.2.8.17 Clear Group Comm Status
279
This menu is used to clear the transmit and
receive counters for the group to car serial com-
munications.
10.2.8.18 Car Comm Status
280
The car communications status shows the num- The transmit and receive counters should always
ber of data packets successfully transmitted and be incrementing for all devices. If the receive
received from the car to devices on the car’s counter does not increment, it would indicate a
CAN bus. These devices can be mounted in the poor cable connection or that there is electrical
motor room, in the car operating panel or on the noise on the communications cable. Electrical
car top. The second line of the car status shows noise is usually caused by installing the commu-
the device software version number and if the nications cable in the same conduit with high
device is currently on line communicating. voltage wires.
10.2.8.19 Clear Car Comm Status
281
receive counters for the car’s CAN bus serial
communications
10.2.8.20 Drive Comm Status
282
The drive communications status shows the num-
ber of data packets successfully transmitted and
received from the car to the drive. The second
line of the drive status shows the drive’s software
version number and if the drive is currently on
line communicating.
The transmit and receive counters should always

be incrementing for all devices. If the receive
counter does not increment, it would indicate a
poor cable connection or that there is electrical
noise on the communications cable.
10.2.8.21 Clear Drive Comm Status
283
receive counters for the car to drive serial com-
munications.
284
Section 11 - Safety Processor LCD
Display Interface
11.1 Operating the LCD Interface
The four inputs buttons used with the LCD dis-

UP button is used to scroll up to play are, UP, DOWN, MODE and ENTER. The
the next menu item or to incre- UP and DOWN buttons are used to scroll up and
ment a data value. down to each menu item. When an appropriate
menu item is reached, the ENTER button is used
to select the item. Some menu items, once
DOWN button is used to scroll selected, show a second menu. Again, use the UP
down to the next menu item or to and DOWN buttons to scroll through the menu
decrement a data value. items and the ENTER button to select a particular
item. The MODE button is used to go back to the
previous menu. When a menu item is an adjust-
MODE button is used to go back able variable, select the item with the ENTER
to the previous menu or to select button and change the variable with the UP or
a digit of a data value. DOWN button. The MODE button is used to
move the cursor to the next digit. When the
appropriate value is reached, used the ENTER
ENTER button is used to select
button to complete the variable change operation
the menu item or to complete
and return to the current menu.
the operation of changing a
data value.
Potentiometer is used to adjust
the viewing angle. It will make
the display lighter or darker.
285
11.2 The Safety Processor Board LCD
Menu Structure
286
11.2.1 Elevator Service
This screen shows the service the car should be

on from the inspection inputs, the gate and lock
bypass switch inputs and the gate and lock inputs.
If any inputs are in error, the error status is dis-
played. Below shows a list of what is displayed
and the condition for it.
287
Table 1: Safety Processor Elevator Service
Elevator Service Condition for Service
AUTO Auto input is on and all inspection inputs are off.

CT INS Car is on car top inspection
GATE BYP Car is on car top inspection and the gate bypass switch is on.
LOCK BYP Car is on car top inspection and the lock bypass switch is on.
ACCESS Car is on access operation.
MR INS Car is on motor room inspection.
IC INS Car is on in car inspection
INS ERR An inspection error has occurred. There must be one and only
one inspection or auto input on. All inputs are off or more than
one input is on.
BYP ERR A gate or lock bypass switch is on but the car is not on car top
inspection.
VEL ERR The car has a velocity error from inspection speed, leveling speed
or a terminal slowdown speed.
UP ERR The up output is on during power up.
DNR ERR The down output is on during power up.
DNR/UP Both up and down outputs are on during power up.
EEP ERR Safety Processor board has an EEPROM error.
NO UTS UTS input not detected at top terminal landing.
NO DTS DTS input not detected at bottom terminal landing.
288
11.2.2 Car Speed
11.2.3 Car Comm (SPB to CPU)
289
11.2.4 Encoder Communication (Tapeless
Selector)
Below shows the communications status between

the Safety Processor Board and the Turck Abso-
lute Encoder
11.2.5 Encoder Status (Tapeless Selector)
290
11.2.6 Safety Processor Pulse Count
291
11.2.7 Safety Processor Adjustable Vari-
ables
292
Table 2: Safety Processor Adjustable Variables
Adjustable
Variables
Top Spd 25 2000 200 Fpm Top Speed or contract speed of the car.
Enc RPM 25 1800 1050 RPM Encoder RPM. Revolutions per Minute of
the Encoder.
Enc PPR 10 10000 2048 PPR Encoder PPR. Pulses Per Revolution of the
Encoder.
Fdbk Typ 0 2 0 _ Feedback Type. Type of feedback used by
the Safety Processor to calculate the car’s
velocity. 0=Tape, 1=Encoder.
Ctrl Typ 0 2 0 _ Control Type. Type of controller used.
0=Hydro, 1=Traction Non-Distance
Feedback, 2=Traction Distance Feedback.
2 Stop 0 1 0 _ 2 Stop. Set to 1 if this car travels to only
two landings. This parameter tells the
Safety Processor that there are no middle
door locks.
RearDoor 0 1 0 _ Rear Door. Indicates that the car has rear
doors and the Safety Processor should
verify the rear door gate and locks.
UTS Vel 0 1000 200 Fpm Up Emergency Terminal Slowdown
Velocity. Maximum velocity to hit the up
terminal slowdown limit. Hitting the limit
at a higher velocity will cause the Safety
Processor board to shut the car down from
a velocity error. For cars with speeds greater
than 200 fpm.
DTS Vel 0 1000 200 Fpm Down Emergency Terminal Slowdown
Velocity. Maximum velocity to hit the
down terminal slowdown limit. Hitting the
limit at a higher velocity will cause the Safety
Processor board to shut the car down from
a velocity error. For cars with speeds greater
than 200 fpm.
293
Adjustable
Variables
INS Vel 0 200 140 Fpm Inspection Velocity. Maximum velocity the
car is allowed to run on inspection.
LEV Vel 0 200 140 Fpm Leveling Velocity. Maximum velocity the
car is allowed to run while leveling with the
door open.
UT Vel 0 500 200 Fpm Up Terminal Slowdown Velocity.
Maximum velocity to hit the up terminal
slowdown “software” limit. The software
limit is set when the car hits the UT limit
then travels the UT Counts closer to the
terminal. Hitting the limit at a higher
velocity than set by this parameter will cause
the Safety Processor board to shut the car
down from a velocity error.
DT Vel 0 500 200 Fpm Down Terminal Slowdown Velocity.
Maximum velocity to hit the down terminal
slowdown “software” limit. The software
limit is set when the car hits the DT limit
then travels the DT Counts closer to the
terminal. Hitting the limit at a higher
velocity than set by this parameter will cause
the Safety Processor board to shut the car
down from a velocity error.
UT Count 0 2000 12 Pulse Up Terminal Count. The number of counts
Counts after the UT limit is hit traveling toward the
terminal landing for the UT software limit
to become active. On cars with only one
slowdown limit, the car would normally hit
the limit at top speed during a recovery run.
The UT Count allows the car time to
slowdown before the Safety Processor can
shut the car down from a limit velocity
error.
294
Adjustable
Variables
DT Count 0 2000 12 Pulse Down Terminal Count. The number of

Counts counts after the DT limit is hit traveling
toward the terminal landing for the DT
software limit to become active. On cars
with only one slowdown limit, the car would
normally hit the limit at top speed during a
recovery run. The DT Count allows the car
time to slowdown before the Safety
Processor can shut the car down from a
limit velocity error.
Dmd Mult 0.5 1.5 1 _ Demand Multiplier. Multiplies the analog to
digital input of the car’s demand velocity.
Increase or decrease the multiplier to display
the exact speed of the car on the Car
Demand screen.
SoftStop 1 10 1 Sec Soft Start Timer. During a soft stop, the
speed command is brought to zero, then the
brake is dropped and finally the run outputs
are turned off. This timer is used to keep
the run outputs from timing out during a
soft stop.
Pls Ftim 0 5.00 2.00 Sec Pulse Count Fault Delay Time. Time delay
to detect that the selector pulses have
stopped.
Vel Ftim 0 0.500 0.180 Sec Velocity Fault Delay Time. Time delay after
a velocity fault to shut the car down.
295
Adjustable
Variables
Spd Chk 0 1 0 - Speed Check. If the car speed is 150 fpm or

less, the Safety Processor Speed Check can
be disabled from this variable. If the speed
is greater than 150 fpm, the variable can still
be set but the speed check is made anyway.
The speed check function, verifies the car
speed on inspection, in leveling with the
door open and when the UT, DT, UTS and
DTS limits are hit. The Safety Processor
will also shut the car down if it stops getting
pulses while the car is running (has an up or
down run signal).
Com Chk 0 1 0 - Communications Check. This parameter
disables the Can Bus communications
check. This is variable allows a new Safety
Processor Board to be used on older
GALaxy I or II controllers that did not use
Can Bus communications. On GALaxy III
controllers, the main CPU must have Can
Bus communications.
Enc Dir 0 1 0 Dir Encoder Direction. Determines if rotation
for the up direction is clockwise or
counterclockwise. 0 = CW, 1=CCW.
UnMotion 0 1 0 Dir Unintended motion check,
0=motion check
1=Disable unintended motion check
296
11.2.8 Safety Processor Inputs and Outputs
This display shows all the inputs and outputs of

the Safety Processor. The following table shows
the name description for each I/O.
297
Table 3: Safety Processor Input and Outputs
Name Description
DLT-1 Door Lock Top Secondary Input. Input equals 1 when the top door lock is made.
DLM-1 Door Lock Middle Secondary Input. Input equals 1 when the middle door locks
are made.
DLB-1 Door Lock Bottom Secondary Input. Input equals 1 when the bottom door lock is
made.
GS-1 Gate Switch Secondary Input. Input equals 1 when the front door gate switch is
made.
RLM-1 Rear Lock Middle Input. Input equals 1 when the rear middle locks are made.
RGS Rear Gate Switch. Input equals 1 when the rear door gate switch is made.
GBP Gate Bypass. This is the input from the gate bypass switch. 1=bypass switch is on.
LBP Lock Bypass. This is the input from the lock bypass switch. 1=bypass switch is on.
MRI Motor Room Inspection. Input equals 1 when the car is on motor room inspection.
CTI Car Top Inspection. Input equals 1 when the car is on car top inspection.
ACC Access. Input equals 1 when the car is on access operation.
ICI In Car Inspection. Input equals 1 when the car is on in-car inspection operation.
AUTO Auto Input. Input equals 1 when the car is on automatic operation.
UL-1 Up Level Secondary Input. Input from the selector that the car is on the up level
sensor in the door zone.
DL-1 Down Level Secondary Input. Input from the selector that the car is on the down
level sensor in the door zone.
UP Up Run Output. Output from the main CPU when the car is running up.
DNR Down Run Output. Output from the main CPU when the car is running down.
UTS Up Emergency Terminal Slowdown. Input goes low when the car is on the up
emergency terminal slowdown limit.
DTS Down Emergency Terminal Slowdown. Input goes low when the car is on the
down emergency terminal slowdown limit.
298
Table 3: Safety Processor Input and Outputs
Name Description
UT Up Terminal Slowdown. Input goes low when the car is on the up terminal
slowdown limit.
DT Down Terminal Slowdown. Input goes low when the car is on the down terminal
slowdown limit.
LSCS Leveling Speed Control. Output comes on when the car is traveling less than 150
fpm.
SFCO Safety Fault Control Output. Output must be on to energize the SFC relay. When
this relay is dropped out, the safety string will be opened.
PICEN PIC Enable. The Safety Processor uses a PIC CPU. This is the enable line to the
PAL device that allows the run outputs from main CPU. 1=OK to run.
299
11.2.9 Limit Velocity
Each time the car hits a limit while running, the This display is used to setup the slowdown veloc-
velocity for that limit is stored in ram and can be ity adjustable variables. Once the car is running
displayed. This velocity value is cleared on a run on automatic, send the car to the terminal limit
in the opposite direction. and record the velocity value after the car stops.
Start with a one-floor run and increase the dis-
tance of the run by one floor until the car reaches
top speed. Use the highest velocity value for that
limit as the adjustable variable value
300
11.2.10 Safety Processor Faults
Faults are displayed in the order that they occur There are 10 fault locations all of which are
with index 0 being the most recent. In the figure cleared on power up or from the clear fault menu.
above, an EEprom fault occurred followed by an Below is a list of faults and their causes.
Inspection Speed fault followed by a UTS Speed
fault. Any index location that does not yet con-
tain a fault will show No Flt.
301
DL/GS Door Lock/Gate Switch Fault. Car is moving outside the door zone with the door
open. The car will immediately shut down.
Add Er Address for Safety Processor Board should not be set internally to a value dif-
ferent than 5. Replace PIC micro controller unit
Com Er CAN communication with CPU timed out. Safety Processor Board stopped
receiving packages from the CPU. This fault always occurs once when the
controller powers up.
DT Spd DT Speed Fault. The car hit the DT limit at a higher velocity than the value set for
the DT Velocity adjustable variable. The car will immediately shut down.
DTS Sp DTS Speed Fault. The car hit the DTS limit at a higher velocity than the value set
for the DTS Velocity adjustable variable. The car will immediately shut down.
EEprom EEprom fault. Defective EEprom device or EEprom device is not installed. The
car will not be able to run until the EEprom is installed or replaced.
EncBat Encoder Battery Error. The encoder uses an internal battery to maintain position
of the car when power is off. While the system is powered up and communicating,
the Safety Processor Board monitors the status of the encoder battery. If the
battery level is too low to maintain the position count, a battery error is declared.
Replace the encoder.
EncCom Encoder Communication Error. Encoder and Safety Processor Board stopped
communicating. Possible causes:
• Improper connection on SPB for R./T+ or R/T-

• Faulty driver chip on Safety Processor Board
• Improper connection on Encoder
• Fault Encoder
EncFlt Encoder Fault. The encoder has detected an internal fault. Replace the encoder.
EncIni Encoder Initialization Error. On power up of the controller the Safety Processor
Board will request the position count from the encoder. If the SPB is unable to
receive the position count and the encoder is still communicating, an initialization
error will be declared. See possible causes under EncCom error.
302
EncPos Encoder Position Error. Once the encoder position count has be initialized during
the learn hoistway procedure, the Safety Processor Board will monitor that the
count does not go above 30,000,000. If it does then a position error is declared.
Possible causes:
• Faulty encoder coupling to governor

• Car was lost from fault UT or DT limit switch and ran down. If the count
decrements past zero it will roll over to 35,000,000.
EncVel Encoder Velocity Error. To calculate velocity from the encoder a position update
must be received every 50 millisecond. If the SBP fails to receive 5 consecutive
data packets from the encoder then the velocity cannot be calculated properly and
you will get this error. See EncCom error for possible causes.
INS DO Inspection Door Open Fault. A door is open while running on inspection and the
gate and locks are not being bypassed. The car will immediately shut down.
INS Sp Inspection Speed Fault. The car exceeded the INS Velocity adjustable variable
while running on inspection. The car will immediately shut down.
Invalid Invalid fault number. (This can only be caused by a programming error in the
chip).
IO Flt I/O Fault. An input is on in error. The Elev Serv display will show the I/O error.
Possible causes are as follows:
• All inspection inputs and the auto input are off.

• More than one inspection or auto input is on at the same time.
• A bypass input is on while the car is not on Car top inspection.
• Both up and down run output from the main CPU are on at the same time.
The car will not be able to run until the error is cleared.
LEV Sp Leveling Speed Fault. The car exceeded the LEV Velocity adjustable variable
while leveling with a door open. The car will immediately shut down.
No Flt No fault is recorded in this index location.
PAL Er • PAL chip not responding
• Reset Safety Processor Board
• Replace PAL chip
• Replace Safety Processor
303
Pls Er Pulse Error. Not enough pulses have occurred during the Pulse Fault Time period.
This error is detected only on automatic operation. Verify that the pulse LED on the
Safety Processor board blinks while the car is running on inspection. Possible causes
are as follows:
• Improper connection for PP and PPS. Refer to the job specific prints.
• PP and PPS field wires need to be swapped.
• Photocoupler in selector is faulty. Call the Factory.
• Voltage from PP to 0V on the Safety Processor Board is less than 10 VDC
with the PP and PPS wires disconnected. Call the Factory.
UmotEr Unintended motion detected. No up or down run signal and velocity greater
than 75 fpm.
UT Spd UT Speed Fault. The car hit the UT limit at a higher velocity than the value set for the
UT Velocity adjustable variable. The car will immediately shut down.
UTS Sp UTS Speed Fault. The car hit the UTS limit at a higher velocity than the value set for
the UTS Velocity adjustable variable. The car will immediately shut down.
11.2.11 Clear Faults
304
11.2.12 Reset Safety Processor Fault Latch
11.2.13 Safety Processor Board Tempera-

ture
305
11.2.14 External Temperature
306
Appendix A
1. Description of I/O Mnemonics
Table 1: I/O Mnemonics
Mnemonic I/O Name
1C-29C 1st – 29th Floor Car Call Inputs

1CA-29CA 1st – 29th Floor Car Call Acknowledge Outputs
1CAR- 1st – 29th Floor Rear Car Call Acknowledge Outputs
29CAR
1CR-29CR 1st – 29th Floor Rear Car Call Inputs
1U-28U 1st – 28th Floor Up Hall Call Inputs
1UA-28UA 1st – 28th Floor Up Hall Call Acknowledge Outputs
1UAR- 1st – 28th Floor Rear Up Hall Call Acknowledge Outputs
28UAR
1UR-28UR 1st – 28th Floor Rear Up Hall Call Inputs
2D-29D 2nd – 29TH Floor Down Hall Call Inputs
2DA-29DA 2nd – 29th Floor Down Hall Call Acknowledge Outputs
2DAR- 2nd – 29th Floor Rear Down Hall Call Acknowledge Outputs
29DAR
2DR-29DR 2nd – 29TH Floor Rear Down Hall Call Inputs
ACC Access Operation Input.
AD Automatic Door Switch Input
AD0-AD11 Analog to Digital Input Data
ALT Alternate Fire Smoke Detector Sensor Input
ATT Attendant Operation Input.
ATTDN Attendant Down Input.
ATTUP Attendant Up Input.
AUTO Automatic Operation Input.
307
Mnemonic I/O Name
B16 Binary Position Sensor 16 Input

BAD Bottom Access Down Input.
BAU Bottom Access Up Input.
BKC Brake Cool Pilot Output
BKS Brake Switch Input
BP Fire Phase I Smoke Detector Bypass Input
BP1 Binary Position Sensor 1 Input
BRK Brake Pilot Output
BRKI Brake Control Input.
CAR Car number
CDL Cab Down Lantern Output
CNV DAC Convert Output
COL Counter Weight Collision Switch Input (Traction Elevators)
CUL Cab Up Lantern Output
DA0-DA7 Digital to Analog Output Data
DC Door Close Output
DCB Door Close Button Input
DCBR Door Close Button Rear Input
DCC DAC Clear Output
DCL Door Close Limit Input
DCLR Door Close Limit Rear Input
DCR Door Close Rear Output
308
Mnemonic I/O Name
DCS DAC Chip Select Output

DDA Down Direction Arrow Output
DEL Delta Relay Input
DF Down Fast Pilot Output
DFI Down Fast Input
DL Down Level Sensor Input
DL-1 Down Level Sensor Secondary Input.
DLB Door Lock Bottom Input.
DLB-1 Door Lock Bottom Secondary Input
DLM Door Lock Middle Input
DLM-1 Door Lock Middle Secondary Input
DLT Door Lock Top Input.
DLT-1 Door Lock Top Secondary Input.
DN Down Normal Limit Input
DNI Down Relay Input
DNI Down Run Input.
DNR Down Pilot Output
DO Door Open Output
DOB Door Open Button Input
DOBR Door Open Button Rear Input
DOL Door Open Limit Input
DOLR Door Open Limit Rear Input
DON Drive On.
DOR Door Open Rear Output
DPR Door Protect Relay Input
309
Mnemonic I/O Name
DS Down Slowdown Sensor Input

DT Down Terminal Limit Input
DT1 Down Terminal Input 1
DZ Door Zone Relay Input
EE Electric Eye Input
EER Electric Eye Rear Input
EMP Emergency Power Input
EPS Emergency Power Select Input
EQ Earthquake Sensor Input
FB Fire Buzzer Output
FF Full Field Pilot Output
FL Fire Phase I Light Output
FS Fire Phase I On Hall Switch Input
FS2 Fire Switch Phase II On Input
FS2C Fire Switch Phase II Call Cancel Input
FS2H Fire Switch Phase II Hold Input
FST Fire Stop Switch Override Output
FSTP Fire Stop Switch Override Output
GBP Gate Switch Bypass Input.
GR1R Rope Gripper 1 Relay Output.
GR2R Rope Gripper 2 Relay Output.
GRT1 Rope Gripper Test Switch Input 1.
GRT2 Rope Gripper Test Input 2.
310
Mnemonic I/O Name
GS Car Gate Switch Input

GS-1 Gate Switch Secondary Input.
GTS Rope Gripper Trip Switch Input.
HB Handicap Buzzer Output
HBE DAC High Byte Enable Output
HC Hall Call Common Input
HWS Hoistway Smoke Sensor Input
ICI In-Car Inspection Input.
ICR Inconspicuous Riser Input
ID Car top Inspection Down Input
IND Independent Input
INS Car Top Inspection Input
ISER In Service Output
IU Car Top Inspection Down Input
LBE DAC Low Byte Enable Output
LBP Lock Bypass Input
LC Logic Common Input
LD Down Hall Lantern Output
LDR Rear Down Hall Lantern Output
LE Level Enable Output
LE1 Level Enable 1 Output.
LE2 Level Enable 2 Output.
LOA DAC Load Output
LU Up Hall Lantern Output
LUR Rear Up Hall Lantern Output
311
Mnemonic I/O Name
LW Load Weighing Bypass Input

MCA Motor Contactor Output
MCAI Motor Contactor Input.
MES Main Egress Smoke Detector Sensor Input
MRI Motor Room Inspection Input.
MRID Motor Room Inspection Down Input.
MRIU Motor Room Inspection Up Input.
MRS Motor Room Smoke Sensor Input
MCC Motor Contactor Output
MCCI Motor Contactor Input.
NB Nudging Buzzer Output
NUD Door Nudging Output
NUDR Door Nudging Rear Output
OT1 OT1 Job Specific Output 1/Fire Service On Output
OT2 OT2 Job Specific Output 2/Motor Starter Timer Relay Output
OT3 OT3 Job Specific Output 3/Generator Pilot Output
OT4 OT4 Job Specific Output 4/Field Weakening Pilot Output
OVL Overload Input
P Potential (Run Contactor) Input
P1-P29 1ST – 29th Discrete Floor Position Indicator Outputs
PFC Primary Fault Control Output.
RDY Drive Ready Input
RGS Rear Car Gate Switch Input.
RGS-1 Rear Car Gate Switch Secondary Input.
RLM Rear Lock Middle Input.
312
Mnemonic I/O Name
RLM-1 Rear Lock Middle Secondary Input.

RST Reset Drive Output
RTL Return to lobby Input
RUN Run Pilot Output
RUNAI Run Auxiliary Input.
RUNI Run Input.
SC1 Speed Clamp 1 Output (Used by CPU for setup)
SE Safety Edge Input
SER Safety Edge Rear Input
SPI# Spare Input, # references input number
SPO# Spare Output, # references output number
SS Safety String Input
CS In Car Stop Switch Input
TAD Top Access Down Input.
TAU Top Access Up Input.
TPL Temp Low Input (Hydraulic Elevators)
UDA Up Direction Arrow Output
UFI Up Fast Input
UL Up Level Sensor Input
UL-1 Up Level Sensor Secondary Input
UN Up Normal Limit Input
313
Mnemonic I/O Name
UP Up Pilot Output
UPF Up Fast Pilot Output
UPI Up Relay Input
UPI Up Run Input.
US Up Slowdown Sensor Input
UT Up Terminal Limit Input
UT1 Up Terminal Input 1
314
Appendix B - Inspection Tests G.A.L. toll free at 1 (877) 425-7763 for free tech-
nical assistance.
1.0 Overspeed Test on a DSD-412 Drive
2.0 Buffer Test
To perform an overspeed test, the mechanic
should follow the required precautions and pro- To perform a buffer test, the mechanic should
cedures set forth in the local and national elevator follow the required precautions and procedures
codes. set forth in the local and national elevator codes.
The following test procedure is written to show
1 With the car on automatic, run the car to how to override the car’s position system so that
the top or bottom (away from the desired it will run into the terminal landing at contract
test run direction). speed but is not intended to circumvent any pro-
2 Access the Overspeed Reference Multi- cedure mandated by the elevator code.
plier parameter (Function #81) in the drive
and set to the desired multiplier value (1.25 1 Inspect and prepare the car according to the
for 125%). “Elevator Industry Inspection Handbook”.
3 Set the Overspeed % (Function #12) fault Make sure that the car is loaded properly for
trip value to a number greater then the the test and that the appropriate car or coun-
desired over speed. terweight safety is tied.
4 Set the Overspeed Test flag (Function #80) 2 For the car buffer test, jump DT, DT1,
in the drive. This will cause the drive to DT2, DT3 and DTS terminal limits to SFC
run over speed for one run. (110VAC). For the counterweight buffer
5 Please note that the “Weak Field Current” test, jump UT, UT1, UT2, UT3 and UTS
parameter (Function #49) may need to be terminal limits also to SFC. Refer to the
adjusted to allow the car to reach the job schematics specific terminal wiring
desired overspeed velocity. locations.
6 On the controller main LCD interface, 3 From the Controller’s LCD display, select
select “Run Overspeed Test” under the the “Elevator Setup” menu and then select
Elevator Setup menu. Follow the direc- “Car Buffer Test” or “Counterweight Buf-
tions on the LCD display to make sure the fer Test”.
automatic door switch is off and the car is 4 Turn off the automatic door switch. To
level at the floor on automatic operation. execute the test, the car must be level at the
Enabling the overspeed test will prevent floor and on automatic operation.
the CPU from detecting an overspeed con- 5 The test also cannot be started from a ter-
dition for one run. minal landing. If the car is at a terminal
7 Place a car call to run the car in the desired landing, the LCD display will show “To
direction to perform the overspeed test. position the car press Enter”. Pressing
8 Place the car on inspection and inspect the “Enter” will place a car call in the middle
car. of the hoistway. If the car is already posi-
9 Reset the Overspeed % (Function #12) tioned properly for the run, the display will
back to the original setting. give the option to position the car or the
10 When the test is complete, return the car to skip to the next step.
automatic operation. 6 Once the car is located in the correct start-
ing position, select “Run Buffer Test”.
If there is any uncertainty about performing this When the “Enter” button is pressed, the
tests with a GALaxy controller, please call car’s position will be modified internally to
315
the top of the hoistway for a car buffer test “Car Buffer Test” to perform a bottom nor-
or to the bottom of the hoistway for a coun- mal terminal slowdown test or “Counter-
terweight buffer test. The car will then run weight Buffer Test” to perform a top
high speed to the appropriate buffer. terminal slowdown limit test.
7 While the car is in motion, the LCD dis- 4 Turn off the automatic door switch. To
play will change to “Press Enter Button to execute the test, the car must be level at the
Cancel Buffer Test”. Pressing the “Enter” floor and on automatic operation.
button will cause the car to execute an 5 For this test only adjust parameters UT Vel
emergency slowdown. and DT Vel on the Safety Processor Board
8 After the test is complete, place the car on to contract speed.
inspection and inspect the car and buffer. 6 The test also cannot be started from a ter-
9 Remove all jumpers, remove load weights minal landing. If the car is at a terminal
and untie the car or counterweight safeties landing, the LCD display will show “To
if previously tied. position the car press Enter”. Pressing
10 Return the car to automatic operation. “Enter” will place a car call in the middle
of the hoistway. If the car is already posi-
If there is any uncertainty about performing tioned properly for the run, the display will
this tests with a GALaxy controller, please call give the option to position the car or the
G.A.L. toll free at 1 (877) 425-7778 for free skip to the next step.
technical assistance. 7 Once the car is located in the correct start-
3.0 Normal Terminal Slowdown Test When the “Enter” button is pressed, the
car’s position will be modified internally to
To perform a normal terminal slowdown test, the the top of the hoistway for a car buffer test
mechanic should follow the required precautions or to the bottom of the hoistway for a coun-
and procedures set forth in the local and national terweight buffer test. The car will then run
elevator codes. The following test procedure is once high speed to the appropriate limit.
written to show how to override the car’s position 8 While the car is in motion, the LCD dis-
system so that it will run into the terminal landing play will change to “Press Enter Button to
at contract speed but is not intended to circum- Cancel Buffer Test”. Pressing the “Enter”
vent any procedure mandated by the elevator button will cause the car to execute an
code. emergency slowdown.
9 After the test is complete remove all
1 Inspect and prepare the car according to the jumpers and adjust the UT Vel and DT
“Elevator Industry Inspection Handbook”. Vel parameters on the Safety Processor
Make sure that the car is loaded properly for Board back to their original values.
the test.
2 For the bottom normal terminal slowdown If there is any uncertainty about performing
test, jump DTS terminal limit to SFC this tests with a GALaxy controller, please call
(110VAC). For the top normal terminal G.A.L. toll free at 1 (877) 425-7778 for free
slowdown limit test jump UTS terminal technical assistance.
limit also to SFC. Refer to the job sche-
matics for specific terminal wiring loca-
tions. 4.0 Emergency Terminal Limit Test
3 From the Controller’s LCD display, select
the “Elevator Setup” menu and then select
316
To perform an emergency terminal limit test, the the top of the hoistway for a car buffer test
mechanic should follow the required precautions or to the bottom of the hoistway for a coun-
and procedures set forth in the local and national terweight buffer test. The car will then run
elevator codes. The following test procedure is once high speed to the appropriate limit.
written to show how to override the car’s position 7 While the car is in motion, the LCD dis-
system so that it will run into the terminal landing play will change to “Press Enter Button to
at contract speed but is not intended to circum- Cancel Buffer Test”. Pressing the “Enter”
vent any procedure mandated by the elevator button will cause the car to execute an
code. emergency slowdown.
8 After the test is complete remove all
1 Inspect and prepare the car according to the jumpers.
“Elevator Industry Inspection Handbook”.
Make sure that the car is loaded properly for If there is any uncertainty about performing
the test. this tests with a GALaxy controller, please call
2 For the bottom emergency terminal limit G.A.L. toll free at 1 (877) 425-7763 for free
test, jump the bottom normal terminal technical assistance.
slowdown limit switches DT, DT1, DT2,
DT3 depending on how many normal 5.0 Reset Gripper Fault or Emergency Brake
slowdown switches the job has to SFC Fault
(110VAC). For the top emergency terminal
limit test jump the top normal terminal To reset a rope gripper fault, first verify that the
slowdown limit switches UT, UT1, UT2, cause of the rope gripper fault has been corrected
UT3 also to SFC. Refer to the job sche- and then follow the directions below:
matics specific terminal wiring locations.
3 From the Controller’s LCD display, select 1 Place the car on machine room inspection.
the “Elevator Setup” menu and then select 2 From the LCD Interface, select the Eleva-
“Car Buffer Test” to perform a bottom tor Setup menu and press the enter button.
emergency terminal limit test or “Counter- 3 Use the up or down button to select the
weight Buffer Test” to perform a top emer- “Reset Rope Gripper” menu and press
gency terminal limit test. enter.
4 Turn off the automatic door switch. To 4 Follow the directions on the screen to press
execute the test, the car must be level at the and hold the enter button to reset the grip-
floor and on automatic operation. per.
5 The test also cannot be started from a ter-
minal landing. If the car is at a terminal The enter button must be held for approximately
landing, the LCD display will show “To 10 seconds. If the car moves unexpectedly
position the car press Enter”. Pressing within the 10 second delay time, releasing the
“Enter” will place a car call in the middle enter button will cause the gripper to re-engage.
of the hoistway. If the car is already posi- When the gripper is full reset the screen will dis-
tioned properly for the run, the display will play “Gripper is Reset”.
give the option to position the car or the
skip to the next step.
6 Once the car is located in the correct start-
When the “Enter” button is pressed, the
car’s position will be modified internally to
317

Traction Elevator Controller Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Traction Elevator Controller Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Traction Elevator Controller-

GAL Manufacturing Corp.

Technical Support: 1-877-425-7778

All drawings, illustrations and information

Rev. 1.1, (February 2010)

• Selective Rear Doors 7. Options: This section of the controller is

9. Contactors: These are various contactors

10. Drive: Magnetek DSD-412 DC SCR

11. Motor Contactors: DC or AC rated motor

12. Ground Terminal: The ground terminal

1.3 Selector System

The selector system for the GALaxy controller

1.3.1 Tape Selector System

The tape system uses a perforated steel tape

car doors are open and when running on

Since this is the normal operating mode, the

• The car operates in selective-collective

2.5 Slowdown Limits

“UTS & DTS” are emergency slowdown limit

The “UT & DT” limit switches are also used as

2.7.1 Tape Selector Installation

To install the floor magnets, the car is placed

Table 2, listed below, shows which binary

Floor BP32 BP16 BP8 BP4 BP2 BP1

Floor BP32 BP16 BP8 BP4 BP2 BP1

Floor BP32 BP16 BP8 BP4 BP2 BP1

Figure 2.4: Magnets

Figure 2.4: Tapeless Selector Mounted on Crosshead

After the selector installation is complete and the

3.3.3 Check The Run Direction 3.3.5 Drive Trips Immediately

3.5 Final Adjustment

3.5.1 Automatic Run

The elevator should now be sitting idle at the

Ride the elevator and evaluate the ride quality.

Fine-tune the floor level magnets. After the

4.1 General Setup 4.2.2 Set Toggle Switches

From the digital operator for the drive, reset

4.3 Run The Car On Inspection

4.3.1 Ready To Run On Inspection

From the LCD interface, select the

The car should be ready to run on inspection if

If the voltage is correct then change the HPV 900

The elevator should now be stopped on the

Figure 4.2: S-Curve Parameters

<= 250 1 2 UT,

4.5.12 Verify The Doors Are Safe

The elevator should now be adjusted. Verify

5.1 General Setup With main-line disconnect in the off position,

2. Temporary jumpers from terminal “HC” 5.2.2 Set Toggle Switches

5.2.6 Preset Adjustable Variables On Safety 5.2.8 Hoist Motor Data

Most of the drive parameters have been preset

5.3 Run Car On Inspection

5.3.1 Ready To Run On Inspection

The car should be ready to run on inspection if

“MR INS” (Motor Room)

Figure 5.1: Inspection String Circuit

With HPV 900 or HPV 600 With GPD 515

5.4 Final Adjustment

A load weighing calibration sequence can be

5.4.9 Check The Doors

The elevator should now be adjusted. Verify

5.4.10 Fine Tune Ride And Stops

Ride the elevator and evaluate the ride